Draytek VIGOR3220 SERIES User Manual

ii

Vigor3220 Series

Multi-WAN Security Firewall

User’s Guide

Version: 3.2

Firmware Version: V3.8.2

(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)

Date: November 23, 2015

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide

Copyrights

© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders.

Trademarks

The following trademarks are used in this document:

 Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.

 Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

 Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

 Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Safety Instructions

 Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.

 The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel.

Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.

 Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.

 The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.

 Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.

 Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.

 Keep the package out of reach of children.

 When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.

Warranty



We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition.

Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Be a Registered Owner

 Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.DrayTek.com.

Firmware & Tools Updates

 Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents. http://www.DrayTek.com

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide iii

European Community Declarations

Manufacturer: DrayTek Corp.

Address: No. 26, Fu Shing Road, Hukou Township, Hsinchu Industrial Park, Hsinchu County, Taiwan 303

Product: Vigor3220 Series Router

DrayTek Corp. declares that Vigor3220 Series of routers are in compliance with the following essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE 1999/5/EC, ErP 2009/125/EC and RoHS 2011/65/EU.

The product conforms to the requirements of Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2004/108/EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN55022/Class A and EN55024/Class A.

The product conforms to the requirements of Low Voltage (LVD) Directive 2006/95/EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN60950-1.

This product is designed for 2.4GHz WLAN network throughout the EC region.

Regulatory Information

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device may accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The antenna/transmitter should be kept at least 20 cm away from human body.

More update, please visit www.draytek.com. iv


T a b l l e o f f C o n t t e n t s

Part I Installation ................................................................................................................1

I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 2

I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 3

I-2 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................... 5

I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router ......................................................................................................... 5

I-2-2 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router ................................................................................. 6

I-3 Accessing Web Page .................................................................................................................. 14

I-4 Changing Password .................................................................................................................... 16

I-5 Dashboard................................................................................................................................... 18

I-5-1 Virtual Panel ...................................................................................................................... 18

I-5-2 Name with a Link ............................................................................................................... 19

I-5-3 Quick Access for Common Used Menu ............................................................................ 20

I-5-4 GUI Map ............................................................................................................................ 21

I-5-5 Web Console ..................................................................................................................... 22

I-5-6 Config Backup ................................................................................................................... 23

I-5-7 Logout................................................................................................................................ 23

I-5-8 Online Status ..................................................................................................................... 24

I-5-8-1 Physical Connection ......................................................................24

I-5-8-2 Virtual WAN ...............................................................................26

I-6 Quick Start Wizard ...................................................................................................................... 27

I-6-1 For WAN1~ WAN4 (Ethernet) ........................................................................................... 28

I-6-2 For WAN5 (USB) ............................................................................................................... 36

I-7 Service Activation Wizard ........................................................................................................... 38

I-8 Registering Vigor Router............................................................................................................. 41

Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................45

II-1 WAN ........................................................................................................................................... 46

Web User Interface .................................................................................................................... 48

II-1-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 48

II-1-1-1 WAN1 ~ WAN4 (Ethernet)...............................................................49

II-1-1-2 WAN5 (USB) ...............................................................................50

II-1-2 Internet Access................................................................................................................. 52

II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in Etherenet WAN ...........................................54

II-1-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in Etherenet WAN..........................55

II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in Etherenet WAN .....................................58

II-1-2-4 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in USB WAN ....................59

II-1-2-5 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in USB WAN ..................61

II-1-2-6 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in Ethernet/USB WAN .............................62

II-1-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in Ethernet WAN........................................62

II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in Etherenet WAN.....................................64

II-1-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in Ethernet WAN.....................................65

II-1-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in Ethernet WAN .........................67

II-1-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in Ethernet WAN ..............................68

II-1-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in Ethernet WAN ....................69

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide v

vi

II-1-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in Ethernet WAN.......................................71

II-1-3 Multi-PVC/VLAN ............................................................................................................... 73

II-1-4 WAN Budget..................................................................................................................... 77

II-1-4-1 General Setup ............................................................................77

II-1-4-2 Monitor Page..............................................................................78

Application Notes ....................................................................................................................... 80

A-1 How to configure settings for IPv6 Service in Vigor3220...............................80

II-2 LAN ............................................................................................................................................ 93

Web User Interface .................................................................................................................... 95

II-2-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 95

II-2-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup ........................97

II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN1 – IPv6 Setup....................................................99

II-2-1-3 Details Page for LAN2 ~ LAN6 and DMZ ............................................ 102

II-2-1-4 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet .................................................. 103

II-2-2 VLAN .............................................................................................................................. 105

II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC ............................................................................................................... 108

II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror............................................................................................................... 110

II-2-5 Web Portal Setup ........................................................................................................... 111

II-3 NAT ...........................................................................................................................................114

Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 115

II-3-1 Port Redirection.............................................................................................................. 115

II-3-2 DMZ Host ....................................................................................................................... 118

II-3-3 Open Ports ..................................................................................................................... 121

II-3-4 Port Triggering................................................................................................................ 123

II-4 Applications .............................................................................................................................. 125


II-4-1 Dynamic DNS ................................................................................................................. 127

II-4-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding .......................................................................................... 130

II-4-3 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 134

II-4-4 RADIUS/TACACS+ ........................................................................................................ 136

II-4-4-1 External RADIUS........................................................................ 136

II-4-4-2 Internal RADIUS ........................................................................ 137

II-4-4-3 External TACACS+...................................................................... 138

II-4-5 Active Directory/ LDAP ................................................................................................... 140

II-4-6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................. 143

II-4-7 IGMP............................................................................................................................... 144

II-4-8 Wake on LAN ................................................................................................................. 145

II-4-9 SMS / Mail Alert Service................................................................................................. 146

II-4-10 Bonjour ......................................................................................................................... 148

II-4-11 High Availability ............................................................................................................ 151

II-4-11-1 General Setup......................................................................... 152

II-4-11-2 Config Sync ............................................................................ 154

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 156

A-1 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management? ......... 156


II-5 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 159


II-5-1 Static Route .................................................................................................................... 160

II-5-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy ........................................................................................... 164

II-5-2-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 164

II-5-2-2 Diagnose ................................................................................. 169


A-1 How to Customize a Secure Route between VPN Router and Remote Router by Using

Route Policy ...................................................................................... 171

A-2 How to Setup Address Mapping........................................................... 174

A-3 How to setup Load Balance for Packets?................................................ 178

Part III Wireless LAN......................................................................................................181

III-1 Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................................... 182


III-1-1 Wireless Wizard............................................................................................................. 185

III-1-2 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 188

III-1-3 Security.......................................................................................................................... 190

III-1-4 Access Control .............................................................................................................. 192

III-1-5 WPS............................................................................................................................... 193

III-1-6 WDS .............................................................................................................................. 196

III-1-7 Advanced Setting .......................................................................................................... 199

III-1-8 AP Discovery ................................................................................................................. 201

III-1-9 Station List..................................................................................................................... 202

III-1-10 Station Control............................................................................................................. 203

III-1-11 Bandwidth Management.............................................................................................. 204

Part IV VPN .....................................................................................................................205

IV-1 VPN and Remote Access ....................................................................................................... 206


IV-1-1 VPN Client Wizard ........................................................................................................ 207

IV-1-2 VPN Server Wizard ....................................................................................................... 213

IV-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................ 217

IV-1-4 PPP General Setup....................................................................................................... 218

IV-1-5 IPsec General Setup ..................................................................................................... 220

IV-1-6 IPsec Peer Identity ........................................................................................................ 221

IV-1-7 Remote Dial-in User...................................................................................................... 223

IV-1-8 LAN to LAN ................................................................................................................... 226

IV-1-9 VPN Trunk Management .............................................................................................. 237

IV-1-10 Connection Management............................................................................................ 246


A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Remote Office and Headquarter via IPsec

Tunnel (Main Mode) ............................................................................. 248

IV-2 SSL VPN ................................................................................................................................. 253

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide vii


IV-2-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 254

IV-2-2 SSL Web Proxy............................................................................................................. 255

IV-2-3 SSL Application............................................................................................................. 257

IV-2-4 User Account................................................................................................................. 259

IV-2-5 User Group.................................................................................................................... 263

IV-2-6 Online User Status ........................................................................................................ 265

IV-3 Certificate Management.......................................................................................................... 266


IV-3-1 Local Certificate ............................................................................................................ 267

IV-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate................................................................................................... 271

IV-3-3 Certificate Backup ......................................................................................................... 273

IV-4 Central VPN Management...................................................................................................... 274


IV-4-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 275

IV-4-1-1 General Settings....................................................................... 275

IV-4-1-2 IPsec VPN Settings .................................................................... 276

IV-4-2 CPE Management......................................................................................................... 277

IV-4-2-1 Managed Device List .................................................................. 277

IV-4-2-2 CPE Maintenance ...................................................................... 279

IV-4-2-3 Google Map............................................................................. 281

IV-4-3 VPN Management......................................................................................................... 282

IV-4-4 Log & Alert .................................................................................................................... 283


A-1 CVM Application - How to manage the CPE (router) through Vigor3220 Series? . 284

A-2 CVM Application - How to build the VPN between remote devices and Vigor3220

Series? ............................................................................................. 288

A-3 CVM Application - How to upgrade CPE firmware through Vigor3220 Series? .... 290

Part V Security ...............................................................................................................293

V-1 Firewall..................................................................................................................................... 294


V-1-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 296

V-1-2 Filter Setup..................................................................................................................... 301

V-1-3 DoS Defense.................................................................................................................. 308


A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet ........................ 312

V-2 CSM(Central Security Management)....................................................................................... 316


V-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile ............................................................................................... 317

V-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade .............................................................................................. 319

V-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile .............................................................................................. 320

V-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile .............................................................................................. 324

V-2-5 DNS Filter Profile ........................................................................................................... 328 viii



A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor ................................................. 330

A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL

Content Filter .................................................................................... 338

Part VI Management ......................................................................................................343

VI-1 System Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 344


VI-1-1 System Status ............................................................................................................... 345

VI-1-2 TR-069 .......................................................................................................................... 347

VI-1-3 Administrator Password ................................................................................................ 349

VI-1-4 User Password.............................................................................................................. 351

VI-1-5 Login Page Greeting ..................................................................................................... 354

VI-1-6 Configuration Backup.................................................................................................... 356

VI-1-7 Syslog/Mail Alert ........................................................................................................... 358

VI-1-8 Time and Date............................................................................................................... 361

VI-1-9 SNMP ............................................................................................................................ 362

VI-1-10 Management ............................................................................................................... 364

VI-1-11 Reboot System............................................................................................................ 368

VI-1-12 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................... 369

VI-1-13 Activation..................................................................................................................... 370

VI-1-14 Internal Service User List............................................................................................ 371

VI-2 Bandwidth Management ......................................................................................................... 372


VI-2-1 Sessions Limit ............................................................................................................... 374

VI-2-2 Bandwidth Limit............................................................................................................. 376

VI-2-3 Quality of Service .......................................................................................................... 378

VI-2-4 APP QoS....................................................................................................................... 385


A-1 How to Optimize the Bandwidth through QoS Technology .......................... 387

A-2 QoS Setting Example ....................................................................... 392

VI-3 User Management .................................................................................................................. 396


VI-3-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 397

VI-3-2 User Profile ................................................................................................................... 399

VI-3-3 User Group.................................................................................................................... 404

VI-3-4 User Online Status ........................................................................................................ 405


A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management ................................... 407

A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature ....................................................... 416

VI-4 Central AP Management (CAM) ............................................................................................. 421


VI-4-1 Status ............................................................................................................................ 422

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide ix

VI-4-2 WLAN Profile................................................................................................................. 423

VI-4-3 AP Maintenance............................................................................................................ 428

VI-4-4 AP Map ......................................................................................................................... 430

VI-4-5 Traffic Graph ................................................................................................................. 433

VI-4-6 Load Balance ................................................................................................................ 434

VI-4-7 Function Support List .................................................................................................... 435

VI-5 External Devices..................................................................................................................... 436

Part VII Others................................................................................................................437

VII-1 Objects Settings..................................................................................................................... 438


VII-1-1 IP Object ...................................................................................................................... 439

VII-1-2 IP Group....................................................................................................................... 442

VII-1-3 IPv6 Object................................................................................................................... 443

VII-1-4 IPv6 Group ................................................................................................................... 445

VII-1-5 Service Type Object..................................................................................................... 446

VII-1-6 Service Type Group ..................................................................................................... 448

VII-1-7 Keyword Object............................................................................................................ 450

VII-1-8 Keyword Group ............................................................................................................ 452

VII-1-9 File Extension Object ................................................................................................... 453

VII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object ........................................................................................... 455

VII-1-11 Notification Object ...................................................................................................... 460


A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN

Disconnection .................................................................................... 462

VII-2 USB Application ..................................................................................................................... 466


VII-2-1 USB General Settings .................................................................................................. 467

VII-2-2 USB User Management ............................................................................................... 468

VII-2-3 File Explorer ................................................................................................................. 470

VII-2-4 USB Device Status....................................................................................................... 471

VII-2-5 Modem Support List ..................................................................................................... 472

VII-2-6 SMB Client Support List ............................................................................................... 473


A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router? ... 474

Part VIII Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................477

VIII-1Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 478


VIII-1-1 Dial-out Triggering....................................................................................................... 479

VIII-1-2 Routing Table.............................................................................................................. 480

VIII-1-3 ARP Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 481 x


VIII-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table ................................................................................................. 481

VIII-1-5 DHCP Table ................................................................................................................ 482

VIII-1-6 NAT Sessions Table ................................................................................................... 483

VIII-1-7 DNS Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 484

VIII-1-8 Ping Diagnosis ............................................................................................................ 485

VIII-1-9 Data Flow Monitor ....................................................................................................... 487

VIII-1-10 Traffic Graph ............................................................................................................. 489

VIII-1-11 Trace Route .............................................................................................................. 490

VIII-1-12 Syslog Explorer ......................................................................................................... 491

VIII-1-13 IPv6 TSPC Status ..................................................................................................... 492

VIII-1-14 High Availability Status ............................................................................................. 492

VIII-1-15 Authentication Information ........................................................................................ 494

VIII-1-16 DoS Flood Table ....................................................................................................... 496

VIII-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not ..................................................................... 498

VIII-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not................... 499

VIII-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer .............................................................................. 502

VIII-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not ......................................................................... 504

VIII-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection ............................................................................ 505

VIII-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary .................................................................. 506

VIII-8 Contacting DrayTek .............................................................................................................. 507

Appendix I: VLAN Applications on Vigor Router ............................................................................ 508

Part IX DrayTek Tools ....................................................................................................517

IX-1 SmartVPN Client..................................................................................................................... 518

IX-1-1 DrayTek Android-based SmartVPN APP for the establishment of SSL VPN connection

................................................................................................................................................. 518

IX-1-2 How to Use SmartVPN Android APP to Establish SSL VPN Tunnel?.......................... 519

Part X Telnet Commands...............................................................................................523

Accessing Telnet of Vigor3220 ....................................................................................................... 524

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide xi

P a r r t t I I I I n s s t t a l l l l a t t i i o n

This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to install the device in hardware and software.

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide 1

I I 1 I I n t t r r o d u c t t i i o n s

T h c o m p a t i i b i i l l i i t t y a n d f f e a t t u r r e s v a r r y u i i i i t t s a i i s s b l l a e f g o e r n e y r r o i i u c r

I I r r n t e t g e i i r o n n a t t o i i r o n p a r l l o v d e b u r r c y s s t t i i

, , r o e n p g l l o f i i e o f a n s s t t

.

.

e h e

F c o o u r n s s t t e p a r e c t g c i u l l i f f i i o i i d c c e u s a l

.

.

S d i p s e t t c r i i i i f f b i i u c t a t s i t o r i o s e r r g u i i d e s r .

.

n , ,

Vigor3220 Series, a broadband router, integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.

By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware encryption of AES/DES/3DES, the router increases the performance of VPN greatly and offers several protocols (such as

IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with up to 100 VPN tunnels.

The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set firewall policy easily. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside and control inside.

Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe. In addition, Vigor3220

Series supports USB interface for connecting USB printer to share printer, USB storage device for sharing files, or for 3G/4G WAN.

2 Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide

I I 1 1 I I n d i i c a t t o r r s a n d C o n n e c t t o r r s

Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first.

LED

ACT (Activity)

USB1~USB2

CSM

Status

Blinking

Off

On

Blinking

On

WLAN

WAN1~WAN4

VPN

LED on Connector

On

Blinking

Off

On

Blinking

On

Off

Blinking

DMZ

LAN

WAN1

~WAN

4

Left On

LED Off

(Green) Blinking

Right

LED

(Green)

Left

LED

On

Off

On

Off

Right

LED

Left

LED

Blinking

On

Off

On

Right

LED

Off

Blinking

On

Off

Explanation

The router is powered on and running normally.

The router is powered off.

A USB device is connected and active.

The data is transmitting.

The profile of CSM (Content Security Management) for

IM/P2P application is enabled from Firewall >> General

Setup. (Such profile is established under CSM menu).

Wireless access point is ready.

Ethernet packets are transmitting over wireless LAN.

The WLAN function is inactive.

The WAN connection is ready.

It will blink while transmitting data.

The VPN tunnel is active.

VPN services are disabled

Traffic is passing through VPN tunnel.

The port is connected.

The port is disconnected.


The port is connected with 1000Mbps.

The port is connected with 10/100Mbps.





The port is connected with 10/100Mbps





The port is connected with 10/100Mbps


4

Interface

Wireless LAN

ON/OFF/WPS

Factory Reset

Console

DMZ

LAN

WAN1~WAN4

USB1~USB2

Description

WLAN On - Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the wireless function is ready, the green LED will be on.

WLAN Off - Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the LED will be off.

WPS - When WPS function is enabled by web user interface, press this button for more than 2 seconds to wait for client’s device making network connection through WPS.

Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button.

Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.

Connecter reserved for RD debug.

Connecter for local DMZ host.

Connecters for local networked devices.

Connecter for remote networked devices.

Connecter for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer).

Connecter for a power adapter.

ON/OFF Power Switch.


I I 2 H a r r d w a r r e I I n s t t a l l l l a t t i i o n

I I 2 1 I I n s t t a l l l l i i n g V i i g o r r R o u t t e r r

Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly.

1.

Connect the cable Modem/DSL Modem/Media Converter to any WAN port of router with

Ethernet cable (RJ-45).

2.

Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to the LAN port of the router and the other end of the cable (RJ-45) into the Ethernet port on your computer. Or, use a switch to connect Vigor router and computer(s).

3.

Connect one end of the power adapter to the router’s power port on the rear panel, and the other side into a wall outlet.

4.

Power on the device by pressing down the power switch on the rear panel.

5.

The system starts to initiate. After completing the system test, the ACT LED will light up and start blinking.

(For the detailed information of LED status, please refer to section 3. Panel Explanation)


I I 2 2 I I n s t t a l l l l i n g U S B P r r i i n t t e r r t t o V i i g o r R o u t t e r r

You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7.

For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com.

Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers

(or wireless clients).

1.

Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port.

2.

Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Devices and Printers.

6

3.

Click Add a printer.


4.

A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next.

5.

In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.


8

6.

In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or

IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next.

7.

Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.


8.

Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the selection, click Next.

9.

Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.


10

10.

Choose Do not share this printer and click Next.

11.

Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.


12.

The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new printer icon and click Printer server properties.

13.

Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.


14.

Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name.


The printer can be used for printing now. Most of the printers with different manufacturers are compatible with vigor router.

Info Note 1: Some printers with the fax/scanning or other additional functions are not supported. If you do not know whether your printer is supported or not, please visit www.draytek.com to find out the printer list. Open Support

>FAQ/Application Notes; find out the link of USB>>Printer Server and click it.

Then, click the What types of printers are compatible with Vigor router? link.

Note 2: Vigor router supports printing request from computers via LAN ports but not WAN port.


I I 3 A c c e s s i i n g W e b P a g e

1.

Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.

You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of

Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later section - Trouble Shooting of the guide.

2.

Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window will be open to ask for username and password.

3.

Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.

Info If you fail to access to the web configuration, please go to “Trouble Shooting” for detecting and solving your problem.


4.

Now, the Main Screen will appear.

Info The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the router you have.

5.

The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.


I I 4 C h a n g i i n g P a s s w o r r d

Please change the password for the original security of the router.

1.

Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will open to ask for username and password.

2.

Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user interface with admin mode.

3.

Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.

16

4.

Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password. Type

New Password and Confirm Password. Then click OK to continue.

Info The maximum length of the password you can set is 23 characters.

5.

Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the

Web user interface for this router.


Info Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user interface is still “admin”.


I I 5 D a s h b o a r r d

Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access,

IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access.

Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.

A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following figure:

18

I I 5 1 V i i r r t t u a l l P a n e l l

On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router) displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, DMZ, LAN, or WAN1~4, related web setting page will be open for you to configure if required.


Port

DMZ

LAN

GigaWAN

1~4

USB

Color

Black

Orange

Green

Black

Orange

Green

Black

Orange

Green

Black

Green

Description

DMZ port is disconnected.

DMZ port is connected at 10/100 Mbps.

DMZ port is connected at 1 Gbps.

LAN port is disconnected.

LAN port is connected at 10/100 Mbps.

LAN port is connected at 1 Gbps.

WAN2 port is disconnected.

WAN2 port is connected at 10/100 Mbps.

WAN2 port is connected at 1 Gbps.

No USB device is connected.

A USB device is connected.

For detailed information about the LED display, refer to I-1-1 LED Indicators and

Connectors.

I I 5 2 N a m e w i i t t h a L i i n k

A name with a link (e.g., Router Name, Current Time, WAN1~5 and etc.) below means you can click it to open the configuration page for modification.


I I 5 3 Q u i c k A c c e s s f f o r r C o m m o n U s e d M e n u

All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be accessed in a quick way just for convenience.

Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions grouped under Quick Access.

The function links of System Status, Dynamic DDNS, TR-069, User Management, IM/P2P Block,

Schedule, Syslog/Mail Alert, LDAP, RADIUS, Firewall Object Setting and Data Flow Monitor are displayed here. Move your mouse cursor on any one of the links and click on it. The corresponding setting page will be open immediately.

In addition, quick access for VPN security settings such as Remote Dial-in User and LAN to

LAN are located on the bottom of this page. Scroll down the page to find them and use them if required.

20

Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of VPN/LAN. Click it to review the

VPN connection(s) used presently.


Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in the field of Connected.

All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port.

The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).

I I 5 4 G U I I M a p

All the functions the router supports are listed with table clearly in this page. Users can click the function link to access into the setting page of the function for detailed configuration.

Click the icon on the top of the main screen to display all the functions.


22

I I 5 5 W e b C o n s o l e

It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user interface.

Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.


I I 5 6 C o n f f i g B a c k u p

There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup.

Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen and a pop up dialog will appear.

Click Save to store the setting.

I I 5 7 L o g o u t

Click this icon to exit the web user interface.


24

I I 5 8 O n l i i n e S t t a t u s

I I 5 8 1 P h y s i i c a l l C o n n e c t t i i o n

Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN connection status, ADSL information, and so on.

Physical Connection for IPv4 Protocol


Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol

Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:

Item Description

LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for

WAN interface.

Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address for WAN interface.

IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.

TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the

LAN interface.

RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3

/WAN4 Status

Enable – Yes in red means such interface is available but not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled.

Line – Displays the physical connection (VDSL, ADSL,

Ethernet, or USB) of this interface.

Name – Display the name of the router.

Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).

Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.

IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.

GW IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the

WAN interface.

TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the

WAN interface.

RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets at the WAN interface.

RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN interface.

Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:


LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..

TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface.

RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.

TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the

LAN interface.

RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN interface.



WAN IPv6 Status Enable – No in red means such interface is available but not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled. No in red means such interface is not available.

Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., TSPC).

Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.

IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.

Gateway IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

Info The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface is ready for accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface is not ready for accessing Internet.

I I 5 8 2 V i i r r t t u a l l W A N

Such page displays the virtual WAN connection information.

Virtual WAN are used by TR-069 management, VoIP service and so on.

The field of Application will list i-9the purpose of such WAN connection.


I I 6 Q u i i c k S t t a r r t t W i i z a r r d

Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login password. After typing the password, please click Next.

On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface (WAN 1 to WAN5) that you use. If Ethernet interface is used, please choose WAN1~WAN4. If USB interface is used, choose

WAN5. For WAN 1 to WAN4, choose Auto negotiation as the physical type for your router.

Here we take WAN1 as an example. Then, click Next for next step.

WAN1~ WAN4 and WAN5 will bring up different configuration page. Refer to the following sections for detailed information.


I I 6 1 F o r r W A N 1 ~ W A N 4 ( ( E t t h e r r n e t t ) )

WAN1~ WAN4 are dedicated to physical mode in Ethernet. Please select the appropriate

Internet access type according to the information from your ISP. For example, you should select PPPoE mode if the ISP provides you PPPoE interface.

P P P o E

1.

Choose WAN1 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.

2.

Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.

28

Available settings are explained as follows:


Service Name

(Optional)

Enter the description of the specific network service.



Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is

63 characters.

Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Confirm Password

Back

Next

Cancel

Retype the password.

Click it to return to previous setting page.

Click it to get into the next setting page.

Click it to give up the quick start wizard.

3.

Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

4.

Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.

5.

Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.


P P T P / / L 2 T P

1.


2.

Click PPTP/L2TP as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.

30



User Name Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is

63 characters.

Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.



PPTP Server / L2TP

Server

Retype the password.

WAN IP Configuration Obtain an IP address automatically – the router will get an

IP address automatically from DHCP server.

Specify an IP address – you have to type relational settings manually.

IP Address - Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask –Type the subnet mask.

Gateway – Type the IP address of the gateway.

Primary DNS –Type in the primary IP address for the router.

Second DNS –Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

Type the IP address of the server.

Back

Next

Cancel




3.

Please type in the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP.

Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

4.


5.



S t t a t i i c I I P

1.


2.

Click Static IP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.

32



WAN IP Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask

Gateway

Type the subnet mask.

Type the IP address of gateway.

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Back

Next

Cancel

Type in the primary IP address for the router.

Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.





3.

Please type in the IP address information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for next step.

4.


5.



D H C P

1.

Choose WAN2 as WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.

2.

Click DHCP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.

34



Host Name

MAC

Type the name of the host.

Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is

39 characters.

Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter the MAC address.

Back

Next

Cancel





3.

After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

4.


5.



I I 6 2 F o r r W A N 5 ( ( U S B )

WAN5 is dedicated to physical mode in USB.

1.

Choose WAN5 as WAN Interface.

2.

Then, click Next for getting the following page.

36



Internet Access Choose one of the selections as the protocol of accessing the internet.

3G/4G USB Modem

(PPP mode)

SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the pin code you can set is 15 characters.

Modem Initial String – Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP. The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters.

APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided


4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.

SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet.

Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically.

APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs.

Info Such mode (4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) is supported by WAN3 only.

3.

Then, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

4.


5.



I I 7 S e r r v i i c e A c t t i i v a t t i i o n W i i z a r r d

Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin operation, therefore, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging

into the web user interface.

Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (

MyVigor

) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. For using Web Content Filter Profile, please refer to later section Web Content Filter Profile for detailed information.

Now, follow the steps listed below to activate WCF feature for your router.

Info Such function is available only for Admin Mode.

1. Open Wizards>>Service Activation Wizard.

2.

The screen of Service Activation Wizard will be shown as follows. Click Next to activate free trail edition.

38

Free trial edition: it offers a period of trial for you to get acquainted with WCF function.


3.

In the following page, you can activate the Web content filter services at the same time or individually. When you finish the selection, please click Next.

Info Commtouch is the web content filter based on Commtouch operated in the worldwide. There is a 30-day trial period. After trial, you can purchase

DrayTek's prepared Commtouch GlobalView WCF package from retailing outlets.

BPjM is WCF for German Speaking users. The fragfINN is whitelist for German

Speaking users. The BPjM is ideal for your family to provide more Internet security for youngsters.

Ｗ eb Content Filter (fragFINN) service will not be supported since January 1,

2015.

4.

Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Next.


5.

Wait for a moment till the following page appears.

When such page appears, you can enable or disable these services for your necessity.

Then, click Finish.

Info The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in

Firewall>>General Setup.

6.

Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.

40

When all the trial editions for various web content filters had been enabled, the configuration page of Service Activation Wizard will be invalid as shown below.


I I 8 R e g i i s t t e r r i i n g V i i g o r r R o u t t e r r

You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration.

1

Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as

User Name / Password.

2

Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.

3

A Login page will be shown on the screen. Please type the account and password that you created previously. And click Login.


42

Info If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an

Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the

Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account.

4

The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. From this page, please click Add or Product Registration.


5

When the following page appears, please type in Nickname (for the router) and choose the right registration date from the popup calendar (it appears when you click on the box of Registration Date). After adding the basic information for the router, please click

Submit.

Vigor3220

6

When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the database.

7

After clicking OK, you will see the following page. Your router has been registered to

myvigor website successfully.



P a r r t t I I I I C o n n e c t t i i v i i t t y

It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in

WAN.

It means local area network. Private IP will be used in

LAN.

Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.

When the data flow passing through, the Network

Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local area network.

DNS, LAN DNS, UPnP, IGMP, WOL, RADIUS, …

Static Route, Load-Balance/Route Policy


I I I I 1 W A N

It allows users to access Internet.

B a s i i c s o f f I I n t t e r n e t t P r r o t t o c o l l ( ( I I P ) ) N e t t w o r k

IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre

(NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:

From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

W h a t t a r r e P u b l l i i c I I P A d d r r e s s a n d P r r i i v a t e I I P A d d r r e s s

As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the

Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the

Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.

G e t t Y o u r r P u b l l i i c I I P A d d r r e s s f f r r o m I I S P

In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over

Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service according to user requirement.

When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated via

PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.

N e t w o r r k C o n n e c t t i i o n b y 3 G / / 4 G U S B M o d e m

For 3G/4G mobile communication through Access Point is popular more and more, Vigor3220 adds the function of 3G/4G network connection for such purpose. By connecting 3G/4G USB

Modem to the USB port of Vigor3220, it can support LTE/HSDPA/UMTS/EDGE/GPRS/GSM and the future 3G/4G standard (HSUPA, etc). Vigor3220n with 3G/4G USB Modem allows you to receive 3G/4G signals at any place such as your car or certain location holding outdoor activity and share the bandwidth for using by more people. Users can use LAN ports on the router to access Internet. Also, they can access Internet via 802.11(a/b/g/n/ac) wireless standard, and enjoy the powerful firewall, bandwidth management, and VPN features of

Vigor3220n series.


After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the WAN3/WAN4 port.

However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3/WAN4 also can be used as backup device.

Therefore, when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically. The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.


W e b U s s e r r I I n t t e r r f f a c e

I I I I 1 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection modes for WAN1, WAN2 and WAN3/WAN4 in details.

This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network. Each

WAN port can connect to different ISPs, Even if the ISPs use different technology to provide telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.). If any connection problem occurred on one of the ISP connections, all the traffic will be guided and switched to the normal communication port for proper operation. Please configure WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 and

WAN4 settings.

This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 and WAN4 respectively.

In default, WAN2 is disabled. If you want to enable it, simply click the WAN2 link and select

Yes in the field of Enable.

48



Load Balance Mode This option is available for multiple-WAN for getting enough bandwidth for each WAN port. If you know the practical bandwidth for your WAN interface, please choose the setting of According to Line Speed. Otherwise, please choose Auto

Weight to let the router reach the best load balance.

Index

Enable V means such WAN interface is enabled and ready to be used.

Physical Mode / Type Display the physical mode and physical type of such WAN interface.

Line Speed(Kbps)

DownLink/UpLink

Active Mode

Click the WAN interface link under Index to access into the

WAN configuration page.

Display the downstream and upstream rate of such WAN interface.

Display whether such WAN interface is Active device or backup device.

Backup (WAN#)- Display the backup WAN interface for such


WAN when it is disabled.

Info In default, each WAN port is enabled.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.

I I I I 1 1 1 W A N 1 ~ W A N 4 ( ( E t h e r r n e t t ) )

Ethernet is the Physical Mode for WAN1 to WAN4.



Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.

Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.

Display Name

Physical Mode

Physical Type

Type the description for such WAN interface.

Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.

Line Speed

You can change the physical type for

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 or choose Auto negotiation for determined by the system.

If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load

Balance Mode, please type the line speed for downloading and uploading for such WAN interface. The unit is kbps.

VLAN Tag insertion Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.

The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the WAN while sending them out.

Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the packets sending by WAN1.

Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.

Tag value – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The


Active Mode

Active When range is form 0 to 4095.

Priority – Type the packet priority number for such VLAN.

The range is from 0 to 7.

Choose Always On to make the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 connection being activated always.

Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface.

When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status.

If you choose Failover as the Active Mode, the option of

Active When will appear.

 Any of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN connection will be activated when any selected WAN interface (checked below) disconnects.

 All of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN connection will be activated only when all of selected

WAN interfaces (checked below) disconnect.

 Check boxes for WAN1 to WAN5 – Specify the WAN interface by checking the WAN box.


I I I I 1 1 2 W A N 5 ( ( U S B ) )

To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3 or

WAN4 interface.

50



Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.

Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.

Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface.


Physical Mode

Line Speed

Active Mode

Active When

Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.

If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load Balance

Mode, please type the line speed for downloading and uploading for such WAN interface. The unit is kbps.

Choose Always On to make such WAN connection being activated always.

Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance function for such WAN interface.

When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the function enabled will balance the data transmission automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in connection status.

If you choose Failover as the Active Mode, the option of

Active When will appear.

 Any of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN connection will be activated when any selected WAN interface (checked below) disconnects.

 All of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN connection will be activated only when all of selected

WAN interfaces (checked below) disconnect.

 Check boxes for WAN1 to WAN5 – Specify the WAN interface by checking the WAN box.



I I I I 1 2 I I n t t e r r n e t t A c c e s s

For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4) for Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for WAN interface, the Access Mode for these connections also varies. Refer to the following figures.

And,

52



Index Display the WAN interface.

Display Name

Physical Mode

Access Mode

It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 that entered in general setup.

It shows the physical connection for WAN1~4 (Ethernet)

/WAN5 (3G/4G USB Modem) according to the real network connection.

Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The details page of that mode will be popped up. If not, click

Details Page for accessing the page to configure the settings.

Details Page This button will open different web page (based on IPv4) according to the access mode that you choose in WAN interface.

Note that Details Page will be changed slightly based on physical mode.


IPv6

Advanced

This button will open different web page (based on Physical

Mode) to setup IPv6 Internet Access Mode for WAN interface.

If IPv6 service is active on this WAN interface, the color of

“IPv6” will become green.

This button allows you to configure DHCP client options.

DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and data information when such function is enabled and configured.

Enable – Check the box to enable the function of DHCP

Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number with data. For example,

Option number:100

Data: abcd

When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.

Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be overwritten by such function. WAN5 ~ WAN7 can be located under WAN>>Multi-PVC/VLAN.

Option Number – Type a number for such function.

DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to be stored.

Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the function of DHCP option.


Info If you choose to configure option 61 here, the detailed settings in WAN>>Interface

Access will be overwritten.

I I I I 1 2 1 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r P P P o E i i n E t t h e r r e n e t W A N

To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the

WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will be shown.

54



Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

ISP Access Setup

WAN Connection

Detection

Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your

ISP.

Service Name (Optional) - Enter the description of the specific network service.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.


MTU

PPP/MP Setup

IP Address Assignment

Method (IPCP)

Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) – Type TTL value.

It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.

PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for

PPP.

Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the

Internet after passing through the time without any action.

Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use

WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Type the additional WAN

IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC

Address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router manually.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.

I I I I 1 2 2 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r S t t a t i i c o r r D y n a m i i c I I P i i n E t h e r r e n e t t W A N

For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a

Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address to the WAN interface.

To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the Static

or Dynamic IP tab. The following web page will be shown.


56



Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

Keep WAN Connection Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP environments because some ISPs will drop connections if there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check

Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.

PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please specify the IP address for the system to PING it for keeping alive.

PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.

WAN Connection

Detection


Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.

 Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

 TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference.

TTL value is set by telnet command.

MTU

RIP Protocol


Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP （ RFC1058 ） specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.


Bridge Mode

Click Enable RIP for activating this function.

Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem.

Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under

User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.

Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN subnet and such WAN interface.

WAN IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually.


WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using.

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use

Dynamic IP mode.

 Router Name: Type in the router name provided by ISP.

 Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

DHCP Client Identifier for some ISP

 Enable: Check the box to specify username and password as the DHCP client identifier for some

ISP.

 Username: Type a name as username. The maximum length of the user name you can set is

63 characters.

 Password: Type a password. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data if you want to use Static IP mode.

 IP Address: Type the IP address.

 Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask.

 Gateway IP Address: Type the gateway IP address.

Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default

MAC address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.

DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.



I I I 1 2 3 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r P P T P / / L 2 T P i i n E t t h e r e n e t t W A N

To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP/L2TP tab.

The following web page will be shown.

58



PPTP/L2TP Enable PPTP- Click this radio button to enable a PPTP client to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.

Enable L2TP - Click this radio button to enable a L2TP client to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.

Disable – Click this radio button to close the connection through PPTP or L2TP.

Server Address - Specify the IP address of the PPTP/L2TP server if you enable PPTP/L2TP client mode.

Specify Gateway IP Address – Specify the gateway IP address for DHCP server.

ISP Access Setup Username -Type in the username provided by ISP in this field. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password -Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.



MTU

PPP Setup

IP Address Assignment

Method(IPCP)


PPP Authentication - Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for

PPP.

Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the

Internet after passing through the time without any action.



WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using.

Fixed IP - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your

ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function. Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box.

Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.

WAN IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.

 IP Address – Type the IP address.

 Subnet Mask – Type the subnet mask.


I I I I 1 2 4 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r 3 G / / 4 G U S B M o d e m ( ( P P P m o d e ) ) i i n U S B W A N

To use 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) for

WAN5. The following web page will be shown.



Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router.


60

3G /4G USB Modem (PPP mode)

SIM PIN code

Modem Initial String

APN Name

Modem Initial String2

Modem Dial String

Service Name

PPP Username

PPP Password

PPP Authentication

Index (1-15) in Schedule

Setup

WAN Connection

Detection

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access

Internet.

The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 15 characters.

Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.

The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters.

APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.

The maximum length of the name you can set is 43 characters.

The initial string 1 is shared with APN.

In some cases, user may need another initial AT command to restrict 3G band or do any special settings.


Such value is used to dial through USB mode. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.



Type the PPP username (optional). The maximum length of the name you can set is 63 characters.

Type the PPP password (optional). The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.

All the schedules can be set previously in Application >>

Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page


Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items.

 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP


address in this field for pinging.

 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.

 Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.

 Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN disconnection is judged.


I I I I 1 2 5 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r 3 G / / 4 G U S B M o d e m ( ( D H C P m o d e ) ) i i n U S B W A N

To use 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) for

WAN3/WAN4. The following web page will be shown.



Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router.

3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode)

SIM PIN code

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access

Internet.

The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19 characters.


Network Mode

APN Name

MTU

WAN Connection

Detection

Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically.

APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.




Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items.

 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging.

 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN gateway IP address for pinging. With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if the WAN connection is on or off.

 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.

 Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.

 Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN disconnection is judged.


I I I 1 2 6 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r I I P v 6 – O f f f f l i i n e i n E t t h e r r n e t / U S B W A N

When Offline is selected, the IPv6 connection will be disabled.

62

I I I I 1 2 7 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r I I P v 6 – P P P i i n E t t h e r r n e t t W A N

During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of the generated prefix.


No need to type any other information for PPP mode.



WAN Connection

Detection

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.

 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value.

Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on PPP mode.


Info At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK.

I I I 1 2 8 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r I I P v 6 – T S P C i n E t t h e r e n e t t W A N

Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6 network easily.

Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago

(http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account ) before you try to use TSPC for network connection. TSPC would connect to tunnel broker and requests a tunnel according to the specifications inside the configuration file. It gets a public IPv6 IP address and an IPv6 prefix from the tunnel broker and then monitors the state of the tunnel in background.

After getting the IPv6 prefix and starting router advertisement daemon (RADVD), the PC behind this router can directly connect to IPv6 the Internet.

64



Username Type the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password for http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account.


Password

Tunnel Broker

Type the password assigned with the user name.


Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.


WAN Connection

Detection


Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.




I I I I 1 2 9 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r I I P v 6 – A I I C C U i i n E t h e r r n e t t W A N



Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always.

Username

Password

Tunnel Broker

Type the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password.


Type the password assigned with the user name.


It means a server of AICCU. The server can provide IPv6 tunnels to sites or end users over IPv4.

Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.


Tunnel ID

Subnet Prefix

WAN Connection

Detection

One user account may have several tunnels. And, each tunnel shall have one specified tunnel ID (e.g., T115394).

Type the ID offered by Tunnel Broker.

Type the subnet prefix address obtained from service provider.

The maximum length of the prefix you can set is 128 characters.


Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.





I I I 1 2 1 0 D e t a i i l l s P a g e f f o r I P v 6 – D H C P v 6 C l l i i e n t i n E t t h e r r n e t t W A N

DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.



Identify Association Choose Prefix Delegation or Non-temporary Address as the identify association.

Type a number as IAID. IAID

WAN Connection

Detection

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. With NS Detect mode, the system will check if network connection is established or not, like IPv4 ARP Detect. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.



Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem.






I I I I 1 2 1 1 D e t a i i l l s P a g e f f o r I I P v 6 – S t a t t i i c I I P v 6 i i n E t t h e r n e t t W A N

This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface.

68



Static IPv6 Address configuration

IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 Static IP Address.

Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.

Add – Click it to add a new entry.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.

Display current interface IPv6 address. Current IPv6 Address

Table

Static IPv6 Gateway

Configuration

IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address here.

WAN Connection

Detection


Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.




Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem.





I I I 1 2 1 2 D e t a i i l l s P a g e f f o r I P v 6 – 6 i i n 4 S t t a t i i c T u n n e l l i i n E t h e r r n e t t W A N

This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface.

Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network.

However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability.



Remote Endpoint IPv4

Address

Type the static IPv4 address for the remote server.

6in4 IPv6 Address Type the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value for prefix length.

LAN Routed Prefix

Tunnel TTL

Type the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value for prefix length.

Type the number for the data lifetime in tunnel.


70

WAN Connection

Detection






Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode.


I I I 1 2 1 3 D e t a i i l l s P a g e f f o r I P v 6 – 6 r r d i n E t t h e r n e t t W A N

This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface.



6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP".

Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.

IPv4 Border Relay

IPv4 Mask Length

Type the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given

6rd domain.

Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across all

CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain.

It may be any value between 0 and 32.

6rd Prefix

6rd Prefix Length

Type the 6rd IPv6 address.

Type the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in number of bits.

WAN Connection

Detection






Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6rd mode.



I I I I 1 3 M u l l t t i i P V C / / V L A N

This router allows you to create multi-PVC for different data transferring for using. Simply go to WAN and select Multi-PVC/VLAN page.

The system allows you to set up to eight channels which are ready for choosing as the first

PVC line that will be used as multi-PVC.



Channel Display the number of each channel.

Channels 1 and 2 are used by the Internet Access web user interface and can not be configured here.

Channels 5 ~ 10 are configurable.

Enable

WAN Type

VLAN Tag

Display whether the settings in this channel are enabled

(Yes) or not (No).

Displays the physical medium that the channel will use.

Displays the VLAN tag value that will be used for the packets traveling on this channel.


Click any index (6~8) to get the following web page:

74



Multi-VLAN Channel 6~8 Enable – Click it to enable the configuration of this channel.

Disable –Click it to disable the configuration of this channel.

WAN Type

General Settings

The connections and interfaces created in every channel may select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the

Multi-VLAN application, only the Ethernet WAN type is available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN interface the channel shall use here.

VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value.

Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.

Bridge mode Enable – Click it to enable Bridge mode for such channel.

Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the corresponding check box(es) for applying the bridge connection.


Open WAN Interface for this Channel

WAN Connection

Detection

WAN Setup

Check the box to enable relating function.

WAN Application –

Management – It can be specified for general management

(Web configuration/telnet/TR069). If you choose

Management, the configuration for this VLAN will be effective for Web configuration/telnet/TR069.

IPTV - The IPTV configuration will allow the WAN interface to send IGMP packets to IPTV servers.


Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.

Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference. TTL value is set by telnet command.

It is available only when VDSL or Ethernet (WAN2) is selected as WAN Type. Choose PPPoE/PPPoA Client or

Static or Dynamic IP as the WAN mode for such channel.

 If PPPoE/PPPoA Client is selected as WAN Setup, you have to configure the settings listed under ISP Access

Setup. Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP.

ISP Name – Type in the name of your ISP.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field. The maximum length of the name you can set is 80 characters.

Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field. The maximum length of the password you can set is

48 characters.

PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for

PPP.

 Always On – Check it to keep the network connection always.

 Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action.

Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

 If Static or Dynamic IP is selected as WAN Setup, you have to configure the settings listed under WAN IP

Network Settings .

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

 Router Name – Type in the router name provided by

ISP.

 Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.

 IP Address – Type in the private IP address.

 Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.


 Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.

DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings and return to previous page.


I I I I 1 4 W A N B u d g e t t

This function is used to determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP. Please note that the Quota Limit and Billing cycle day of month settings will need to be configured correctly first in order for some period calculations to be performed correctly.

I I I I 1 4 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

Click WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 link to open the following web page.



Enable Check the box to enable such function.

Quota Limit

When quota exceeded

Type the data traffic quota allowed for such WAN interface.

There are two unit (MB and GB) offered for you to specify.

Check the box(es) as the condition(s) for the system to perform when the traffic has exceeded the budget limit.

Shutdown WAN interface – All the outgoing traffic through such WAN interface will be terminated.

Send Mail Alert to Administrator – The system will send out a warning message to the administrator when the quota is


78

Monthly

Custom running out. However, the connection charges will be calculated continuously.

Send SMS messages to Administrator - The system will send out SMS message to the administrator when the quota is running out.

Some ISP might apply for the network limitation based on the traffic limit per month. This setting is to offer a mechanism of resetting the traffic record every month.

Data quota resets on day … – You can determine the starting day in one month.

This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request.

The WAN budget will be reset with an interval of billing cycle.

Custom – Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of cycle duration is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours. In addition, you can specify which day of today is in a cycle.

 Cycle duration: Specify the days to reset the traffic record. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7 days;

20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time is up, the router will reset the traffic record automatically.

 Today is day – Specify the day in the cycle as the starting point which Vigor router will reset the traffic record. For example, “3” means the third day of the cycle duration.


I I I I 1 4 2 M o n i i t t o r P a g e

The monitor page displays the status WAN budget, including the duration and the usage.


If the WAN budget is exhausted, a lock will be displayed on the page if Shutdown WAN

interface is selected. Which means no data transmission will be carried out. Moreover, the system will send out a warning message to the administrator if Send Mail Alert to

Administrator is selected. Or, the system will send out SMS message to the administrator if

Send SMS messages to Administrator is selected.


A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n N o t t e s

A 1 H o w t t o c o n f i i g u r r e s e t t t t i i n g s f f o r r I I P v 6 S e r r v i i c e i i n V i i g o r r 3 2 2 0

Due to the shortage of IPv4 address, more and more countries use IPv6 to solve the problem.

However, to continually use the original rich resources of IPv4, both IPv6 and IPv4 networks shall communicate for each other via intercommunication mechanism to complete the shifting job from IPv4 to IPv6 gradually. At present, there are three common types of intercommunication mechanisms:

 Dual Stack

The user can use both IPv4 and IPv6 techniques at the same time. That means adding an

IPv6 stack on the origin network layer to let the host own the communication capability of

IPv4 and IPv6.

 Tunnel

Both IPv6 hosts can communication for each other via existing IPv4 network environment.

The IPv6 packets will be encapsulated with the header of IPv4 first. Later, the packets will be transformed and judged by IPv4 router. Once the packets arrive the border between

IPv4 and IPv6, the header of IPv4 on the packets will be removed. Then, the packets with

IPv6 address will be forwarded to the destination of IPv6 network.

 Translation

Such feature is active only for the user who uses IPv4 to communicate with other user using IPv4 service.

Before configuring the settings on Vigor3220, you need to know which connection type that your IPv6 service used.

Info For the IPv6 service, you have to configure WAN/LAN settings before using the service.

I I .

.

C o n f f i i g u r r i i n g t t h e W A N S e t t t i i n g s s

For the IPv6 WAN settings for Vigor3220, there are five connection types to be chosen: PPP,

TSPC, AICCU, DHCPv6 Client and Static IPv6.

1.

Access into the web user interface of Viogr3220. Open WAN>> Internet Access. Choose one of the WAN interfaces as the one supporting IPv6 service. Then, click the IPv6 button of the selected WAN.


Info Only one WAN interface support IPv6 service at one time. In this example, WAN2 is chosen as the one supporting IPv6 service.

2.

In the following figure, use the drop down list to choose a proper connection type.

Different connection types will bring out different configuration page. Refer to the following:

 PPP – Dual Stack application, IPv4 and IPv6 services can be utilized at the same time

Choose PPP and type the information for PPPoE of IPv4.


82

Access into the setting page for IPv6 service, it is not necessary for you to configure anything.

Click OK and open Online Status. If the connection is successful, you will get the IP address for IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.



84

 TSPC – Tunnel application, both IPv6 hosts communicate through IPv4 network

Choose TSPC and type the information for TSPC service.

Info While using such mode, you have to make sure the IPv4 network connection is normal.

(In the following figure, the TSPC information is obtained from http://gogo6.com/ after applied for the service.)

Click OK and open Online Status. If the connection is successful, the physical connection will be shown as follows:


 AICCU – Tunnel application

Choose AICCU and type the information for AICCU of IPv6.

Info While using such mode, you have to make sure the IPv4 network connection is normal.

(In the following figure, the AICCU information is obtained from https://www.sixxs.net/main/ after applied for the service.)

Click OK and open Online Status. If the connection is successful, the physical connection will be shows as follows:


86

 DHCPv6 Client

Choose DHCPv6 Client. Click one of the identity associations and type the IAID number.



 Static IPv6

Choose Static IPv6. Type IPv6 address, Prefix Length and Gateway Address.



88

 6in4 Static Tunnel

Choose 6in4 Static Tunnel. Type remote endpoint IPv4 address, 6in4 IPv6 Address, LAN

Routed Prefix and Tunnel TTL.



 6rd

Choose 6rd. Type IPv4 Border Relay, IPv4 Mask Length, 6rd Prefix and 6rd Prefix Length.



89

I I I I .

.

C o n f f i i g u r i i n g t h e L A N S e t t t i i n g s s

After finished the WAN settings for IPv6, please configure the LAN settings to make the router’s client get the IPv6 address.

1.

Access into the web user interface of Viogr3220. Open LAN>> General Setup. Click the

IPv6 button.

2.

In the field of DHCPv6 Server Configuration, when DHCPv6 service is enabled, you can assign available IPv6 address for the client manually.

90

Info When both mechanisms are enabled, the client can determine which mechanism to be used (e.g., the default mechanism for Windows7 is

RADVD).


I I I I I .

.

C o n f f i i r r m i n g I I P v 6 S e r r v i i c e R u n S u c c e s s s s f u l l l l y

1.

Make sure you have obtained the correct IPv6 IP address. Get into MS-DOS interface and type the command of “ipconfig”. Refer to the following figure.

From the above figure we can see IPv6 IP address has been captured by the system.

2.

Use the Ping command to ping any IPv6 address indicating an IPv6 website. For example, www.kame.net is a website supporting IPv4 IP and IPv6 IP services. Its IPv6 address is seen with a format of 2001:200:dff:fff1:216:3eff:feb1:44d7.

After getting the above message, it means the IPv6 service has been activated successfully.


3.

Connect to the website for IPv6. Open a web browser and type an URL of IPv6, e.g., www.kame.net. If your computer accesses into the website by using IPv6 address, you may see a turtle dancing on the screen. If not, only a steady turtle will be seen.

If you can see a turtle dancing on the screen, that means IPv6 service is ready for you to access and utilize.


I I I I 2 L A N

Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.

The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public

IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.

In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24.

This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.


94

W h a t t i i s R o u t t i i n g I I n f f o r r m a t t i i o n P r o t o c o l l ( ( R I I P ) )

Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.

W h a t t i i s S t t a t i c R o u t t e

When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence of RIP.

W h a t t a r r e V i i r t u a l l L A N s a n d R a t e C o n t t r r o l l

You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 8 virtual LANs. To manage the communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function and the rate of each.



I I I I 2 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

This page provides you the general settings for LAN. Click LAN to open the LAN settings page and choose General Setup.

There are several subnets provided by the router which allow users to divide groups into different subnets (LAN1 – LAN6). In addition, different subnets can link for each other by configuring Inter-LAN Routing. At present, LAN1 setting is fixed with NAT mode only. LAN2 –

LAN6 can be operated under NAT or Route mode. IP Routed Subnet can be operated under

Route mode.



General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively.


Advanced

Index - Display all of the LAN items.

Status- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default.

LAN2 –LAN6 and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by checking the box of Status.

DHCP- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If required, please check the DHCP box for each LAN.

IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item. Such information is set in default and you can not modify it.

Details Page - Click it to access into the setting page. Each

LAN will have different LAN configuration page. Each LAN must be configured in different subnet.

IPv6 – Click it to access into the settings page of IPv6.

DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and data information when such function is enabled.

96

Inter-LAN Routing

Enable/Disable – Enable/Disable the function of DHCP

Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number with data. For example,

Option number:100

Data: abcd

When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.

Interface – Choose the interface for such option.

Next Server IP Address/SIAddr – Type the IP address for the next server. Vigor router’s DHCP server can redirect clients to a secondary server specified in such field.

Option Number – Type a number for such function.

DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex or address list) for the data to be stored.

Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the function of DHCP option.

Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and

LAN).

When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.


I I I 2 1 1 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r L A N 1 – E t h e r r n e t t T C P / / I P a n d D H C P S e t t u p

There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for detailed information.



Network Configuration For NAT Usage,

IP Address - Type in private IP address for connecting to a local private network (Default: 192.168.1.1).

Subnet Mask - Type in an address code that determines the size of the network. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24)

RIP Protocol Control,

Disable - deactivate the RIP protocol. It will lead to a stoppage of the exchange of routing information between routers. (Default)

Enable – activate the RIP protocol.

DHCP Server

Configuration

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatches related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Enable Relay Agent –Specify which subnet that DHCP server is located the relay agent should redirect the DHCP request to.

 DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable


98

DNS Server IP Address

Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.

Start IP Address - Enter a value of the IP address pool for the

DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the

1st IP address of your router is 192.168.1.1, the starting IP address must be 192.168.1.2 or greater, but smaller than

192.168.1.254.

IP Pool Counts - Enter the maximum number of PCs that you want the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to. The default is

50 and the maximum is 253.

Gateway IP Address - Enter a value of the gateway IP address for the DHCP server. The value is usually as same as the 1st IP address of the router, which means the router is the default gateway.

Lease Time - Enter the time to determine how long the IP address assigned by DHCP server can be used.

Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically -

Whenever a DHCP client requests an IP address from the LAN

DHCP server, the server will give out an IP to this client for a certain amount of time (e.g., 1 day). However, even if this client only uses the IP for say 5 minutes, the server still

"reserves" 1 day for that client. Because a DHCP server only has a limited number of IPs to lease to its DHCP clients, soon enough all the IPs will be used out and then no one will be able to get any IPs from this server anymore. Therefore, this feature is used to get the IP back from inactive clients (i.e. doesn't use the IP but the server still reserves the IP for him).

DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host must have a unique IP address, also they may have a human-friendly, easy to remember name such as www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly name into its equivalent IP address

.

Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address here because your ISP should provide you with usually more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default DNS Server IP address: 194.109.6.66 to this field.

Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server

IP address here because your ISP often provides you more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default secondary DNS Server

IP address: 194.98.0.1 to this field.

The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online

Status:

If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.

If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.

Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)


connection.


I I I I 2 1 2 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r L A N 1 – I I P v 6 S e t u p

There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for detailed information. Below shows the settings page for IPv6.

It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and the other is DHCPv6 Server (Stateful).



Enable

WAN Primary Interface

Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6

Setup.

Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6.

Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN.


100 configuration

Unique Local Address

(ULA) configuration

Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.

Add – Click it to add a new entry.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.

Such feature is used for the host without assigned IPv6 address to obtain IPv6 address automatically or have an IPv6 address specified manually via ULA configuration. It is convenient for communication among different subnets.

Auto ULA Prefix – The system will generate the required IPv6 address.

Manually ULA Prefix – A user can type the ULA IPv6 address manually.

DNS Server IPv6 Address Primary DNS Sever – Type the IPv6 address for Primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS Server –Type another IPv6 address for DNS server if required.

Management Host under LAN can be assigned IP address from Vigor router via the following method.

DHCPv6 Server

Configuration

Advance setting

 SLAAC(stateless) – The IP address (with Prefix) of the host shall be formed according to RA transmitted by Vigor router.

 DHCPv6(stateful) - The IP address of the host shall be assigned after communicating with DHCPv6 server for answering the request of client.

 Off – No IP address is assigned.

Other Option (O-bit) – Check this box to enable the O-bit for obtaining additional information (e.g., DNS) from DHCPv6.

Enable Server –Click it to enable DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6

Server could assign IPv6 address to PC according to the

Start/End IPv6 address configuration.

Disable Server –Click it to disable DHCPv6 server.

Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Type the start and end address for IPv6 server.

More options are offered under the Advance setting. Click

Edit to open the pop-up window.


Router Advertisement Server – Click Enable to enable router advertisement server. The router advertisement daemon sends Router Advertisement messages, specified by

RFC 2461, to a local Ethernet LAN periodically and when requested by a node sending a Router Solicitation message.

These messages are required for IPv6 stateless auto-configuration.

Disable – Click it to disable router advertisement server.

Hop Limt – The value is required for the device behind the router when IPv6 is in use.

Min/Max Interval Time (sec) – It defines the interval

(between minimum time and maximum time) for sending RA

(Router Advertisement) packets.

Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time,

Vigor2925 can be treated as the default gateway.

Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets are transmitted.

MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN.

Extension WAN – Not only the IP address can be obtained from the primary WAN, but also the prefix for IPv6 LAN IP address can be assigned by extension WAN specified here.



I I I 2 1 3 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r L A N 2 ~ L A N 6 a n d D M Z

102



Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration.

For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT function.

For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this function.

IP Address - Type in private IP address for connecting to a local private network (Default: 192.168.1.1).


DHCP Server

Configuration

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Enable Relay Agent - If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let

Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable Relay

Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help to forward the

DHCP request to the DHCP server.





192.168.1.254.



Gateway IP Address - Enter a value of the gateway IP address for the DHCP server. The value is usually as same as the 1st IP address of the router, which means the router is the default gateway.


Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically -

Whenever a DHCP client requests an IP address from the LAN

DHCP server, the server will give out an IP to this client for a certain amount of time (e.g., 1 day). However, even if this client only uses the IP for say 5 minutes, the server still

"reserves" 1 day for that client. Because a DHCP server only has a limited number of IPs to lease to its DHCP clients, soon enough all the IPs will be used out and then no one will be able to get any IPs from this server anymore. Therefore, this feature is used to get the IP back from inactive clients (i.e. doesn't use the IP but the server still reserves the IP for him.


I I I I 2 1 4 D e t t a i i l l s P a g e f o r r I I P R o u t e d S u b n e t t



Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration.

For Routing Usage,

IP Address - Type in private IP address for connecting to a local private network (Default: 192.168.1.1).


104

DHCP Server

Configuration


RIP Protocol Control,

Disable - deactivate the RIP protocol. It will lead to a stoppage of the exchange of routing information between routers. (Default)

Enable – activate the RIP protocol.

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.




192.168.1.254.




Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for the clients coming from P1. Please check the box of P1.

Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.

MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by one and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be assigned, deleted or edited from above pool. Set a list of MAC Address for 2 nd DHCP server will help router to assign the correct IP address of the correct subnet to the correct host. So those hosts in 2 nd subnet won’t get an IP address belonging to 1 st subnet.

Add – Type the MAC address in the boxes and click this button to add.

Delete – Click it to delete the selected MAC address.

Edit – Click it to edit the selected MAC address.

Cancel – Click it to cancel the job of adding, deleting and editing.



I I I I 2 2 V L A N

With the 6-port Gigabit switch on the LAN side, Vigor router provides extremely high speed connectivity for the highest speed local data transfer of any server or local PCs. On the

Wireless-equipped models (e.g., Vigor3220n), each of the wireless SSIDs can also be grouped within one of the VLANs.

T a g g e d V L A N

The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for

LAN-side QoS. You can assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router may also be operating, to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based

multi-subnet.

P o r r t t B a s e d V L A N

Relative to tag-based VLAN which groups clients with an identifier, port-based VLAN uses physical ports (P1 ~ P6) to separate the clients into different VLAN group.

Virtual LAN function provides you a very convenient way to manage hosts by grouping them based on the physical port. The multi-subnet can let a small businesses have much better isolation for multi-occupancy applications. Go to LAN page and select VLAN. The following page will appear. Click Enable to invoke VLAN function.

Below is an example page in Vigor3220n:

Info Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port.


106



Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration.

VLAN Tag

Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with tag.

The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the LAN while sending them out.

Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the packets sending by LAN.

VID – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is form 0 to 4095.

Priority – Type the packet priority number for such VLAN.


Wireless LAN SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.

Subnet Choose one of them to make the selected VLAN mapping to the specified subnet only. For example, LAN1 is specified for

VLAN0. It means that PCs grouped under VLAN0 can get the

IP address(es) that specified by the subnet.

Permit untagged device in

P1 to access router

It can help users to communicate with the router still even though configuring wrong VLAN tag setting. It is recommended to enable the management port (LAN 1) to ensure the data transmission is unimpeded.

Info Leave one VLAN untagged at least to prevent from not connecting to Vigor router due to unexpected error.

Vigor3220 Series features a hugely flexible VLAN system. In its simplest form, each of the

Gigabit LAN ports can be isolated from each other, for example to feed different companies or departments but keeping their local traffic completely separated.

C o n f f i i g u r r i i n g p o r t t b a s e d V L A N f f o r w i i r r e l l e s s a n d n o n w i i r r e l l e s s c l l i i e n t s

1.

All the wire network clients are categorized to group VLAN0 in subnet 192.168.1.0/24

(LAN1).

2.

All the wireless network clients are categorized to group VLAN1 in subnet

192.168.2.0/24 (LAN2).

3.

Open LAN>>VLAN Configuration. Check the boxes according to the statement in step 1 and Step 2.


4.

Click OK.

5.

Open LAN>>General Setup. If you want to let the clients in both groups communicate with each other, simply activate Inter-LAN Routing by checking the box between LAN1 and LAN2.


Vigor router supports up to six private IP subnets on LAN. Each can be independent

(isolated) or common (able to communicate with each other). This is ideal for departmental or multi-occupancy applications.

Info As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on

Vigor Router” for more detailed information.

I I I I 2 3 B i i n d I I P t o M A C

This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. When this function is enabled, all the assigned IP and MAC address binding together cannot be changed. If you modified the binding IP or MAC address, it might cause you not access into the Internet.

Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.

108



Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function. However,

IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to

Internet.

Disable

Strict Bind

Click this radio button to disable this function. All the settings on this page will be invalid.

Click this radio button to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List.


ARP Table

Select All

Sort

Refresh

Add or Update

IP Bind List

Add

Update

Delete

Backup

Restore

This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field.

Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.

Click this link to select all the items in the ARP table.

Reorder the table based on the IP address.

Refresh the ARP table listed below to obtain the newest ARP table information.

IP Address – Type the IP address that will be used for the specified MAC address.

Mac Address – Type the MAC address that is used to bind with the assigned IP address.

Comment – Type a brief description for the entry.

Show Comment – Check this box to display the comment on

IP Bind List box.

It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.

It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP table or the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the table of IP

Bind List.

It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP address and

MAC address that you create before.

You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List. Simply click and select the one, and click Delete. The selected item will be removed from the IP Bind List.

Store the configuration for Bind IP to MAC as a file.

Restore the previously stored configuration file and apply to such page.

Info Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user interface of the router might not be accessed.

When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.


110

I I I I 2 4 L A N P o r r t t M i i r r r r o r r

LAN port mirror can be applied for the users in LAN. Generally speaking, this function copies traffic from one or more specific ports to a target port. This mechanism helps manager track the network errors or abnormal packets transmission without interrupting the flow of data access the network. By the way, user can apply this function to monitor all traffics which user needs to check.

There are some advantages supported in this feature. First, it is more economical without other detecting equipments to be set up. Second, it may be able to view traffic on one or more ports within a VLAN at the same time. Third, it can transfer all data traffics to be mirrored to one analyzer connecting to the mirroring port. Last, it is more convenient and easy to configure in user’s interface.



Port Mirror

Mirror Port

Check Enable to activate this function. Or, check Disable to close this function.

Select a port to view traffic sent from mirrored ports.

Mirrored Tx Port

Mirrored Rx Port

Select which ports are necessary to be mirrored for transmitting the packets.

Select which ports are necessary to be mirrored for receiving the packets.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.


I I I I 2 5 W e b P o r r t t a l S e t t u p

This page allows you to configure a profile with specified URL for accessing into or display a message when a wireless/LAN user connects to Internet through this router. No matter what the purpose of the wireless/LAN client is, he/she will be forced into the URL configured here while trying to access into the Internet or the desired web page through this router. That is, a company which wants to have an advertisement for its products to users can specify the URL in this page to reach its goal.

Each item is explained as follows:


Profile Display the number link which allows you to configure the profile.

Status Display the content (Disable, URL Redirect or Message) of the profile.

Interface

Preview

Display the applied interface of the profile.

Open a preview window according to the configured settings.

There are four profiles which allow you to configure mode, priority, and applied interface in response to different conditions or requirements.


To configure the profile, click any index number link to open the following page.

112



Enable

Body

Check the box to enable this function.

Two types can be specified for web portal setup.

URL Redirect - Any user who wants to access into Internet through this router will be redirected to the URL specified here first. It is a useful method for the purpose of advertisement. For example, force the wireless user(s) in hotel to access into the web page that the hotel wants the user(s) to visit.

Message - Type words or sentences here. The message will be displayed on the screen for several seconds when the wireless users access into the web page through the router.

 Default Message – Click it to restore the default content.

Notice Content given in this field will be displayed on the screen when a web page is redirected by web portal mechanism.

Position on Screen – The content of notice and the defined button can be shown upside (Top) or downside (Bottom) the text defined for message body.

 Button – Define the word (default word is “Continue”) shown on the button.

 User must click button to proceed – Check the box to force the user click the button (with the word defined on

Button box) to proceed the operation.


Redirect

Priority

Applied Interfaces

Choose the protocol (HTTP or HTTPS) that corresponding web pages based on that protocol will be redirected.

If User Management (refer to VII-3 User Management) mode and such web portal profile are configured and enabled for filtering users, you have to determine which one shall have the highest priority.

Override user management – Web portal profile will be used to filter users first.

Prefer user management – User Management profile will be used to filter users first.

Check the box(es) representing different interfaces to be applied by such profile.

The advantage is that each SSID (1/2/3/4) for wireless network can be applied with different web portal separately.



I I I I 3 N A T

Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one.

Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.

When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router, select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router’s public IP address and the router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate with external host smoothly.

The benefit of the NAT includes:

 Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address, thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.

 Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.

Info On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918.

Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before, the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be achieved by using port mapping methods.



I I I I 3 1 P o r r t t R e d i i r r e c t t i i o n

Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN), such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.

Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping private IP address/port of the server.

The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.

To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port

Redirection Table provides 40 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.




Index Display the number of the profile.

Service Name

WAN Interface

Display the description of the specific network service.

Display the WAN IP address used by the profile.

Protocol

Public Port

Private IP

Status

Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).

Display the port number which will be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.

Display the IP address of the internal host providing the service.

Display if the profile is enabled (v) or not (x).

Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.

116




Enable

Mode

Service Name

Protocol

WAN IP

Public Port

Private IP

Private Port

Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.

Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range.

In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port) and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP automatically.


Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).

Select the WAN IP used for port redirection. There are eight

WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port redirection. The default setting is All which means all the incoming data from any port will be redirected to specified range of IP address and port.

Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private

IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field.

Type the required number on the first box (as the starting port) and the second box (as the ending port).

Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service. If you choose Range as the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete

IP address in the first box (as the starting point). The second one will be assigned automatically later.

Specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.


Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc.

Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to reset the router in order to avoid confliction.

For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you need to change the router’s http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g., http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.


I I I I 3 2 D M Z H o s t t

As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as

Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.

118

The security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.

Click DMZ Host to open the following page. You can set different DMZ host for each WAN interface. Click the WAN tab to switch into the configuration page for that WAN.




Choose Private IP or Active True IP first.

Active True IP selection is available for WAN1 only.

Private IP

Choose IP

Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose

PC to select one.

Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private

IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.

When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK to save the setting.

DMZ Host for WAN2, WAN3, WAN4 or WAN5 is slightly different with WAN1. Active True IP selection is available for WAN1 only.

See the following figure.

If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE or Static or Dynamic IP mode in WAN2 interface, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.


120



Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function.

Private IP

Choose IP

Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose

PC to select one.

Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.

When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK to save the setting.



I I I I 3 3 O p e n P o r r t t s

Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications.

Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella,

WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.

Click Open Ports to open the following page:



Index Indicate the relative number for the particular entry that you want to offer service in a local host. You should click the appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry.

Comment

WAN Interface

Aux. WAN IP

Specify the name for the defined network service.

Display the WAN interface used by such index.

Local IP Address

Status

Display the IP alias setting used by such index. If no IP alias setting exists, such field will not appear.

Display the private IP address of the local host offering the service.

Display the state for the corresponding entry. X or V is to represent the Inactive or Active state.

To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.


122



Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry.

Comment

WAN Interface

WAN IP

Private IP

Make a name for the defined network application/service.

Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry.

Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry.

This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.

Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose

PC to select one.

Choose IP - Click this button and, subsequently, a window having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of the local host in the list.

Protocol

Start Port

End Port

Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP, or ----- (none) for selection.

Specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host.

Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host.



I I I I 3 4 P o r r t t T r r i i g g e r r i i n g

Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function.

The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is:

 Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps the ports opened forever.

 Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering" will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.

 The duration that these ports are opened depends on the type of protocol used. The

"default" durations are shown below and these duration values can be modified via telnet commands.

TCP: 86400 sec.

UDP: 180 sec.

IGMP: 10 sec.

TCP WWW: 60 sec.

TCP SYN: 60 sec.



Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this rule.

Triggering Protocol

Triggering Port

Incoming Protocol

Display the protocol of the triggering packets.

Display the port of the triggering packets.

Incoming Port

Status

Display the protocol for the incoming data of such triggering profile.

Display the port for the incoming data of such triggering profile.

Display if the rule is active or de-active.

Click the index number link to open the configuration page.




Enable Check to enable this entry.

Service Choose the predefined service to apply for such trigger profile.

124

Comment

Triggering Protocol

Triggering Port

Incoming Protocol

Incoming Port

Type the text to memorize the application of this rule.

Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such triggering profile.

Type the port or port range for such triggering profile.

When the triggering packets received, it is expected the incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of such triggering profile.

Type the port or port range for the incoming packets.



I I I I 4 A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n s

D y n a m i i c D N S

The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic

WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.

Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com,

www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to register your own domain name for the router.

L A N D N S / D N S F o r r w a r r d i i n g

The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor3220 Series will respond the specified private IP address.

S c h e d u l l e

The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions.

R A D I I U S / / T A C A C S +

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.

The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables centralized remote access authentication for network management.

L D A P / / A c t t i i v e D i i r r e c t o r y S e t u p

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or manage the active directory.


U P n P

The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.

W a k e o n L A N

A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.

In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,

WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.



I I I I 4 1 D y n a m i i c D N S

E n a b l l e t h e F u n c t i i o n a n d A d d a D y n a m i i c D N S A c c o u n t t

1.

Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say

hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.

2.

In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.



Enable Dynamic DNS

Setup

Check this box to enable DDNS function.

Set to Factory

Default

Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.

View Log

Force Update

Auto-Update interval

Index

WAN Interface

Domain Name

Display DDNS log status.

Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.

Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS service.

Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of DDNS setup to set account(s).

Display the WAN interface used.

Active

Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of

DDNS setup.

Display if this account is active or inactive.

3.

Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS

Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, type the registered hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block.

The following two blocks should be typed your account Login Name: test and Password:

test.


128



Enable Dynamic DNS

Account

Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the

Active column of the previous web page in step 2).

WAN Interface

Service Provider

Service Type

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/wAN5 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 as the first channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 /WAN4

/WAN5 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 Only - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 as the only channel for such account.

Select the service provider for the DDNS account.

Domain Name

Select a service type (Dynamic, Custom or Static). If you choose Custom, you can modify the domain that is chosen in the Domain Name field.

Type in one domain name that you applied previously. Use the drop down list to choose the desired domain.

Type in the login name that you set for applying domain. Login Name

Password

Wildcard and

Backup MX

Type in the password that you set for applying domain.

The Wildcard and Backup MX (Mail Exchange) features are not supported for all Dynamic DNS providers. You could get more detailed information from their websites.

Mail Extender

Determine Real

WAN IP

If the mail server is defined with another name, please type the name in this area. Such mail server will be used as backup mail exchange.

If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.

When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and use the detected IP address for DDNS update.

There are two methods offered for you to choose:

 WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router


is private, DDNS update will take place right away.

 Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is private, it will be converted to public IP before DDNS update takes place.

4.

Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.

D i i s a b l l e t h e F u n c t i i o n a n d C l l e a r r a l l l l D y n a m i i c D N S A c c o u n t t s

In the DDNS setup menu, uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and push Clear All button to disable the function and clear all accounts from the router.

D e l l e t t e a D y n a m i i c D N S A c c o u n t t

In the DDNS setup menu, click the Index number you want to delete and then push Clear All button to delete the account.


I I I I 4 2 L A N D N S / / D N S F o r r w a r r d i i n g

The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor3220 Series will respond the specified private IP address.

Simply click Application>>LAN DNS to open the following page.

130



Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.


Enable

Index

Profile

Domain Name

Check the box to enable the selected profile.

Click the number below Index to access into the setting page.

Display the name of the LAN DNS profile.

Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile.

You can set up to 20 LAN DNS profiles.

To create a LAN DNS profile:

1.

Click any index, say Index No. 1.

2.

The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below.



Enable Check this box to enable such profile.

Profile Type a name for such profile.

Note: If you type a name here for LAN DNS and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be applied to conditional DNS forwarding automatically.

Type the domain name for such profile. Domain Name

CNAME (Alias Domain

Name)

CNAME is abbreviation of Canonical name record.

Such option is used to record the domain name or the host alias.

Add – Click it to add a new host with specified reference.

Delete – Click it to remove the setting.

IP Address List The IP address listed here will be used for mapping with the domain name specified above. In general, one domain name maps with one IP address. If required, you can configure two

IP addresses mapping with the same domain name.


Add – Click it to open a dialog to type the host’s IP address.

 Only responds to the DNS…. – Different LAN PCs can share the same domain name. However, you have to check this box to make the router identify & respond the IP address for the DNS query coming from different

LAN PC.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list.

3.

Click OK button to save the settings.

4.

If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.

132




Profile Type a name for such profile.

Note: If you type a name here for conditional DNS forwarding and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be applied to LAN DNS automatically.

Domain Name Type the domain name for such profile.

DNS Server IP Address Type the IP address of the DNS server you want to use for DNS forwarding.

5.


6.

A new LAN DNS profile has been created.



134

I I I I 4 3 S c h e d u l l e

The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions.

You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router’s clock to current time of your PC.

The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the router’s clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.



Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.

Index

Status

Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of schedule.

Display if this schedule setting is active or inactive.

You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and

Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings.

To add a schedule:

1.

Click any index, say Index No. 1.

2.

The detailed settings of the call schedule with index 1 are shown below.




Enable Schedule

Setup

Check to enable the schedule.

Start Date

(yyyy-mm-dd)

Specify the starting date of the schedule.

Start Time (hh:mm) Specify the starting time of the schedule.

Duration Time

(hh:mm)

Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.

Action

Idle Timeout

Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the period of the schedule.

Force On -Force the connection to be always on.

Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.

Enable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be dial-on-demand and the value of idle timeout should be specified in Idle Timeout field.

Disable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be up when it has traffic on the line. Once there is no traffic over idle timeout, the connection will be down and never up again during the schedule.

Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.

How often -Specify how often the schedule will be applied

Once -The schedule will be applied just once

Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should perform the schedule.

3.


Example

Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On) from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be disconnected (Force Down).


Office

Hour:

(Force On)

Mon - Sun 9:00 am to 6:00 pm

1.

Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.

2.

Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.

3.

Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.

4.

Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.

I I I I 4 4 R A D I I U S / / T A C A C S +

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.

I I I I 4 4 1 E x t e r r n a l l R A D I I U S

The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables centralized remote access authentication for network management.

Vigor router can be operated as a RADIUS client. Therefore, this page is used to configure settings for external RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by such server for network application.

136



Enable Check to enable RADIUS client feature.

Server IP Address Enter the IP address of RADIUS server


Destination Port

Shared Secret

Confirm Shared Secret

The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.

The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36 characters.

Re-type the Shared Secret for confirmation.

After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.

I I I I 4 4 2 I I n t e r r n a l l R A D I I U S

Except for being a built-in RADIUS client, Vigor router also can be operated as a RADIUS server which performs security authentication by itself. This page is used to configure settings for internal RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by Vigor router directly.



Enable Check to enable internal RADIUS client feature.

Authentication Port Set a port number for internal RADIUS server.

RADIUS Client Access List Allow to configure that clients under specified domain (IPv4 and IPv6) must be authenticated with the specified shared secret.

Enable - Check to enable RADIUS client feature.

Shared Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret


User Profile

Synchronize Internal

RADIUS user list to Local

802.1X user list that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36 characters.

IP Address – Type the IP addres of the wired/wireless client.

IP Mask – Type the subnet mask required for the IP address.

IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 address of the wired/wireless client.

IPv6 Length - Type the prefix length required for the IPv6 address.

During the process of security authentication, user account and user password will be required for identity authentication. Before configuring such page, create at least one user profile in User Management>>User Profile first.

Select All – Click it to select all of the user profiles in

Available List.

Clear All- Click to remove all of the user profiles in Available

List.

Available List – The user profiles without RADIUS server enabled in User Management >> User Profile will be listed in this field.

Authentication List –The user profiles with RADIUS server enabled in User Management >> User Profile will be listed in this field.

Users can be authenticated by RADIUS server and local

802.1X to get certain network service. It is not necessary to create new user profiles (containing user accounts and user passwords) for RADIUS and local 802.1X respectively.

Simply check this box; all of the user profiles (prepared for

RADIUS server authentication) listed in Authentication List will be synchronized for local 802.1X user authentication.


I I I 4 4 3 E x t e r r n a l l T A C A C S +

It means Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus. It works like RADIUS does.

Click the TACACS+ Setup to open the following page:

138




Enable Check to enable TACACS+ feature.

Server IP Address


Shared Secret

Enter the IP address of TACACS+ server.

The UDP port number that the TACACS+ server is using.

Confirm Shared Secret

The TACACS+ server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret.

Re-type the Shared Secret for confirmation.



140

I I I I 4 5 A c t t i i v e D i i r e c t t o r r y / / L D A P

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or manage the active directory.

G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

This page allows you to enable the function and specify general settings for LDAP server.




Enable Check to enable such function.

Bind Type

Server Address


Use SSL

Regular DN

Regular Password

There are three types of bind type supported.

 Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication without any search action.

 Anonymous – Perform a search action first with

Anonymous account then do the bind authentication.

 Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous mode. The different is that, the server will firstly check if you have the search authority.

For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN and Regular Password.

Enter the IP address of LDAP server.

Type a port number as the destination port for LDAP server.

Check the box to use the port number specified for SSL.

Type this setting if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.

Specify a password if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.


P r r o f f i i l l e s

You can configure eight AD/LDAP profiles. These profiles would be used with User

Management for different purposes in management.

Click any index number link to open the following page.


142



Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the user name is limited to 19 characters.

Common Name Identifier Type or edit the common name identifier for the LDAP server.

The common name identifier for most LDAP server is “cn”.

Additional Filter Type the condition for additional filter.

Base Distinguished Name

/ Group Distinguished

Name

Type or edit the distinguished name used to look up entries on the LDAP server.

Sometimes, you may forget the Distinguished Name since it’s too long. Then you may click the button to list all the account information on the AD/LDAP Server to assist you finish the setup.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save and exit this page. A new profile has been created.

For detailed information about LDAP application, refer to section 4.6 How to Implement the

AD/LDAP Authentication for User Management?


I I I I 4 6 U P n P

The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.

Info UPnP is required for some applications such as PPS, Skype, eMule...and etc.

If you are not familiar with UPnP, it is suggested to turn off this function for security.



Enable UPNP Service Accordingly, you can enable either the Connection Control

Service or Connection Status Service.

Default WAN It is used to specify the WAN interface for applying such function.

The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP

Can't work with Firewall Software

Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly. This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.

Security Considerations

Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.



Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.



Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding port mappings.

The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be removed.


144

I I I I 4 7 I I G M P

IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups.



Enable IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed through WAN/PVC/VLAN port. In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.

Enable IGMP Snooping Check this box to enable this function. Multicast traffic will be forwarded to ports that have members of that group.

Disabling IGMP snooping will make multicast traffic treated in the same manner as broadcast traffic.

Refresh

Group ID

P1

Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.

This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to

239.255.255.254.

It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.



I I I I 4 8 W a k e o n L A N

A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.

In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,

WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.



Wake by Two types provide for you to wake up the binded IP.

 If you choose Wake by MAC Address, you have to type the correct MAC address of the host in MAC Address boxes.

 If you choose Wake by IP Address, you have to choose the correct IP address.

IP Address The IP addresses that have been configured in

Firewall>>Bind IP to MAC will be shown in this drop down list. Choose the IP address from the drop down list that you want to wake up.

MAC Address

Wake Up

Type any one of the MAC address of the bound PCs.

Click this button to wake up the selected IP. See the following figure. The result will be shown on the box.


I I I I 4 9 S M S / / M a i i l l A l l e r r t t S e r r v i i c e

The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the real-time abnormal situations.

Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to different conditions.

S M S P r r o v i i d e r r

This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and when the SMS will be sent.

146



Index Check the box to enable such profile.

SMS Provider

Recipient

Notify

Use the drop down list to choose SMS service provider.

You can click SMS Provider link to define the SMS server.

Type the name of the one who will receive the SMS.

Schedule

Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.

You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content of the SMS.

Type the schedule number that the SMS will be sent out.

You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the schedule.



M a i i l l S e r r v e r

This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what the content is and when the message will be sent.



Index Check the box to enable such profile.

Mail Service

Recipient

Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of the available objects are created in Object

Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Option. If there is no object listed, click Mail Service link to define a new one with specified service provider.

Type the e-mail address of the one who will receive the notification message.

Notify

Schedule

Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.

You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content of the mail message.

Type the schedule number that the notification will be sent out.

You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the schedule.



148

I I I I 4 1 0 B o n j j o u r r

Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or

Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free.

Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services.

Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting).

If the host and user’s computer have the plug-in bonjour driver install, they can utilize the service offered by the router by clicking the router name icon. In short, what the

Clients/users need to know is the name of the router only.

To enable the Bonjour service, click Application>>Bonjour to open the following page. Check the box(es) of the server service(s) that you want to share to the LAN clients.

Below shows an example for applying the bonjour feature that Vigor router can be used as the

FTP server.

1.

Here, we use Firefox and DNSSD to discover the service in such case. Therefore, just ensure the Bonjour client program and DNSSD for Firefox have been installed on the computer.


2.

Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results.

3.

Open System Maintenance>>Management. Type a name (e.g., Dray_2925) as the Router

Name and click OK.

4.

Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour.


5.

Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows. It means the Vigor router (based on Bonjour protocol) is ready to be used as a printer server, FTP server, SSH Server, Telnet Server, and HTTP Server.

150

6.

Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a printer).


I I I I 4 1 1 H i i g h A v a i i l l a b i i l l i i t t y

The High Availability (HA) feature refers to the awareness of component failure and the availability of backup resources. The complexity of HA is determined by the availability needs and the tolerance of system interruptions. Systems, provide nearly full-time availability, typically have redundant hardware and software that make the system available despite failures.

The high availability of the Vigor3220 Series is designed to avoid single points-of-failure.

When failures occur, the failover process moves processing performed by the failed component (the “primary”) to the backup component (the “secondary”). This process remains system-wide resources, recovers partial of failed transactions, and restores the system to normal within a few seconds.

To configure High Availability on, at least two DrayTek routers:

 Enable High Availability on the Primary and Secondary routers.

 Set a high Priority ID number on the Primary router and lower numbers for the Secondary router(s).

 Set the same Redundancy Method/Group ID/Authentication Key on the Primary and

Secondary rotuers.

 Set the Management Interface to the same subnet for the Primary and Secondary routers.

 Enable Virtual IP on the Primary and Secondary routers for each subnet in use and set the same virtual IP on each rouer.

Open Applications>>High Availability to get the following page.



Enable High Abailablity Check this box to enable HA function.


Redundancy Method Choose Hot-Standby or Active-Standby as the method for

HA.

Hot-Standby -

Such method is suitable for a user which has one ISP account. With such method;

 All WANs of secondary routers will be shut down by HA function.

 WAN settings of primary and secondary routers can be the same.

Note: When Hot-Standby is used, wireless LAN will be

“enabled” automatically for clients connecting to the primary router; however, wireless LAN on secondary router will be “disabled” directlly. Thus clients can not connect to the secondary router any more.

Active-Standby -

Such method is suitable for a user which has multiple ISP accounts. With such method;

 All WANs of secondary routers can be up. Therefore, the user can route it's traffic to secondary.

 WAN settings of primary and secondary routers must not be the same.

 The Config Sync must be disabled, or you cannot change redundancy method to active-standby.

I I I 4 1 1 1 G e n e r a l l S e t u p

152



Group ID Type a value (1~255).

In LAN environment, multiple routers can be devided into several groups. Each router must be specified with one group

ID. Different routers with the same ID value will be categoried into the same group.

Only one of the routers in the same group will be selected as


Priority ID

Authentication Key

Management Interface

Update DDNS

Syslog

LAN1 ~ LAN8, DMZ the primary router.

Type a value (1~30).

Different routers must be configured with different IDs.

The router with the highest priority will be treated as primary router. If multiple routers have the same priority, the router with lower “IP” will be treated as primary. “IP” is the IP address configured on LAN >> General Setup page, in which LAN is determined by management interface.

Type a string as the authentication key (maximum 31 characters allowed).

It is used for encrypting the DARP to prevent malicious attack.

Such interface is used for DARP (DrayTek Address

Redundancy Protocol) negotiation between routers. Only the interface which is enabled in LAN>>General Setup is available for selection.

However, LAN1 is always enabled.

Enable – Check the box to update the DDNS server for the secondary device if required.

If the primary device fails, and the secondary device must take over the job of data transmitting and receiving. Then the system will update the DDNS server to make the user connect to the specified domain name.

Enable – Check the box to record required information on

Syslog.

Enable – Check the box to enable the interface.

Virtual IP - Type the IP address of the router plays the role of

Primary device.


I I I 4 1 1 2 C o n f f i g S y n c

This page is used to specify the synchronization time for such Vigor router and only available when Hot-Standby method is specified and High Availability is enabled.

154



Enable Config Sync (Max.

Sync to 10 routers)

Check this box to enable configuration synchronization.

To sync configuration from primary to secondary router, both primary and seconday routers need to enable “config sync”. Note that config sync can be enabled by Hot-Standby redundancy method only.

Config Sync Interval Day / Hour / Minute - Primary router will sync its configuration to secondary router based on the time interval set here.



E x a m p l l e : :

Take the following picture as an example. The upper Vigor3220 is regarded as primary device, the lower Vigor3220 is regarded as secondary device. When primary Vigor3220 Series is broken down, the secondary device could replace the primary role to take over all jobs as soon as possible. However, once the primary device is working again, the secondary device would be changed to original role to stand by.



A 1 H o w t t o I I m p l l e m e n t t t t h e L D A P / / A D A u t h e n t i i c a t t i i o n f f o r U s e r r M a n a g e m e n t t ?

For simplifying the configuration of LDAP authentication for User Access Management, we implement “Group” feature.

There is no need to pre-configure user profile for each user on Vigor router anymore. We only need to configure the Groups DN, then the Vigor router (e.g., Vigor 2860 series) can pass the authentication to LDAP server with the pre-defined Group path.

Below shows the configuration steps:

1.

Access into the web user interface of the Vigor router.

2.

Open Applications>>Active Directory /LDAP to get the following page for configuring

LDAP related settings.

156

There are three types of bind type supported:

 Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication without any search action.

 Anonymous – Perform a search action first with Anonymous account then do the bind authentication.

 Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous mode. The different is that, the server will firstly check if you have the search authority.

For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN and Regular Password.

3.

Create LDAP server profiles. Click the Active Directory /LDAP tab to open the profile web page and click any one of the index number link.

If we have two groups “RD1” and “SHRD” on LDAP server, we can configure two LDAP server profiles with different Group Distinguished Name.


and

4.

Click OK to save the settings above.

5.

Open User Management>>General Setup. Select User-Based as the Mode option.


6.

Then open VPN and Remote Access>>PPP General Setup to check the profile(s) that will be authenticated with LDAP server.

After above configurations, users belong to either “rd1” or “shrd” group can access Internet after inputting their credentials on LDAP server.


I I I I 5 R o u t t i i n g

Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance, security, routing decision, and etc.

Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request. In general, Route Policy can easily reach the following purposes:

Load Balance

You may manually create policies to balance the traffic across network interface.

Specify Interface

Through dedicated interface (WAN/LAN/VPN), the data can be sent from the source IP to the destination IP.

Address Mapping

Allows you specify the outgoing WAN IP address (es) for an internal private IP address or a range of internal private IP addresses.

Priority

The router will determine which policy will be adopted for transmitting the packet according to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.

Failover to/Failback

Packets will be sent through another Interface or follow another Policy when the original interface goes down (Failover to). Once the original interface resumes service (Failback), the packets will be returned to it immediately.

Other routing

Specify routing policy to determine the direction of the data transmission.

Info For more detailed information about using policy route, refer to Support

>>FAQ/Application Notes on www.draytek.com.



I I I I 5 1 S t a t t i i c R o u t t e

Go to LAN to open setting page and choose Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static route. Both protocols bring different web pages.

I I I I 5 1 1 S t a t i i c R o u t t e f f o r r I I P v 4

160



Index The number (1 to 30) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route.

Destination Address

Status

Set to Factory Default

Displays the destination address of the static route.

Displays the status of the static route.

Viewing Routing Table

Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.

Displays the routing table for your reference.


A d d S t t a t t i i c R o u t e s t t o P r i v a t t e a n d P u b l i i c N e t t w o r k s

Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet access has been configured and the router works properly:

 use the Main Router to surf the Internet.

 create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)

 create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).

 have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.

Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.

1.

Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control.

Then click the OK button.

Info There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on

1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet

(192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with different subnets.


162

2.

Click the LAN >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box.

Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to

192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.



Enable Click it to enable this profile.

Destination IP

Address

Type an IP address as the destination of such static route.

Subnet Mask

Network Interface

Type the subnet mask for such static route.

Use the drop down list to specify an interface for such static route.

3.

Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.3. Click OK.

4.

Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.


I I I I 5 1 2 S t a t i i c R o u t t e f f o r r I I P v 6

You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following page:



Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route.

Destination Address

Status


Displays the destination address of the static route.

Displays the status of the static route.

Viewing IPv6 Routing

Table

Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.

Displays the routing table for your reference.

Click any underline of index number to get the following page.



Enable Click it to enable this profile.

Destination IPv6 Address /

Prefix Len

Gateway IPv6 Address

Type the IP address with the prefix length for this entry.

Type the gateway address for this entry.


Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static route.


I I I I 5 2 L o a d B a l l a n c e / / R o u t t e P o l l i i c y

I I I 5 2 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

164



Index Click the number of index to access into the configuration web page.

Enable

Protocol

Interface

Check this box to enable this policy.

Display the protocol used for this policy.

Interface Address

Display the interface to send packets to once the policy is matched.

Display the WAN IP or WAN IP alias address which is used as source IP of the outgoing packets.

Src IP Start

Src IP End

Dest IP Start

Dest IP End

Dest Port Start

Dest Port End

Displays the IP address for the start of the source IP.

Displays the IP address for the end of the source IP.

Displays the IP address for the start of the destination IP.

Displays the IP address for the end of the destination IP.

Displays the IP address for the start of the destination port.

Displays the IP address for the end of the destination port.


Move UP/Move Down

Wizard Mode

Advance Mode

Use Up or Down link to move the order of the policy.

Allows to configure frequently used settings of route policy via three setting pages

Allows to configure detailed settings of route policy.

To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:

1.

Click the Wizard Mode radio button.

2.

Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:



Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.

Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source

IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN interface.

Destination IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.

Dest IP Start- Type the destination IP start for the specified

WAN interface.

Dest IP End - Type the destination IP end for the specified

WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.

3.

Click Next to get the following page.




Interface Use the drop down list to choose an interface or VPN profile.

Packets match with the above criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here.

Interface Address Use the drop down list to choose an existed IP address.

4.

After specifying the interface, click Next to get the following page.



Force NAT /Force

Routing

It determines which mechanism that the router will use to forward the packet to WAN.

5.

After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.

166

6.

If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.


To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:

1.

Click the Advance Mode radio button.

2.

Click Index 2 to access into the following page.



Enable Check this box to enable this policy.

Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the

WAN interface.

Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.

Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source


168

Destination IP


Send to if criteria matched

Priority

More options

IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN interface.

Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.

Dest IP Start- Type the destination IP start for the specified

WAN interface.

Dest IP End - Type the destination IP end for the specified

WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.

Any – Any port number can be treated as the destination port.

Dest Port Start - Type the destination port start for the destination IP.

Dest Port End - Type the destination port end for the destination IP. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination ports will be passed through the WAN interface.

Interface – Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN interface or VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here.

Gateway IP – Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually, Default

Gateway is selected in default.

Packets will be transmitted based on all routes or Route

Policy. Vigor router will determine which rule will be adopted for transmitting the packet according to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.

The greater the value is, the lower the priority is. Default value for route policy is “200” which means it has higher priority than the default route.

Packet Forwarding to WAN via – When you choose WAN

(e.g., WAN1) as the Interface for packet transmission, you have to specify the way the packet forwarded to. Choose

Force NAT or Force Routing.

Failover to – Check this button to lead the data passing through specific interface (WAN/LAN/VPN/Route Policy) automatically when the selected interface (defined in Send

via if criteria matched) is down.

 WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an interface as an auto failover interface.

 VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as a failover tunnel.

 Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an existed route policy profile.

Gateway IP – Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually,

Default Gateway is selected in default.

3.



I I I I 5 2 2 D i i a g n o s e

With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced. or



Mode Analyze how a packet will be sent – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy.

Analyze how multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be sent by a route policy.

Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor router.

ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.

Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.

Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.

Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port.

Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click

export analysis to export the result as a file.


170

Input File Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for saving the result of analysis.

Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click

export analysis to export the result as a file.

Note that the analysis was based on the current

"load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it will be 100% the same as the real case.



A 1 H o w t t o C u s t t o m i i z e a S e c u r r e R o u t e b e t w e e n V P N R o u t t e r r a n d R e m o t t e

R o u t t e r b y U s i i n g R o u t t e P o l l i i c y

Info The web user interface will be revised later.

Example 1:

In the following figure, a LAN to LAN VPN tunnel is built between DrayTek VPN router (e.g.,

Vigor3220 Series) and the remote router. Firewall Router can receive all of the traffic coming from remote PC which wants to access into Internet; and send back the packets to Remote

Router through VPN Router.

1.

Establish a VPN tunnel between VPN Router and the Remote Router.

2.

Change to default route for the router located in Remote Router.

3.

Access into the web user interface of the router in VPN Router. Then, open

Load-Balance / Route Policy and click Advance Mode.


4.

Click any Index number link (e.g., 1 in this case). Configure the settings as follows.

172

Now, if you want such route policy will be applied by Vigor router with higher priority, please adjust the value of Priority for such route policy. In general, default route is specified with the lowest priority for it value is fixed as “250”. And Routes in Routing

Table are fixed as “150”. You can adjust the value for such route policy with lower value, e.g., 100 to ensure it will be applied to packets transmission with the highest priority.

5.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.

6.

To route the packets coming from the Firewall Router back to the remote router, access into the web user interface of the Firewall Router. Then, set “192.168.1.1/24” as the gateway IP address and set “172.16.3.0/24” as the destination IP address.


Example 2:

Below shows a scenario that local users behind Vigor router A want to access into a remote service (e.g., YouTube) which is blocked or restricted by local Service Provider in area with restrictions. A policy route can be created by the side of Router A to break through the

Internet censorship circumvention.

A VPN tunnel has been established between Router A and router B.

1.

Access into the web user interface of Router A.

2.

Open Load-Balance/Route Policy.

3.

Click any index number (e.g., #1 in this case).

4.

In the following web page, check Enable; type “192.168.1.10” as Src IP Range; type

“213.57.89.100” as the Destination IP for the remote VPN server; and choose VPN as the

Interface setting.

5.

Click OK to save the settings.


A 2 H o w t t o S e t u p A d d r r e s s M a p p i i n g

Address Mapping is used to map a specified private IP or a range of private IPs of NAT subnet into a specified WAN IP (or WAN IP alias IP). Refer to the following figure.

174

Suppose the WAN settings for a router are configured as follows:

WAN1: 202.211.100.10, WAN1 alias: 202.211.100.11

WAN2: 203.98.200.10

Without address mapping feature, when a NAT host with an IP say "192.168.1.10" sends a packet to the WAN side (or the Internet), the source address of the NAT host will be mapped into either 202.211.100.10 or 203.98.200.10 (which IP or mapping is decided by the internal load balancing algorithm).

With address mapping feature, you can manually configure any host mapping to any WAN interface to fit the request. In the above example, you can configure NAT Host 1 to always map to 202.211.100.10 (WAN1); Host 2 to always map to 202.211.100.11 (WAN1 alias); Host 3 always map to 203.98.200.10 (WAN2) and Group 1 to always map to 202.211.100.10 (WAN1).

NAT Address Mapping function lets you specify the outgoing IP address(es) for one internal IP address or a block of internal IP addresses.

We will take an example to introduce how to make use of this feature.

1.

Log into the web user interface of Vigor3220.

2.

Open WAN>>Internet Access. For WAN1, choose Static or Dynamic IP as the Access

Mode.


3.

Click the Details Page of WAN 1 to open the following page. From the above figure, set main WAN IP address as 202.211.100.10.


Click the WAN IP Alias button to configure the other IP address which is 202.211.100.11.

Make sure Join IP NAT Pool is not checked. Click OK to save the settings.

175

4.

After finished configuration for WAN1, open Load-Balance/Route Policy.

5.

Click Index number 1 and 2 to configure the details. After finished the settings, click OK to save the settings respectively.


And

6.

Upon completing the above configuration, you have specified the outgoing IP address(es) for some specific computers.

Now, you bind some specific computers to some WAN IP alias for outgoing traffic.


A 3 H o w t t o s e t t u p L o a d B a l l a n c e f f o r P a c k e t s ?

The following figure shows a simple application of load balance. WAN1 and WAN2 can be used to access into Internet. The PC in LAN1 can send the data to the remote PC through the specified WAN1.

178

1.

Access into web user interface of Vigor3220 Series. Open Load-Balance/Route Policy.

2.

From the following web page, simply click index number #1.


3.

In the following page, check Enable; set Dest IP Start and Dest IP End with 203.65.1.35 and 203.65.1.35; choose WAN1 as the Interface; click default gateway.

4.


Now, the packets sent to the remote PC (IP address: 203.65.1.35) will be forced to pass through WAN1.


This page is left blank.


P a r r t t I I I I I I W i i r r e l l e s s L A N

Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide III-181

I I I I I I 1 W i i r r e l l e s s L A N

This function is used for “n” models only.

Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth.

Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via wireless communication products. The Vigor3220 wireless series router (with “n” in model name) is designed for maximum flexibility and efficiency of a small office/home. Any authorized staff can bring a built-in WLAN client PDA or notebook into a meeting room for conference without laying a clot of LAN cable or drilling holes everywhere. Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.

Vigor3220 wireless router is a highly integrated wireless local area network (WLAN) for 2.4

GHz 802.11n WLAN applications. Vigor3220 “n” series router supports 802.11n up to 300 Mbps for 40 MHz channel operations.

Info The actual data throughput will vary according to the network conditions and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, network overhead and building materials.

In an Infrastructure Mode of wireless network, Vigor wireless router plays a role as an Access

Point (AP) connecting to lots of wireless clients or Stations (STA). All the STAs will share the same Internet connection via Vigor wireless router. The General Settings will set up the information of this wireless network, including its SSID as identification, located channel etc.

182

M u l l t t i i p l l e S S I I D s

Vigor router supports four SSID settings for wireless connections. Each SSID can be defined with different name and download/upload rate for selecting by stations connected to the router wirelessly.


R e a l l t t i i m e H a r r d w a r r e E n c r y p t t i i o n

Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest protection to your data without influencing user experience.

C o m p l l e t e S e c u r i i t y S t t a n d a r r d S e l l e c t t i i o n

To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several prevailing standards on market.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key. Usually access point will preset a set of four keys and it will communicate with each station using only one out of the four keys.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), the most dominating security mechanism in industry, is separated into two categories: WPA-personal or called WPA Pre-Share Key (WPA/PSK), and

WPA-Enterprise or called WPA/802.1x.

In WPA-Personal, a pre-defined key is used for encryption during data transmission. WPA applies Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption while WPA2 applies AES.

The WPA-Enterprise combines not only encryption but also authentication.

Since WEP has been proved vulnerable, you may consider using WPA for the most secure connection. You should select the appropriate security mechanism according to your needs.

No matter which security suite you select, they all will enhance the over-the-air data protection and /or privacy on your wireless network. The Vigor wireless router is very flexible and can support multiple secure connections with both WEP and WPA at the same time.

Info The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.

S e p a r a t e t t h e W i r e l e s s a n d t h e W i i r r e d L A N W L A N I I s o l l a t t i i o n

It enables you to isolate your wireless LAN from wired LAN for either quarantine or limit access reasons. To isolate means neither of the parties can access each other. To elaborate an example for business use, you may set up a wireless LAN for visitors only so they can connect to Internet without hassle of the confidential information leakage. For a more flexible deployment, you may add filters of MAC addresses to isolate users’ access from wired

LAN.

M a n a g e W i i r r e l l e s s S t t a t t i i o n s S t a t i i o n L i i s t t

It will display all the stations in your wireless network and the status of their connection.


W P S

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and

WPA2.



I I I I I I 1 1 W i i r r e l l e s s W i i z a r r d

The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing into Internet).

Follow the steps listed below:

1.

Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard.

2.

The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal users in a company or your home.



Name Type the SSID name of this router for wireless 2.4GHz. The default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name if required.

Mode

Channel

At present, the router can connect to 11n Only, 11g Only,

Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11a+11n), Mixed (11g+11n), and

Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose

Mix (11b+11g+11n) mode.

Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected


Security Key

Next

Cancel channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you.

The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.

The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via

802.1x authentication.

Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64

Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as

“0x321253abcde…”).


Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.

3.

After typing the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN network and VPN connection.

186



Enable/Disable Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.

SSID

Security Key

Type the SSID name of this router. (SSID1)

The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.


802.1x authentication.

Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64

Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as

"0x321253abcde...").

Bandwidth Limit It controls the data transmission rate through wireless connection.

Total Upload – Check Enable and type the transmitting rate for data upload. Default value is 30,000 kbps.

Total Download – Type the transmitting rate for data download. Default value is 30,000 kbps.


Next

Cancel


Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.

4.

After typing the required information, click Next.

5.

The following page will display the configuration summary for wireless setting.

6.

Click Finish to complete the wireless settings configuration.


I I I I I I 1 2 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

By clicking the Wireless LAN>> General Settings, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more information.

188



Enable Wireless LAN Check the box to enable wireless function.

Mode At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only,

11n Only, Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11g+11n), and Mixed

(11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed

(11b+11g+11n) mode.

Channel

Hide SSID

Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you.

Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN.

Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about

Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows you to set four sets of SSID for different usage. In default, the first set of SSID will be enabled. You can hide it for your necessity.

SSID Means the identification of the wireless LAN. SSID can be any text numbers or various special characters.

Isolate Member –Check this box to make the wireless clients

(stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.


Schedule

VPN – Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations) with different VPN not accessing for each other.

Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only.

You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.



I I I I I I 1 3 S e c u r r i i t t y

This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.

After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it.

The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.

By clicking the Security Settings, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the settings of WPA and WEP.

190



Mode

There are several modes provided for you to choose.


WPA

WEP

Info You should also set RADIUS Server simultaneously if 802.1x mode is selected.

Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism.

WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key.

WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA2/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/PSK-Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

WPA2/PSK-Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

Mixed (WPA+ WPA2)/PSK - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key should be entered in

PSK.


802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as

012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as

"0x321253abcde...").

Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as

012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as

"0x321253abcde...").

64-Bit For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as

0x4142434445.)

128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters, such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by

0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D).

All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption bit size and have the same key. Four keys can be entered here, but only one key can be selected at a time. The keys can be entered in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you wish to use.



I I I I I I 1 4 A c c e s s C o n t t r r o l l

In the Access Control, the router may restrict wireless access to certain wireless clients only by locking their MAC address into a black or white list. The user may block wireless clients by inserting their MAC addresses into a black list, or only let them be able to connect by inserting their MAC addresses into a white list.

In the Access Control web page, users may configure the white/black list modes used by each

SSID and the MAC addresses applied to their lists.

192



Enable Mac Address Filter Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients

(expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you check SSID 1 and SSID 2.

MAC Address Filter Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.

Client’s MAC Address

Apply SSID

Attribute

Manually enter the MAC address of wireless client.

After entering the client’s MAC address, check the box of the

SSIDs desired to insert this MAC address into their access control list.

s: Isolate the station from LAN - select to isolate the wireless connection of the wireless client of the MAC address from LAN.

Add

Delete

Add a new MAC address into the list.

Delete the selected MAC address in the list.


Edit

Cancel

OK

Clear All

Edit the selected MAC address in the list.

Give up the access control set up.

Click it to save the access control list.

Clean all entries in the MAC address list.


I I I I I I 1 5 W P S

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and

WPA2.

Info WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported.

It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router.

Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press a button on wireless client, and

WPS will connect for client and router automatically.

There are two methods to do network connection through WPS between AP and Stations: pressing the Start PBC button or using PIN Code .


 On the side of Vigor 3220 series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card.

 If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client.

Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.

194

For WPS is supported in WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode, if you do not choose such mode in

Wireless LAN>>Security, you will see the following message box.

Please click OK and go back Wireless LAN>>Security to choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode and access WPS again.


Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page:



Enable WPS Check this box to enable WPS setting.

WPS Status Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless security (encryption) function of the router is properly configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here.

SSID

Authentication Mode

Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1 only.

Display current authentication mode of the router. Only

WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.

Configure via Push Button Click Start PBC to invoke Push-Button style WPS setup procedure. The router will wait for WPS requests from wireless clients about two minutes. The WPS LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)

Configure via Client

PinCode

Please input the PIN code specified in wireless client you wish to connect, and click Start PIN button. The WPS LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)


196

I I I I I I 1 6 W D S

WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP) wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application:



Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air.



Extend the coverage range of a WLAN.

To meet the above requirement, two WDS modes are implemented in Vigor router. One is

Bridge, the other is Repeater. Below shows the function of WDS-bridge interface:

The application for the WDS-Repeater mode is depicted as below:

The major difference between these two modes is that: while in Repeater mode, the packets received from one peer AP can be repeated to another peer AP through WDS links. Yet in

Bridge mode, packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded to local wired or wireless hosts. In other words, only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.

In the following examples, hosts connected to Bridge 1 or 3 can communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 2 through WDS links. However, hosts connected to Bridge 1 CANNOT communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 3 through Bridge 2.


Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown.



Mode Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not invoke any WDS setting. Bridge mode is designed to fulfill the first type of application. Repeater mode is for the second one.


198

Security

WEP

Pre-shared Key

Bridge

There are three types for security, Disable, WEP and

Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the following WEP or Pre-shared key field valid or not. Choose one of the types for the router.

Check this box to use the same key set in Security Settings page. If you did not set any key in Security Settings page, this check box will be dimmed.

Type – There are some types for you to choose. WPA and

WPA2 are used for WDS devices (e.g.2920n wireless router, you can set the encryption mode as WPA or WPA2 to establish your WDS system between AP and the router.

Key - Type 8 ~ 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by “0x”.

If you choose Bridge as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time.

Yet please disable the unused link to get better performance. If you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.

Repeater

Access Point Function

Status

If you choose Repeater as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time.

Similarly, if you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.

Click Enable to make this router serve as an access point; click Disable to cancel this function.

It allows user to send “hello” message to peers. Yet, it is valid only when the peer also supports this function.



I I I I I I 1 7 A d v a n c e d S e t t t t i i n g

This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth, guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission.



Operation Mode Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards.

However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.

Green Field – to get the highest throughput, please choose such mode. Such mode can make the data transmission happen between 11n systems only. In addition, it does not have protection mechanism to avoid the conflict with neighboring devices of 802.11a/b/g.

Channel Bandwidth

Guard Interval

20- the router will use 20Mhz for data transmission and receiving between the AP and the stations.

20/40 – the router will use 20Mhz or 40Mhz for data transmission and receiving according to the station capability. Such channel can increase the performance for data transit.

20/40/80 – the router will use 20Mhz, 40Mhz or 80Mhz for data transmission and receiving according to the station capability. Such channel can increase the performance for data transit.

It is to assure the safety of propagation delays and reflections for the sensitive digital data. If you choose auto as guard interval, the AP router will choose short guard interval (increasing the wireless performance) or long guard interval for data transmit based on the station capability.

Aggregation MSDU Aggregation MSDU can combine frames with different sizes

It is used for improving MAC layer’s performance for some brand’s clients. The default setting is Enable.

.

Long Preamble This option is to define the length of the sync field in an

802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with


Packet-OVERDRIVE TM

Burst

TX

128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind of devices.

This feature can enhance the performance in data transmission about 40%* more (by checking Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time. That is, the wireless client must support this feature and invoke the function, too.

Note: Vigor N61 wireless adapter supports this function.

Therefore, you can use and install it into your PC for matching with Packet-OVERDRIVE (refer to the following picture of Vigor N61 wireless utility window, choose Enable for TxBURST on the tab of Option).

200

Tx Power

WMM Capable

APSD Capable

Info * means the real transmission rate depends on the environment of the network.

Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the signal will be.

To apply WMM parameters for wireless data transmission, please click the Enable radio button.

The default setting is Disable.



I I I I I I 1 8 A P D i i s c o v e r r y

Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5 seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor.

This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which is in the same channel of this router can be found. Please click Scan to discover all the connected APs.



Scan

Statistics

It is used to discover all the connected AP. The results will be shown on the box above this button.

It displays the statistics for the channels used by APs.

Add to


If you want the found AP applying the WDS settings, please type in the AP’s MAC address on the bottom of the page and click Bridge or Repeater. Next, click Add to. Later, the MAC address of the AP will be added to Bridge or Repeater field of

WDS settings page.

III-201

I I I I I I 1 9 S t t a t t i i o n L i i s t t

Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below.

202



Refresh Click this button to refresh the status of station list.

Add Click this button to add current typed MAC address into

Access Control.


I I I I I I 1 1 0 S t t a t t i i o n C o n t t r r o l l

Station Control is used to specify the duration for the wireless client to connect and reconnect Vigor router. If such function is not enabled, the wireless client can connect Vigor router until the router shuts down.

Such feature is especially useful for free Wi-Fi service. For example, a coffee shop offers free

Wi-Fi service for its guests for one hour every day. Then, the connection time can be set as “1 hour” and reconnection time can be set as “1 day”. Thus, the guest can finish his job within one hour and will not occupy the wireless network for a long time.



SSID

Enable

Display the SSID that the wireless station will use it to connect with Vigor router.

Check the box to enable the station control function.

Connection Time /

Reconnection Time

Use the drop down list to choose the duration for the wireless client connecting /reconnecting to Vigor router. Or, type the duration manually when you choose User defined.

Display All Station Control

List

WEB Portal Setup

All the wireless stations connecting to Vigor router by using such SSID will be listed on Station Control List.

Click it to access in to LAN>>Web Portal Setup page for modifying the settings if required.



I I I I I I 1 1 1 B a n d w i i d t t h M a n a g e m e n t t

The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Bandwidth Management to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.

204



SSID Display the specific SSID name.

Enable

Bandwidth Limit Type

Check this box to enable the bandwidth management for clients.

Auto Adjustment - Bandwidth limit is determined by the system automatically.

Per Station Limit – Bandwidth limit is determined according to the limitation of the wireless client.

Total Upload Limit

Total Download Limit

Upload Limit

Download Limit

It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading) for all of the wireless clients connecting to Vigor3220.

It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data clientstations connecting to Vigor3220.

It is available when Per Station Limit is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading) for each wireless client connecting to Vigor3220.

It is available when Per Station Limit is selected

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic

(downloading) for each wireless client connecting to

Vigor3220.

After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.


P a r r t t I I V V P N

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.

It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard

Web browser.

A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.


I I V 1 V P N a n d R e m o t t e A c c e s s

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.

The VPN built is suitable for:

 Communication between home office and customer

 Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office

 Exchange data between remote office and main office

 POS between chain store and headquarters



I I V 1 1 V P N C l l i i e n t t W i i z a r r d

Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the

LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step.

1.

Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear.



LAN-to-LAN Client

Mode Selection

Choose the client mode.

Route Mode/NAT Mode – If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT mode, otherwise please choose Route Mode.

Please choose a

LAN-to-LAN Profile

There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.


208

2.

When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following page.

In this page, you have to select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are six types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page. After making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection(s) you made.

Info The following descriptions for VPN Type are based on the Route Mode specified in LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection.

When you choose PPTP (None Encryption) or PPTP (Encryption), you will see the following graphic:


When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic:

When you choose L2TP, you will see the following graphic:


When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see the following graphic:

When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic:

210



Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.

VPN Dial-Out Through Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface


for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.

WAN1 First/ WAN2 First /WAN3 First/WAN4/WAN5 First-

While connecting, the router will use

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 as the first channel for

VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN3 Only/WAN4/WAN5 Only -

While connecting, the router will use

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 as the only channel for

VPN connection.

WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN connection.

WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN connection.

Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.

Type the IP address of the server or type the host name for such VPN profile.

Type a port number for SSL tunnel.

Always On

Server IP/Host Name for VPN

Server Port (for SSL

Tunnel)

IKE Authentication

Method

Digital Signature

(X.509)

IPsec Security Method Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload

(data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),

Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

User Name

Click Digital Signature to invoke this function.

Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list.

Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject

Name First.

Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of the certificates for using. You have to configure one certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >>

Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here will not be effective.

Password

This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

The length of the user name is limited to 11 characters.


The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.

Remote Network IP

Remote Network

Mask

IKE Authentication Method usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node (LAN to LAN) which uses dynamic

IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and IPsec tunnel.

Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key-Confirm the pre-shared key.

Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Please type the network mask (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.


212

3.

After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on the page and click Finish to execute the next action.



Go to the VPN

Connection

Management

Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote

Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN

Connection status.

Do another VPN

Server Wizard Setup

View more detailed configuration

Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard.


Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.


I I V 1 2 V P N S e r r v e r r W i i z a r r d

Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the

LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step.

1.

Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear.



VPN Server Mode

Selection

Choose the direction for the VPN server.

Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically, please choose Site to Site VPN.

Remote Dial-in User –You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection.

Please choose a

LAN-to-LAN Profile

Please choose a

Dial-in User Accounts

This item is available when you choose Site to Site VPN

(LAN-to-LAN) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.

This item is available when you choose Remote Dial-in User

(Teleworker) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN tunnels for users to set.

Allowed Dial-in Type This item is available after you choose any one of dial-in user account profiles. Next, you have to select suitable dial-in type for the VPN server profile. There are several types provided here (similar to VPN Client Wizard).


214

Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site

VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected.

2.

After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing

Site-to-Site VPN as the VPN Server Mode.

When you check PPTP, you will see the following graphic:


When you check PPTP & IPsec & L2TP (three types) or PPTP & IPsec (two types) or L2TP

with Policy (Nice to Have/Must), you will see the following graphic:



Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.

User Name

Password

Pre-Shared Key


The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.



For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a pre-shared key.


Type the pre-shared key again for confirmation. Confirm Pre-Shared

Key

Digital Signature

(X.509)

Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function.

Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list.

Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject

Name First.

Peer IP/VPN Client IP Type the WAN IP address or VPN client IP address for the remote client.

Peer ID Type the ID name for the remote client.


Remote Network IP

Remote Network

Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Please type the network mask (according to the real location


216

Mask of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

3.

After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on the page and click Finish to execute the next action.



Go to the VPN

Connection

Management

Do another VPN

Server Wizard Setup

View more detailed configuration


Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN

Connection status.

Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard.


Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.


I I V 1 3 R e m o t e A c c e s s C o n t r r o l l

Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your

LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.



I I V 1 4 P P P G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over

IPsec.

218



Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.

PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol for authentication.

Dial-In PPP Encryption

(MPPE)

Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE encryption method will be optionally employed in the router for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.

 Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using

128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE encryption method is not available, then 40-bit encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.

 Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.

Mutual Authentication The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to


(PAP)

Assigned IP Start

PPP Authentication

Methods

While using Radius or

LDAP Authentication communicate with other routers or clients who need bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable this function when your peer router requires mutual authentication. You should further specify the User Name and Password of the mutual authentication peer.

The length of the name/password is limited to 23/19 characters.

Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection. You should choose an IP address from the local private network.

For example, if the local private network is

192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, you could choose 192.168.1.200 as the Start IP Address.

You can configure up to four start IP addresses for LAN1 ~

LAN6.

Select the method(s) to be used for authentication in PPP connection.

If PPP connection will be authenticated via RADIUS server or

LDAP profiles, it is necessary to specify the LAN profile for the dial-in user to get IP from.


I I V 1 5 I P s e c G e n e r r a l l S e t u p

In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.

There are two phases of IPsec.

 Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure tunnel for IKE Phase 2.

 Phase 2: negotiation IPsec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or

Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual examination of the secure tunnel establishment.

There are two encapsulation methods used in IPsec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPsec. The Tunnel mode will not only add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the whole original IP packet.

Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets.

On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.

Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.

220




Method

This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node

(LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and

IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and

IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared


IPsec Security Method

Key.

Certificate for Dial-in –Choose one of the local certificates from the drop down list.

Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to confirm the pre-shared key.

Note: Any packets from the remote dial-in user which does not match the rule defined in VPN and Remote

Access>>Remote Dial-In User will be applied with the method specified here.

Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High (ESP) - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption

Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.


I I V 1 6 I I P s e c P e e r r I I d e n t i i t t y

To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote

User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown below, the router provides 100 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.



Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page


Name of IPsec Peer Identity.

Display the profile name of that index.

Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

222



Profile Name Type the name of the profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 32 characters.

Enable this account

Accept Any Peer ID

Accept Subject

Alternative Name

Check it to enable such account profile.

Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.

Accept Subject Name

Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address,

Domain, or E-mail Address. The box under the Type will appear according to the type you select and ask you to fill in corresponding setting.

Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field includes

Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O),

Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email

(E).



I I V 1 7 R e m o t e D i i a l l i i n U s e r r

You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.

The router provides 100 access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the user accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following figure shows the summary table.



Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.

Index

User

Active

Status

Online – Click it to display the online user accounts.

Offline – Click it to display the offline user accounts.

Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of Remote Dial-in User.

Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the

LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.

Check the box to activate such profile.

Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be active and inactive, respectively.


Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the

different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

224



User account and

Authentication

Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.

Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.

Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User

Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

IPsec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an

IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

 None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the

VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

 Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in

VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

 Must -Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an SSL

VPN connection through Internet.


Subnet


Method

IPsec Security Method


Specify Remote Node -You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE aggressive mode).

Uncheck the checkbox means the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.

Netbios Naming Packet -

 Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

 Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming

Packet inside the tunnel.

Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection.

 Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass through the router.

 Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let multicast packets be blocked by the router.

User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or

L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters.

Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or

L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the password is limited to 19 characters.

Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box to make the authentication with mOTP function.

PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).

Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.

Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for the subnet you specified.

This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or without specifying the IP address of the remote node.

Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.

This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with

IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the

Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.

Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.

High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload


225


Local ID (Optional)- Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.


I I V 1 8 L A N t t o L A N

Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles.

You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out), connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and

L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.

The following figure shows the summary table according to the item

(All/Trunk/Online/Offline) selected for View.

226

The following shows profiles joined into VPN Load Balance and VPN Backup mechanism.


If there is no profile joined yet, this page will be shown as follows:




Name

Active

Status

Trunk – Click it to display the Trunk profiles.

Click to clear all indexes.

Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.

V – means the profile has been enabled.

X – means the profile has not been enabled.

Indicate the status of individual profiles. The symbol V and X represent the profile to be active and inactive, respectively.

To edit each profile:

1.

Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each

LAN-to-LAN profile includes 5 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.


228



Common Settings Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the

LAN-to-LAN connection.

Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile.

VPN Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.

 WAN1 First/ WAN2 First/ WAN3 First/WAN4 First

/WAN5 First- While connecting, the router will use

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

 WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN3 Only/WAN4 Only

/WAN5 Only- While connecting, the router will use

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 as the only channel for VPN connection.

 WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If

WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN


Dial-Out Settings

Vigor3220 Series User’s Guide connection.

 WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If

WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN connection.

Netbios Naming Packet

 Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.



Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection.



Call Direction - Specify the allowed call direction of this

LAN-to-LAN profile.

 Both:-initiator/responder

 Dial-Out- initiator only

 Dial-In- responder only.

Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.

Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the connection has been idled over the value, the router will drop the connection.

Enable PING to keep alive - This function is to help the router to determine the status of IPsec VPN connection, especially useful in the case of abnormal VPN IPsec tunnel disruption. For details, please refer to the note below. Check to enable the transmission of PING packets to a specified IP address.

Enable PING to keep alive is used to handle abnormal IPsec

VPN connection disruption. It will help to provide the state of a VPN connection for router’s judgment of redial.

Normally, if any one of VPN peers wants to disconnect the connection, it should follow a serial of packet exchange procedure to inform each other. However, if the remote peer disconnects without notice, Vigor router will by no where to know this situation. To resolve this dilemma, by continuously sending PING packets to the remote host, the

Vigor router can know the true existence of this VPN connection and react accordingly. This is independent of DPD

(dead peer detection).

PING to the IP - Enter the IP address of the remote host that located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel.

Type of Server I am calling - PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN connection to the server through the Internet. You should set the identity like User Name and Password below for the authentication of remote server.

IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server through Internet.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection

229

230 through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

 None: Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the

VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

 Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out

VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

 Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

User Name - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or


Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or


PPP Authentication - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.

PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 is the most common selection due to compatibility.

VJ compression - This field is applicable when you select

PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. VJ

Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression.

Normally set to On to improve bandwidth utilization.

IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.

 Pre-Shared Key - Input 1-63 characters as pre-shared key.

 Digital Signature (X.509) - Select one predefined

Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec

Peer Identity.

Peer ID - Select one of the predefined Profiles set in

VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.

Local ID – Specify a local ID (Alternative Subject Name

First or Subject Name First) to be used for Dial-in setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.

 Local Certificate – Select one of the profiles set in

Certificate Management>>Local Certificate.

IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for

IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.

 Medium AH (Authentication Header) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

 High (ESP-Encapsulating Security Payload)- means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.

Select from below:

 DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

 DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

 3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

 3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication


algorithm.

 AES without Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

 AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

Advanced - Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE phase, Gateway, etc.

The window of advance setup is shown as below:


IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security proposals to create a protected secure channel. Main mode is more secure than Aggressive mode since more exchanges are done in a secure channel to set up the IPsec session.

However, the Aggressive mode is faster. The default value in

Vigor router is Main mode.

 IKE phase 1 proposal-To propose the local available authentication schemes and encryption algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match.

Two combinations are available for Aggressive mode and nine for Main mode. We suggest you select the combination that covers the most schemes.

 IKE phase 2 proposal-To propose the local available algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match. Three combinations are available for both modes. We suggest you select the combination that covers the most algorithms.

 IKE phase 1 key lifetime-For security reason, the lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is

28800 seconds. You may specify a value in between 900 and 86400 seconds.

 IKE phase 2 key lifetime-For security reason, the lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is

3600 seconds. You may specify a value in between 600 and 86400 seconds.

 Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)-The IKE Phase 1 key will be reused to avoid the computation complexity in phase 2. The default value is inactive this function.

Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of the

IP address while identity authenticating with remote

VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47 characters.

Index(1-15) - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup.

The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.

231

232



Dial-In Settings Allowed Dial-In Type - Determine the dial-in connection with different types.

 PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP

VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

 IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

 L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet.

You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

 None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without

IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

 Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

 Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

 SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an


GRE over IPsec

Settings


SSL VPN connection through Internet.

Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.

Also, you should further specify the corresponding security methods on the right side.

If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.

User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or


Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or


VJ Compression - VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or without specify the IP address of the remote node.

 Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters

(1-63) as the pre-shared key.

 Digital Signature (X.509) –Check the box of Digital

Signature to invoke this function and select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access

>>IPsec Peer Identity.

 Local ID – Specify which one will be inspected first.

 Alternative Subject Name First – The alternative subject name (configured in Certificate

Management>>Local Certificate) will be inspected first.

 Subject Name First – The subject name

(configured in Certificate Management>>Local

Certificate) will be inspected first.

IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for

IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node.

 Medium- Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

 High- Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.

You may select encryption algorithm from Data

Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

Enable IPsec Dial-Out function GRE over IPsec: Check this box to verify data and transmit data in encryption with GRE over IPsec packet after configuring IPsec Dial-Out setting.

Both ends must match for each other by setting same virtual

IP address for communication.

Logical Traffic: Such technique comes from RFC2890. Define

233

234

TCP/IP Network

Settings logical traffic for data transmission between both sides of

VPN tunnel by using the characteristic of GRE. Even hacker can decipher IPsec encryption, he/she still cannot ask LAN site to do data transmission with any information. Such function can ensure the data transmitted on VPN tunnel is really sent out from both sides. This is an optional function.

However, if one side wants to use it, the peer must enable it, too.

My GRE IP: Type the virtual IP for router itself for verified by peer.

Peer GRE IP: Type the virtual IP of peer host for verified by router.

My WAN IP –This field is only applicable when you select

PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a PPP

IP address from the remote router during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the default value if you do not select PPTP or L2TP.

Remote Gateway IP - This field is only applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a remote Gateway PPP IP address from the remote router during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the default value if you do not select PPTP or

L2TP.

Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP

Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.

For IPsec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick mode.

Local Network IP / Local Network Mask - Display the local network IP and mask for TCP / IP configuration. You can modify the settings if required.

More - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Masks through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.

RIP Direction - The option specifies the direction of RIP

(Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can


IPSec VPN with the

Same subnet enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.

From first subnet to remote network, you have to do - If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.

Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel.

For both ends (e.g., different sections in a company) are within the same subnet, there is a function which allows you to build Virtual IP mapping between two ends. Thus, when

VPN connection established, the router will change the IP address according to the settings configured here and block sessions which are not coming from the IP address defined in the Virtual IP Mapping list.

After checking the box of IPSec VPN with the Same subnet, the options under TCP/IP Network Settings will be changed as shown below:

Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP

Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.

For IPSec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick mode.

Translated Local Network – This function is enabled in default. Use the drop down list to specify a LAN port as the transferred direction. Then specify an IP address. Click

Advanced to configure detailed settings if required.

Advanced – Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.


Translated Type – There are two types for you to choose.

 Whole Subnet

 Specific IP Address

Virtual IP Mapping – A pop up dialog will appear for you to specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP address.

236

2.



I I V 1 9 V P N T r r u n k M a n a g e m e n t t

VPN trunk includes four features - VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding tunnel policy.

F e a t t u r r e s o f f V P N T R U N K – V P N B a c k u p M e c h a n i i s m

VPN TRUNK Management is a backup mechanism which can set multiple VPN tunnels as backup tunnel. It can assure the network connection not to be cut off due to network environment blocked by any reason.

 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism can judge abnormal situation for the environment of

VPN server and correct it to complete the backup of VPN Tunnel in real-time.

 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism is compliant with all WAN modes (single/multi)

 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and ISDN (depends on hardware specification)

 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure

 Fully compliant with VPN Server LAN Site Single/Multi Network

 Mail Alert support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for detailed configuration

 Syslog support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for detailed configuration

 Specific ERD (Environment Recovery Detection) mechanism which can be operated by using Telnet command

VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile will be activated when initial connection of single

VPN tunnel is off-line. Before setting VPN TRUNK -VPN Backup mechanism backup profile, please configure at least two sets of LAN-to-LAN profiles (with fully configured dial-out settings) first, otherwise you will not have selections for grouping Member1 and Member2.

F e a t t u r r e s o f f V P N T R U N K – V P N L o a d B a l l a n c e M e c h a n i i s m

VPN Load Balance Mechanism can set multiple VPN tunnels for using as traffic load balance tunnel. It can assist users to do effective load sharing for multiple VPN tunnels according to real line bandwidth. Moreover, it offers three types of algorithms for load balancing and binding tunnel policy mechanism to let the administrator manage the network more flexibly.

 Three types of load sharing algorithm offered, Round Robin, Weighted Round Robin and

Fastest

 Binding Tunnel Policy mechanism allows users to encrypt the data in transmission or specified service function in transmission and define specified VPN Tunnel for having effective bandwidth management

 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and GRE over IPsec

 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure

 The TCP Session transmitted by using VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism will not be lost due to one of VPN Tunnels disconnected. Users do not need to reconnect with setting

TCP/UDP Service Port again. The VPN Load Balance function can keep the transmission for internal data on tunnel stably


238



Backup Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN

Backup mechanism profile.

No – The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile.

Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled.

Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile.

Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the

Member1 drop down list below.

Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with

Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.

Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as

IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over

IPsec(MUST) and so on.



Advanced – This button is available only when LAN to LAN profile (or more) is created.


Detailed information for this dialog, see later section -

Advanced Load Balance and Backup.

Load Balance Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN

Load Balance mechanism profile.

The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile.

Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such profile is disabled.

Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism profile.



Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with

Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.

Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as

IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over

IPsec(MUST) and so on.



Advanced – This button is only available when there is one or more profiles created in this page.


Detailed information for this dialog, see later section -

Advanced Load Balance and Backup.

239

240

General Setup Status- After choosing one of the profile listed above, please click Enable to activate this profile. If you click Disable, the selected or current used VPN TRUNK-Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile will not have any effect for VPN tunnel.

Profile Name- Type a name for VPN TRUNK profile. Each profile can group two VPN connections set in LAN-to-LAN.

The saved VPN profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be shown on

Member1 and Member2 fields. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.

Member 1/Member2 - Display the selection for LAN-to-LAN dial-out profiles (configured in VPN and Remote Access >>

LAN-to-LAN) for you to choose for grouping under certain

VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile.

 No - Index number of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.

 Name - Profile name of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.

 Connection Type - Connection type of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.

 VPN ServerIP (Private Network) - VPN Server IP of

LAN-to-LAN dial-out profiles.

Active Mode - Display available mode for you to choose.

Choose Backup or Load Balance for your router.

Add - Add and save new profile to the backup profile list.

The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles) grouped in such new VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism profile will be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in red. VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance mechanism profile will be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in blue.

Update - Click this button to save the changes to the Status

(Enable or Disable), profile name, member1 or member2.

Delete - Click this button to delete the selected VPN TRUNK profile. The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles) grouped in the deleted VPN TRUNK profile will be released and that profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in black.

T i i m e f f o r r a c t i i v a t t i i n g V P N T R U N K – V P N B a c k u p m e c h a n i i s m p r r o f f i i l l e

VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism will be activated automatically after the initial connection of single VPN Tunnel off-line. The content in Member1/2 within VPN TRUNK – VPN

Backup mechanism backup profile is similar to dial-out profile configured in LAN-to-LAN web page. VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism backup profile will process and handle everything unless it is off-line once it is activated.

T i i m e f f o r r a c t i i v a t t i i n g V P N T R U N K – V P N L o a d B a l l a n c e m e c h a n i i s m p r o f f i i l l e

After finishing the connection for one tunnel, the other tunnel will dial out automatically within two seconds. Therefore, you can choose any one of members under VPN Load Balance for dialing out.

T i i m e f f o r r a c t i i v a t t i i n g V P N T R U N K – D i i a l l o u t w h e n V P N L o a d B a l l a n c e D i i s c o n n e c t e d

For there is one Tunnel created and connected successfully, to keep the load balance effect between two tunnels, auto-dial will be executed within two seconds.

To close two tunnels of load balance after connecting, please click Disable for Status in

General Setup field.


H o w c a n y o u s e t a V P N T R U N K V P N B a c k u p / L o a d B a l l a n c e m e c h a n i i s m p r r o f f i i l l e ?

1.

First of all, go to VPN and Remote Access>>LAN-to-LAN. Set two or more LAN-to-LAN profiles first that will be used for Member1 and Member2. If you do not set enough

LAN-to-LAN profiles, you cannot operate VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup /Load Balance mechanism profile management well.

2.

Access into VPN and Remote Access>>VPN TRUNK Management.

3.

Set one group of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism backup profile by choosing Enable radio button; type a name for such profile (e.g., 071023); choose one of the LAN-to-LAN profiles from Member1 drop down list; choose one of the LAN-to-LAN profiles from Member2 drop down list; and click Add at last.

4.

Take a look for LAN-to-LAN profiles. Index 1 is chosen as Member1; index 2 is chosen as

Member2. For such reason, LAN-to-LAN profiles of 1 and 2 will be expressed in red to indicate that they are fixed. If you delete the VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile, the selected LAN-to-LAN profiles will be released and expressed in black.

H o w c a n y o u s e t a G R E o v e r r I I P s e c p r r o f i i l l e ?

1.

Please go to LAN to LAN to set a profile with IPsec.

2.

If the router will be used as the VPN Server (i.e., with virtual address 192.168.50.200).

Please type 192.168.50.200 in the field of My GRE IP. Type IP address (192.168.50.100) of the client in the field of Peer GRE IP. See the following graphic for an example.


242

3.

Later, on peer side (as VPN Client): please type 192.168.50.100 in the field of My GRE IP and type IP address of the server (192.168.50.200) in the field of Peer GRE IP.

A d v a n c e d L o a d B a l l a n c e a n d B a c k u p

After setting profiles for load balance, you can choose any one of them and click Advance for more detailed configuration. The windows for advanced load balance and backup are different. Refer to the following explanation:


A d v a n c e d L o a d B a l l a n c e



Profile Name List the load balance profile name. the packet alternatively. Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with fixed rate.

Weighted Round Robin – Such method can reach the balance of packet transmission with flexible rate. It can be divided into Auto Weighted and According to Speed Ratio. Auto

Weighted can detect the device speed (10Mbps/100Mbps) and switch with fixed value ratio (3:7) for packet transmission. If the transmission rate for packets on both sides of the tunnels is the same, the value of Auto Weighted should be 50:50. According to Speed Ratio allows user to adjust suitable rate manually. There are 100 groups of rate ratio for Member1:Member2 (range from 1:99 to 99:1).

VPN Load Balance Policy Below shows the algorithm for Load Balance.

Edit – Click this radio button for assign a blank table for configuring Binding Tunnel.

Insert after – Click this radio button to adding a new binding


244

Detail Information tunnel table.

Tunnel Bind Table Index- 128 Binding tunnel tables are provided by this device. Specify the number of the tunnel for such Load Balance profile.

Active – In-active/Delete can delete this binding tunnel table. Active can activate this binding tunnel table.

Binding Dial Out Index – Specify connection type for transmission by choosing the index (LAN to LAN Profile Index) for such binding tunnel table.

Scr IP Start /End– Specify source IP addresses as starting point and ending point.

Dest IP Start/End – Specify destination IP addresses as starting point and ending point.

Dest Port Start /End– Specify destination service port as starting point and ending point.

Protocol – Any means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here, such binding tunnel table can be established for TCP Service Port/UDP Service

Port/ICMP/IGMP specified here.

TCP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here and TCP Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be established. UDP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here and UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be established. TCP/UPD means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here and TCP/UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be established. ICMP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here and ICMP

Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be established. IGMP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here and IGMP Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be established. Other means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions match with the settings specified here with different TCP Service Port/UDP

Service Port/ICMP/IGMP, such binding tunnel table can be established.

This field will display detailed information for Binding Tunnel

Policy. Below shows a successful binding tunnel policy for load balance:


A d v a n c e d B a c k u p

To configure a successful binding tunnel, you have to:

Type Binding Src IP range (Start and End) and Binding Des IP range (Start and End). Choose TCP/UDP, IGMP/ICMP or Other as Binding Protocol.



Profile Name List the backup profile name.

ERD Mode ERD means “Environment Recovers Detection”.

Normal – choose this mode to make all dial-out VPN TRUNK backup profiles being activated alternatively.

Resume – when VPN connection breaks down or disconnects,


Detail Information

Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN connection.

This field will display detailed information for Environment

Recovers Detection.

I I V 1 1 0 C o n n e c t t i o n M a n a g e m e n t t

You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool and clicking Dial button.

246



Dial-out Tool General Mode - This filed displays the profile configured in

LAN-to-LAN (with Index number and VPN Server IP address).

The VPN connection built by General Mode does not support

VPN backup function.

Backup Mode - This filed displays the profile name saved in

VPN TRUNK Management (with Index number and VPN Server

IP address). The VPN connection built by Backup Mode supports VPN backup function.


Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function.

Refresh Seconds - Choose the time for refresh the dial information among 5, 10, and 30.

Refresh - Click this button to refresh the whole connection status.



A 1 H o w t t o B u i i l l d a L A N t t o L A N V P N B e t w e e n R e m o t t e O f f f i i c e a n d H e a d q u a r t e r r v i i a I I P s e c T u n n e l l ( ( M a i i n M o d e ) )

C o n f f i i g u r r a t t i i o n o n V i i g o r r R o u t e r r f f o r r H e a d O f f f f i i c e

1.

Log into the web user interface of Vigor router.

2.

Open VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN to create a LAN-to-LAN profile. The following settings are for a permanent VPN connection.

3.

Click any index number to open the configuration page. Type a name which is easy for identification for such profile (in this case, type VPN Server), and check the box of

Enable This Profile. For Vigor router will be set as a server, the call direction shall be set as Dial-in and set 0 as Idle Timeout.

248

4.

Now navigate to the next section, Dial-In Settings to check PPTP, IPsec Tunnel and L2TP boxes. Check the box of Specify Remote… and type the Peer VPN Server IP (e.g.,


218.242.130.19 in this case). Press the IKE Pre-Shared Key button to set the PSK; and select Medium (AH) or High (ESP) as the security method.

5.

Continue to navigate to the TCP/IP Network Settings for setting the LAN IP for remote side.

6.


7.

Open VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management to check the dial-in connection status (from branch office).


250

C o n f f i i g u r r a t t i i o n o n V i i g o r r R o u t e r r f f o r r B r r a n c h O f f f f i i c e

1.


2.

Open VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN to create a LAN-to-LAN profile. The following settings are for a permanent VPN connection.

3.

Click any index number to open the configuration page. Type a name which is easy for identification for such profile (in this case, type VPN Client), and check the box of

Enable This Profile. For such Vigor router will be set as a client, the call direction shall be set as Dial-out. Check the box of Always on for a permanent VPN connection.


4.

Now navigate to the next section, Dial-Out Settings to select the IPsec Tunnel service and type the remote server IP/host name (e.g., 218.242.133.91, in this case). Press the

IKE Pre-Shared Key button to set the PSK; and select Medium (AH) or High (ESP) as the security method.

5.

Continue to navigate to the TCP/IP Network Settings for setting the LAN IP for the remote side.

6.



7.

Open VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management to check the dial-in connection status (from head office).


I I V 2 S S L V P N

An SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard Web browser.

There are two benefits that SSL VPN provides:

 It is not necessary for users to preinstall VPN client software for executing SSL VPN connection.

 There are less restrictions for the data encrypted through SSL VPN in comparing with traditional VPN.



I I V 2 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

This page determines the general configuration for SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel.



Port Such port is set for SSL VPN server. It will not affect the HTTPS

Port configuration set in System Maintenance>>Management.

In general, the default setting is 443.

Server Certificate When the client does not set any certificate, default certificate will be used for HTTPS and SSL VPN server. Choose any one of the user-defined certificates from the drop down list if users set several certificates previously. Otherwise, choose Self-signed to use the router’s built-in default certificate. The default certificate can be used in SSL VPN server and HTTPS Web Proxy.



I I V 2 2 S S L W e b P r o x y

SSL Web Proxy will allow the remote users to access the internal web sites over SSL.



Name Display the name of the profile that you create.

URL

Active

Display the URL.

Display current status (active or inactive) of such profile.

Click number link under Index filed to set detailed configuration.



Name Type name of the profile. The length of the name is limited to

15 characters.

URL Type the address (function variation or IP address) or path of the proxy server.


Host IP Address

Access Method

If you type function variation as URL, you have to type corresponding IP address in this filed. Such field must match with URL setting.

There are three modes for you to choose.

Disable – The profile will be inactive. If you choose Disable, all the web proxy profile appeared under VPN remote dial-in web page will disappear.

Secured Port Redirection – Such technique applies private port mapping to random WAN port. There are two restrictions for proxy web server for such selection: 1) it is only used for

WAN to LAN access, the web server must be configured behind vigor router; 2) web server gateway must be indicated to vigor router. In addition, users must execute “Connect” manually in

SSL Client Portal page.

SSL – If you choose such selection, web proxy over SSL will be applied for VPN.



I I V 2 3 S S L A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n

It provides a secure and flexible solution for network resources, including VNC (Virtual

Network Computer) /RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol), to any remote user with access to

Internet and a web browser.



Name Display the application name of the profile that you create.

Host Address

Service

Active

Display the IP address for VNC/RDP or SAMBA path.

Display the type of the service selected, e.g.,

VNC/RDP/SAMBA.

Display current status (active or inactive) of the selected profile.

To create a new SSL application profile:

1.

Click number link under Index filed to set detailed configuration.

2.

The following page will appear.



Enable Application Check the box to enable such profile.


258

Server

Application Name

Application

IP Address

Port

Idle Timeout

Scaling

Screen Size

Type a name for such application. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters.

There are two types offered for you to create an application profile.

Virtual Network Computing (VNC) – It allows you to access and control a remote PC through VNC protocol.

Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) – It allows you to access and control a remote PC through RDP protocol.

If you choose VNC or RDP, you have to type the IP address for this protocol.

If you choose VNC or RDP, you have to specify the port used for this protocol. The default setting is 5900.

If you choose VNC, you have to specify the time for disconnecting the SSL VPN tunnel.

If you choose VNC, you have to choose the percentage

(100%, 80%, 60%) for such application.

If you choose RDP, you have to choose the screen size for such application.

3.

Enter the required information.

4.



I I V 2 4 U s e r r A c c o u n t t

With SSL VPN, Vigor3220 Series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel mode or proxy mode. Now, Vigor3220 Series allows up to 16 simultaneous incoming users.

For SSL VPN, identity authentication and power management are implemented through deploying user accounts. Therefore, the user account for SSL VPN must be set together with remote dial-in user web page. Such menu item will guide to access into VPN and Remote

Access>>Remote Dial-in user.


Click each index to edit one remote user profile.

260



User account and

Authentication

Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.

Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the

Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.

User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or

L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name/password is limited to 23 characters.

Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or

L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name/password is limited to 19 characters.

Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box to make the authentication with mOTP function.

 PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

 Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).

Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User

Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPSec

VPN connection through Internet.

L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select from below:

 None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. Accordingly, the

VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPSec policy


Item Description can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

 Nice to Have - Apply the IPSec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

 Must -Specify the IPSec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel - It allows the remote dial-in user to make an SSL

VPN Tunnel connection through Internet, suitable for the application through network accessing (e.g.,

PPTP/L2TP/IPSec).

If you check this box, the function of SSL Tunnel for this account will be activated immediately.

Specify Remote Node - Check the checkbox to specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID

(used in IKE aggressive mode). If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general

settings.

Netbios Naming Packet

 Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.



Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection.



Subnet


Method

IPSec Security Method

Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.

Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for the subnet you specified.

This group of fields is applicable for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPSec tunnel either with or without specify the IP address of the remote node.

Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPSec Peer Identity.

This group of fields is a must for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with

IPSec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the

Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.

Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.

High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload





Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the

LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.



I I V 2 5 U s e r r G r r o u p

There are 10 user group profiles which can be created for authentication by LDAP server. Such profiles will be used by applications such as User Management, VPN and etc.



Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.

Index

Name

Display the number of the client which connecting to FTP server.

Display the name of the group profile.

Click any index number link to open the following page for detailed configuration.


264




Group Name

Access Authority

Type a name for such profile. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters.

Specify the authority for such profile.

At present, Vigor router allows you to create SSL Web Proxy and SSL Application profiles used for SSL VPN. The available profiles will be displayed here for you to select.

Authentication Methods It can determine the authentication method used for such profile.

Local User DataBase – The system will do the authentication by using the user defined account profiles (in VPN and Remote

Access>>Remote Dial-In User). The enabled profiles will be listed in the Available User Account on the left box. To add a profile into a group, simply choose the one from the left box and click the >> button. It will be displayed in the Selected

User Account on the right box. For detailed information about configuring the profile setting, refer to Objects Setting>>IP

Group.

RADIUS – The RADIUS server will do the authentication by using the username and password

TACACS+ - The TACACS+ will do the authentication by using the username and password.

LDAP / Active Directory - If it is checked, the LDAP / AD server will do the authentication by using the username, password, information stated on the selected profiles.

If the above three options are enabled, the system will do the authentication based on them in sequence.



I I V 2 6 O n l l i i n e U s e r r S t t a t u s

If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface.

Next, users can open SSL VPN>> Online Status to view logging status of SSL VPN.



Active User Display current user who visits SSL VPN server.

Host IP

Time out

Action

Display the IP address for the host.

Display the time remaining for logging out.

You can click Drop to drop certain login user from the router's

SSL Portal UI.


I I V 3 C e r r t t i i f f i i c a t t e M a n a g e m e n t t

A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).

It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard

X.509.

Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.

Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that you can get the correct valid period of certificate.

Below shows the menu items for Certificate Management.



I I V 3 1 L o c a l l C e r r t t i i f i i c a t t e



Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request window.

Type in all the information that the window requests. Then click Generate again.

Import

Refresh

View

Delete

Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information.

Click this button to refresh the information listed below.

Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.

Click this button to delete selected name with certification information.

G E N E R A T E

Click this button to open Generate Certificate Signing Request window. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE again.


Info Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with rotuer’s

WAN IP or domain name.

After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:

268

I I M P O R T

Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party, you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a private key.

Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. There are three types of local certificate supported by Vigor router.




Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by

Vigor router and signed by CA server.

If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of the certificate will be shown as “OK”.

Upload PKCS12

Certificate

Upload Certificate and

Private Key

It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually need passwords.

Note: PKCS12 is a standard for storing private keys and certificates securely. It is used in (among other things)

Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer with their import and export options.

It is useful when users have separated certificates and private keys. And the password is needed if the private key is encrypted.


R E F R E S H

Click this button to refresh the information listed below.

V i i e w

Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.

270

Info You have to copy the certificate request information from above window.

Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be issued to you by the CA server. You can save it.

D e l l e t t e

Click this button to remove the selected certificate.


I I V 3 2 T r r u s t t e d C A C e r r t t i i f f i i c a t t e

Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a

RootCA certificate if required.

When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g.,

IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates offered by both ends.

However, the procedure of applying digital certificate from a trusted root certificate authority is complicated and time-consuming. Therefore, Vigor router offers a mechanism which allows you to generate root CA to save time and provide convenience for general user.

Later, such root CA generated by DrayTek server can perform the issuing of local certificate.

Info Root CA can be deleted but not edited. If you want to modify the settings for a Root CA, please delete the one and create another one by clicking

Create Root CA.


C r e a t t i n g a R o o t C A

Click Create Root CA to open the following page. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE again.

272

I I m p o r t t i i n g a T r u s t t e d C A

To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window.

For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all the certificate information.


I I V 3 3 C e r r t t i i f f i i c a t t e B a c k u p

Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file.

Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password and Confirm password.

Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.


I I V 4 C e n t t r r a l l V P N M a n a g e m e n t t

Vigor3220 can build virtual private network (VPN) between itself and any other TR-069 CPE by the function of central VPN management. In addition, it can be treated as a server (called

CVM server) which can manage TR-069 CPE for periodical firmware upgrade, configuration backup and restoring configuration.



Central VPN Management menu can manage the CPE connected through WAN only.

I I V 4 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

General Setup is used to configure settings which will be used by the clients to register to such Vigor router. Click the tabs of General Settings and IPsec VPN Settings to configure the basic settings for CVM mechanism.

I I V 4 1 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t t t i i n g s

To enable the CVM feature, the first thing you have to do is enabling CVM port or CVM SSL

Port.



CVM SSL Port Check the box to enable the port setting.

Type the port number in the box.

CVM Port

WAN IP for Remote

Connection

Check the box to enable the port setting.

Type the port number in the box.

For Vigor router can manage only the client from WAN interface, therefore you have to specify which interface will be used for such function. If you choose MANUALLY, you have to specify WAN IP address.


276

Username

Password

Polling Interval

Type a username which will be used by any CPE trying to connect to Vigor router.

Type the password for the user.

Type the time value (unit is second). The range is from 60 ~

86400.


I I V 4 1 2 I P s e c V P N S e t t t i n g s

Central VPN management is operated through IPsec VPN connection.



IPsec Mode Choose Aggressive or Main as the IPsec Mode.

Security Method

Encryption Type

Local Subnet

Choose one of the following methods (AH or ESP) for the security of data transmission

. For example, choose AH to specify the IPsec protocol for the Authentication Header protocol. The data will be authenticated but not be encrypted.

Choose one of the selections as the encryption type.

Type the IP address and subnet mask of local host.



I I V 4 2 C P E M a n a g e m e n t t

All the CPEs managed by Vigor3220 Series can be seen with icons from this page. Before using such feature, make sure the CVM port has been enabled and configured properly.

I I V 4 2 1 M a n a g e d D e v i i c e L i i s t t

This page allows you to manage the CPEs connected to Vigor3220 Series.

P a g e w i i t t h o u t C P E c o n n e c t t e d

P a g e w i i t t h C P E c o n n e c t t e d




Managed Devices List This area displays device icons (up to 8) for the CPE managed by Vigor3220 Series.

Edit – To modify the name and location of specific CPE, click the one you want and click the Edit button. A pop up window will appear. Simply change the name and/or location manually.

Delete – To disconnect the management of any CPE, click the

CPE icon you want and click the Delete button.

Double-clicking the CPE icon also can pop up the Managed

Device Detail window. However, you cannot modify any data on the window.

278

Unmanaged Devices List Any device (CPE) which follows the standard of TR-069 can be configured and can be detected by Vigor3220 Series automatically.

Only eight remote devices can be managed by Vigor3220 at one time. Therefore, other remote devices detected by

Vigor3220 Series might not be displayed in such field.


Refresh

Add – Move the selected device from Unmanaged Devices List to Managed Devices List.

IP Address – Display the IP address of the remote device.

Mac Address – Display the MAC address of the remote device.

Device Model – Display the model name of the remote device.

Description Name – Define the name or type the additional description of CPE for identification in VPN management and

CPE management.

Location – Type the location (address) of the CPE to be displayed by Google Map.

Click it to refresh current web page.

I I V 4 2 2 C P E M a i n t t e n a n c e

This area displays all the profiles which are created for applying to the managed device. This page can help the administrator to do maintenance jobs like firmware upgrade, configuration backup, configuration restoration and etc.



Refresh Click it to refresh current page.

USB Disk

- It means a USB disk connecting to

Vigor3220.

Disk Usage

- It means no USB disk connecting to

Vigor3220.

- When a USB disk connects to Vigor3220, the disk usage and the disk capacity will be displayed in such field.

- When there is no



Index

Enable

Profile Name

Device Name

Action

Schedule

Now

USB disk connecting to Vigor3220, such message will be displayed in this field.

Click the icon to see the content inside the USB disk.

Click to clear all indexes.

Display the number of the profile that you can edit.

Check the box to enable such index profile.

Display the name of the maintenance profile.

Display the name of the managed CPE that the maintenance profile will apply to.

Display the action that managed CPE shall accept.

Display the schedule profiles selected for such profile.

The action will be performed for the selected CPE immediately.

H o w t o a d d a n e w M a i i n t t e n a n c e P r o f f i i l l e

Follow the steps below to create a new maintenance profile.

1.

Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1.

2.

The Maintenance page appears.

280

Info When restoring configuration to a CPE, make sure the configuration file you selected was backup from this CPE before. Because restoring from another device's configuration file may cause serious problem

(e.g., Both devices have different ISP username/ password. Restoring configuration from one CPE to the other will cause Internet connection not being online)..

Available parameters are listed as follows:


Profile Name Type the name of the maintenance profile.

Enable

Device Name

Check it to enable such profile.

The drop down list will display all the CPE devices detected by

Vigor3220 Series. Choose the one which will be applied with such new created profile.


Action Type

File Path

Index in Schedule

There are three actions for you to choose for such profile.

 Config Backup – It means such profile will be used for configuration backup of the selected CPE.

 Config Restore – It means such profile will be used for restoring the configuration of the selected CPE.

Info When restoring configuration to a CPE, make sure the configuration file you selected was backup from this CPE before.

Because restoring from another device's configuration file may cause serious problem (e.g., Both devices have different

ISP username/ password. Restoring configuration from one CPE to the other will cause Internet connection not being online).

 Firmware Upgrade – It means such profile will be used for firmware upgrade.

Click Select to locate the file you want to save, restore or upgrade for CPE.

Vigor3220 Series will perform the specified action to the selected CPE based on the schedule configured here.

Specify one or two schedule profiles (represented by number) here.

3.

Enter all the settings and click OK.

4.

A new maintenance profile has been created.

I I V 4 2 3 G o o g l l e M a p

To display the location of the managed CPE with a bird’s eye view, open Central VPN

Management>>CPE Management and click the tab of Google Map.


I I V 4 3 V P N M a n a g e m e n t t

An easy and quick method is offered to configure VPN settings for building VPN connection automatically between Vigor3220 Series (treated as VPN server) and other Vigor router

(treated as CPE device, i.e., VPN client).

282

Available parameters are listed as follows:


VPN Management

CPE VPN Connection List

VPN Display the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile.

It is generated automatically when you click the

PPTP/IPsec/Advanced button to build the VPN connection between Vigor3220 and remote CPE.

Type

Remote IP

Virtual Network

Tx Pkts

Tx Rate(Bps)

Rx Pkts

Rx Rate(Bps)

UP Time

Display the dial-in type and the authentication method.

Display the IP address of the remote CPE and the interface.

Display the IP address and subnet mask of Vigor3220 Series.

Display the number of the transmitted packets.

Display the number of the transmitted rate.

Display the number of the received packets.

Display the number of the received rate.

Display the connection time of such VPN.


I I V 4 4 L o g & A l e r t t

This page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor3220 Series.



Display Mode Choose the mode you want to display the related information on the following table.

 Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is full, the system will stop recording.

 Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system.

Device Name

Description Name

Time & date

Display the name of the managed CPE.

Display the brief explanation for the managed CPE.

Action Type

Message

Display the time and date that the managed CPE scanned by

Vigor3220 Series.

Display the action that Vigor3220 Series will perform for the managed CPE.

Display the information for each event.

The Alert page offers brief information to identify the CPE connected to Vigor3220 Series.



A 1 C V M A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n H o w t t o m a n a g e t h e C P E ( ( r o u t t e r r ) ) t t h r r o u g h V i i g o r r 3 2 2 0

S e r r i i e s ?

To manage CPEs through Vigor3220 Series, you have to set URL on CPE first and set username and password for Vigor3220 Series. For this section, we use Vigor2850 series as the example.

All the CPE configuration will be done through Vigor2850 series.

C o n f f i i g u r r e C V M S e t t t t i i n g s o n V i i g o r r 3 2 2 0 S e r r i e s

1.

Access into the web user interface of Vigor3220 Series.

2.

Open Central VPN Management>>General Setup.

3.

In the following page, check the boxes for CVM Port and CVM SSL Port to enable the port setting. Type the values for CVM Port, CVM SSL Port, Username, and Password respectively. Remember the values configured in this page.

284

4.



C o n f f i i g u r r e S e t t t t i i n g s o n C P E

1.

In the end of the CPE, access into the web user interface of the CPE (e.g., Vigor2850 series). Open a web browser (for example, IE, Mozilla Firefox or Netscape) and type

http://192.168.1.1.

2.

Open System Maintenance >> TR-069.

3.

In the field of ACS Server, type the URL (IP address with port number) of Vigor3220

Series and type the same Username and Password defined on the page of Central VPN

Management>>General Setup in Vigor3220 Series. Then, click Enable for CPE Client and then click OK to save the settings.

4.

Open System Maintenance>>Management Setup.


286

5.

Check Allow management from the Internet to set management access control and click OK.

6.

Open WAN>>Internet Access. Use the drop down list of Access Mode on WAN1 to select

MPoA (RFC1483/2684). Then, click Details Page.

7.

Click Specify an IP address. Type correct WAN IP address, subnet mask and gateway IP address for your CPE. Then click OK.


Info Reboot the CPE device and re-log into Vigor3220 Series. CPE which has registered to Vigor3220 Series will be captured and displayed on the page of

Central VPN Management>>CPE Management.

C h e c k C P E M a i i n t e n a n c e P a g e

1.

Return to the web user interface of Vigor3220 Series.

2.

Open Central VPN Management>>VPN Management. Now there is one CPE displayed on the field of Unmanaged Devices List.

3.

Choose the one (Vigor2850) from Unmanaged Devices List and click Add. The following dialog will be popped up. Type the name and the location of the router respectively.

Click OK to save the configuration.

4.

The selected CPE will be moved and displayed on Managed Devices List which means it is controlled / managed by Vigor3220 Series from now on.


288

A 2 C V M A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n H o w t t o b u i i l l d t h e V P N b e t w e e n r r e m o t e d e v i i c e s a n d

V i i g o r r 3 2 2 0 S e r r i i e s ?

When a remote device is managed by Vigor3220 Series, it is easy to build VPN between these two devices.

1.

Access into the web user interface of Vigor3220 Series.

2.

Open Central VPN Management>>CPE Management.

3.

Click the device icon (marked with ) and click the PPTP/IPsec button.

4.

Wait for a moment. If VPN is built successfully, related information will be displayed on

CPE VPN Connection List.


5.

A LAN to LAN profile for such VPN will be generated automatically. You can access into

VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN of the remote device for viewing the detailed information.

Info The profile name is created automatically by the system. Do not modify any value in such page to avoid VPN error.


A 3 C V M A p p l l i i c a t t i o n H o w t t o u p g r a d e C P E f f i i r r m w a r r e t h r r o u g h V i i g o r 3 2 2 0

S e r r i i e s ?

Download the newest firmware from your Draytek website to USB Storage Disk for the device

(e.g., Vigor2850) managed by Vigor3220 Series.

Vigor2850, as an example, is chosen for Vigor3220 to perform the CPE firmware upgrade remotely in this case.

1.

Plug in USB storage disk onto Vigor3220 Series via USB interface. Make sure the USB disk has been installed correctly, otherwise, the firmware upgrade will not be successful.

2.

Access into web user interface of Vigor3220 Series. Open Central VPN

Management>>CPE Management and click the CPE Maintenance tab.

290

3.

Click any index number link, e.g., Index 1.


4.

The Maintenance profile dialog appears.

In the field of Profile Name, type a name for such maintenance profile; check Enable; and choose the one you want to perform firmware upgrade from Device Name drop down list. From the Action Type, choose Firmware Upgrade. Type the file/path of the newest firmware or click Select to locate it. Specify the Schedule profile. At last, click OK.

5.

Now, a new maintenance profile has been created.

6.

Click Now to perform the firmware upgrade immediately for Vigor2850.

7.

Wait for several minutes for firmware upgrade.


292

8.

Then check the device information for the managed device if the firmware upgrade is successful or not. Click Managed Devices List.

Click the icon of Vigor2850 and click Edit and view the software version. Another way to check if the firmware upgrade is completed or not, simply open Central VPN

Management>>Log & Alert.


P a r r t t V S e c u r r i i t t y

While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet.

CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.


V 1 F i i r r e w a l l l l

While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.

F i i r r e w a l l l l F a c i i l l i i t t i i e s

The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:

 User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).

 Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data

 Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection

I I P F i i l l t t e r s

Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter and Data Filter.

 Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules.

If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet connection and send the packet to Internet.

 Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal, the packet will pass the router.

The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic and outgoing traffic respectively.


S t a t e f f u l l P a c k e t t I I n s p e c t i i o n ( ( S P I I ) )

Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header, stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.

D e n i i a l l o f f S e r r v i i c e ( ( D o S ) ) D e f f e n s e

The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks.

The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the protocol or operation system.

The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning, if you set up Syslog server.

Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.

The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:

1. SYN flood attack

2. UDP flood attack

3. ICMP flood attack

4. Port Scan attack

5. IP options

6. Land attack

7. Smurf attack

8. Trace route

9. SYN fragment

10. Fraggle attack

11. TCP flag scan

12. Tear drop attack

13. Ping of Death attack

14. ICMP fragment

15. Unassigned Numbers



Below shows the menu items for Firewall.

V 1 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options.

Here you can enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept

incoming fragmented UDP packets.

Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.

G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p P a g e

Such page allows you to enable / disable Call Filter and Data Filter, determine general rule for filtering the incoming and outgoing data.

296


Item Description start filter set for the Call Filter.


Data Filter

Accept large incoming…

Enable Strict Security

Firewall

Block routing packet from

WAN

Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Data Filter.

Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable

“Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP Packets”.

By checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games. If security concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable “Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP

Packets”.

For the sake of security, the router will execute strict security checking for data transmission.

Such feature is enabled in default. All the packets, while transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by firewall. If the firewall system (e.g., content filter server) does not make any response (pass or block) for these packets, then the router’s firewall will block the packets directly.

Usually, IPv6 network sessions/traffic from WAN to LAN will be accepted by IPv6 firewall in default.

IPv6 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on

LAN, check the box to make the packets (routed from WAN to

LAN) via IPv6 being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by

NAT.

IPv4 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on

LAN, check the box to make the incoming packets via IPv4 being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.


D e f f a u l l t t R u l l e P a g e

Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF,

APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router.

298



Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with the filter rules.

Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 60000.

Quality of Service

User Management

Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.

For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the related section later.

Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in

User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users specified here.

Note: When there is no user profile or group profile existed,

Create New User or Create New Group item will appear for you to click to create a new one. an application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by


URL Content Filter

Web Content Filter

DNS Filter

Advance Setting checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings

(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>

URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.

For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box.

It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section

Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings

(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in

CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose

[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the

Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in

CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link in this page to create a new profile.

Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is

strongly recommended to use the default settings here.

Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter.

The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage, please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the dialog box.


Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol

(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout – Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources.



V 1 2 F i i l l t t e r r S e t t u p

Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.

To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit each rule. Check Active to enable the rule.



Filter Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the detailed information, refer to the following page.

Active

Comment

Move Up/Down

Next Filter Set

Enable or disable the filter rule.

Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is

23–character long.

Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.

Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.

To edit Filter Rule, click the Filter Rule index button to enter the Filter Rule setup page.




Check to enable the Filter

Rule

Comments

Check this box to enable the filter rule.

Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14- character long.

Index(1-15)

Clear sessions when schedule ON

Direction

Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.

Check this box to clear the sessions when the above schedule profiles are applied.

Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only. For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.

302

Source/Destination IP

Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other LAN.

Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the source/destination IP or IP ranges.


To set the IP address manually, please choose Any

Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as the Address Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address Type.

Service Type

From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to choose the object that you want.

Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a suitable service type.


To set the service type manually, please choose User

defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the service type from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the

Service Type.

Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.

Source/Destination Port –

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it

303

Fragments

Filter indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.

(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and last values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.

(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.

(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose the one that you want.

Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used for

Data Filter only.

Don’t care No action will be taken towards fragmented packets.

Unfragmented Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.

Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.

Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short to contain a complete header.

Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the rule.

Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.

Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.

Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.

Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be passed through.

Branch to other Filter Set If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will not return to previous filter rule any more.

Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 60000.

MAC Bind IP

Quality of Service

Strict – Make the MAC address and IP address settings configured in IP Object for Source IP and Destination IP are bound for applying such filter rule.

No-Strict - no limitation.

Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.

For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the related section later.

304

User Management Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in


User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users specified here.

APP Enforcement

URL Content Filter

Web Content Filter

DNS Filter

Advance Setting

Note: When there is no user profile or group profile existed,

Create New User or Create New Group item will appear for you to click to create a new one.

Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings

(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>

URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.

For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box.

It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section

Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings

(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in

CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose

[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the

Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in

CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.

Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is

strongly recommended to use the default settings here.


306

Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter.

The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage, please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the dialog box.

Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol

(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.

DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web page. The default setting is Enabled.


Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by firewall settings configured by Vigor router. When the resource is inadequate, the packets will be blocked if Strict Security

Checking is enabled. If Strict Security Checking is not enabled, then the packets will pass through the router.

E x a m p l l e

As stated before, all the traffic will be separated and arbitrated using on of two IP filters: call filter or data filter. You may preset 12 call filters and data filters in Filter Setup and even link them in a serial manner. Each filter set is composed by 7 filter rules, which can be further defined. After that, in General Setup you may specify one set for call filter and one set for data filter to execute first.


V 1 3 D o S D e f f e n s e

As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.

Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page.

308



Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.

Select All Click this button to select all the items listed below.

Enable SYN flood defense Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function.

Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP

SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for this is prevent the TCP SYN packets’ attempt to exhaust the limited-resource of Vigor router.

By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to

2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused for 10 seconds.

Enable UDP flood defense Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function.

Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the

Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets for a period defined in Timeout.

The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be


paused for 10 seconds.

Enable ICMP flood defense Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function.

Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the

Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo requests coming from the Internet.

The default setting for threshold and timeout are 250 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 250 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused for 10 seconds.

Enable PortScan detection Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate, the Vigor router will send out a warning.

By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 2000 packets per second. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event”.

Block IP options

Block Land

Block Smurf

Block trace route

Block SYN fragment

Check the box to activate the Block IP options function.

The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the

LAN because it will carry significant information, such as security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of

Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your private networks.

Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the

Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical source and destination addresses, as well as the port number to victims.

Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The

Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo request.

Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward any trace route packets.

Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function.

The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and more fragment bit set.

Block Fraggle Attack

Block TCP flag scan

Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function.

Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is blocked.

Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block some legal packets. For example, when you activate the fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets from the Internet might be dropped.

Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function.

Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK


310

Block Tear Drop

scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.

Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function.

Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams

(packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length greater than 1024 octets.

Block Ping of Death Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function.

This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers will block any packets realizing this attacking activity.

Block ICMP Fragment Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are dropped.

Block Unassigned Numbers Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than

100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of packets.

Warning Messages We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog

Client.

All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon.

Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.




A 1 H o w t t o C o n f f i i g u r r e C e r r t t a i i n C o m p u t t e r r s A c c e s s i i n g t o I I n t t e r r n e t t

We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get the source from LAN only.

The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under

Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2.

1.

Access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

2.

Open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and choose the Filter Rule 2 button.


3.

Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., block_all).

Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK.

Info In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter Rule

2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules starting from

Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules will be processed according to Rule 2.

4.

Next, set another rule. Just open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and choose the Filter Rule 3 button.

5.

Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., open_ip).

Click the Edit button for Source IP.


314

6.

A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can access into the Internet.


7.

Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.

8.

Both filter rules have been created. Click OK.

Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within

192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.


V 2 C S M ( ( C e n t t r r a l l S e c u r r i i t t y M a n a g e m e n t t ) )

316

CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.

A P P E n f o r r c e m e n t t F i l t e r r

As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to connect with their customers, some industry may take reserved attitude in order to reduce employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.

U R L C o n t e n t t F i i l t e r

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL

Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.

For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.

W e b C o n t e n t t F i l t t e r r

We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or chat rooms.

Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your

Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of requests for categorization.

Info The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.



V 2 1 A P P E n f f o r r c e m e n t t P r r o f f i i l l e

You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP

Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.



Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Profile

Name

Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to set different policy.

Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

There are four tabs IM, P2P, Protocol and Others displayed on this page. Each tab will bring out different items with supported versions that you can choose to disallow people using.


Below shows the items which are categorized under IM.

318



Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Select All

Clear All

Enable

Click it to choose all of the items in this page.

Uncheck all the selected boxes.

Adv

Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor router.

A button under Enable check box allows you to open a pop up window to specify activity for that APP.

The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and

Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.


V 2 2 A P P E S i i g n a t t u r e U p g r r a d e

The APPE Enforcement Profile adopted by Vigor router will be treated as the APPE signature.

DrayTek will periodically upgrade versions for all of the APPs supported by Vigor router.

However, it might be inconvenient for users to upgrade the APP version one by one. This feature is specially designed to offer a quick method to execute APP version upgrade. Users can perform the APPE signature upgrade manually or configure the settings on this page to make Vigor router performing the APPE signature automatically.



Upgrade Setting APPE Module Version – Display current version status of

APPE signature.

New version from the Internet – Download button is available only when Vigor router detects new APPE version.

After clicking it, a dialog will appear with information added to such new version. Click OK to exit the dialog and start the signature upgrade.

Upgrade via interface – Choose one of the WAN interfaces as a channel for APPE signature upgrade.

Setup Download Server

Upgrade Manually

Specify the download server by typing the URL of the server located. Or you can click Find more link to search the one you want.

Signature authentication/download message – Display the status of APPE Signature Upgrade.

Import – Click this button to open the following page. Press

Choose File to locate the signature file which downloaded


320 from MyVigor portal or FTP server previously. Then, click

Upgrade and wait for the system completing the process.

Upgrade Automatically Scheduled Update - Check the box to make Vigor router upgrading the APPE signature based on the schedule configured here.

After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.

V 2 3 U R L C o n t t e n t t F i i l l t t e r r P r o f f i i l l e

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL

Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.

For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.

For example, if you add key words such as “sex”, Vigor router will limit web access to web sites or web pages such as “www.sex.com”, ”www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html”.

Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as “www.sex.com” or “sex.com”.

Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.

Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.





Profile

Clear all profiles.

Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to set different policy.

Name Display the name of the URL Content Filter Profile.

Administration Message You can type the message manually for your necessity.

Default Message - You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.

You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page.




Profile Name

Priority

Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

It determines the action that this router will apply.

Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web

Feature below passing through. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access

Control and Web Feature will be inactive.

Both:Block –The router will block all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web

Feature will be inactive.

Either: URL Access Control First – When all the packages matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for

URL first, then Web feature second.

Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web

Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for web feature first, then URL second.

Log None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.

All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in

Syslog.

322

URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL

Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access

Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the router will execute the action specified in this field and ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.

Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to deny any web surfing activity using IP address, such as http://202.6.3.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates properly on a web page that you visited before.

Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL

Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is


selected.

 Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

 Block Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the keyword set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Exception List – Specify the object profile(s) as the exception list which will be processed in an opposite manner to the action selected above.

Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides several frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline the connection request to the website whose URL string matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed that the more simplified the blocking keyword list is, the more efficiently the Vigor router performs.

Web Feature


Enable Restrict Web Feature - Check this box to make the keyword being blocked or passed.

Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL

Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is selected.

 Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

 Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission from inside to outside world to protect the local user's privacy.

323

324

Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.

Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of web page.

File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.


V 2 4 W e b C o n t t e n t t F i i l l t t e r r P r r o f f i i l l e

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (

MyVigor

) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.

However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is necessary for you to access into the server (

MyVigor

) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.

Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account.

WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider (e.g., DrayTek).

No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with Vigor router currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.

Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable one.

Info 1

Info 2

Web Content Filter (WCF) is not a built-in service of Vigor router but a service powered by Commtouch. If you want to use such service (trial or formal edition), you have to perform the procedure of activation first. For the service of formal edition, please contact with your dealer/distributor for detailed information.

Commtouch is merged by Cyren, and GlobalView services will be continued to deliver powerful cloud-based information security solutions! Refer to: http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239

025151.html




Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.

Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize searching when you type URL in browser based on the web content filter profile.

Setup Test Server

Find more

It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected.

Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable server.

Click this link to retrieve the factory settings. Set to Factory Default

Default Message You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.

Cache None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL matching.

L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it will be stored in the router to be accessed quickly if required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with faster rate.

L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the

IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will


check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL matching with the fastest rate.

L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.

Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under

Profile to open the following web page. The items listed in Categories will be changed according to the different service providers. If you have and activate another web content filter license, the items will be changed simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web content filter will be deleted automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you change the web content filter license.



Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Log None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.

All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in

Syslog.

326

Black/White List Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile.

Group/Object Selections – Click Edit to choose the group or


object profile as the content of white/black list.

Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below.

Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below. the categories listed on the box below.

Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the categories listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.



V 2 5 D N S F i i l l t t e r r P r r o f f i i l l e

The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's.

DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN. However, if the external DNS server is used,

DNS Filter Profile will be applied to DNS query coming from clients on LAN.

Info For DNS filter must use the WCF service profile to filter the packets, therefore WCF license must be activated first. Otherwise, DNS filter does not have any effect on packets.

328



DNS Filter Profile Table It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with specified WCF and UCF).

Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your requirement.

DNS Filter Local Setting DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used.

DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.

Syslog - The filtering result can be recorded according to the setting selected for Syslog.


Administration Message

 None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

 Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

 Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in

Syslog.

 All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in

Syslog.

WCF- Set the filtering conditions.

UCF - Set the filtering conditions.

Enable Block Page - If such function is enabled, when DNS packets are blocked by DNS filter, a web page containing the description listed on Administration Message will be shown on the screen.

Type the words or sentences which will be displayed when a web page is blocked by Vigor router.




A 1 H o w t t o C r e a t t e a n A c c o u n t t f f o r M y V i i g o r r

The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering the web pages for the sake of protecting your system.

To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.

C r e a t t e a n A c c o u n t t v i i a V i i g o r R o u t e r

1.

Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.

330

Or

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.


2.

Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.

3.

Click the link of Create an account now.

4.

Check to confirm that you accept the Agreement and click Accept.


332

5.

Type your personal information in this page and then click Continue.

6.

Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.


7.

Now you have created an account successfully. Click START.

8.

Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation

Letter from myvigor.draytek.com.

9.

Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.


334

10.

When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password.

11.

Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.

C r e a t t e a n A c c o u n t t v i i a M y V i i g o r r W e b S i i t e

1.

Access into http://myvigor.draytek.com. Find the line of Not registered yet?. Then, click the link Click here! to access into next page.


2.

Check to confirm that you accept the Agreement and click Accept.

3.

Type your personal information in this page and then click Continue.

4.

Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.

5.

Now you have created an account successfully. Click START.


336

6.

Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation

Letter from myvigor.draytek.com.

7.

Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.


8.

When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password. Then type the code in the box of Auth

Code according to the value displayed on the right side of it.

Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.


338

A 2 H o w t t o B l o c k F a c e b o o k S e r r v i i c e A c c e s s e d b y t t h e U s e r r s v i i a W e b C o n t t e n t

F i i l l t t e r r / / U R L C o n t t e n t F i i l l t e r r

There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter.

Web Content Filter,

Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block.

Note: License is required.

URL Content Filter,

Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage.

Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.)

I I .

.

V i i a W e b C o n t t e n t t F i i l l t t e r r

1.

Make sure the Web Content Filter (powered by Commtouch) license is valid.


2.

Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social

Networking with Action, Block.

3.

Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.

4.

Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be blocked and the following message would be displayed instead.

II. Via URL Content Filter

A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook”


1.

Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page.

2.

In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.

3.

Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page.

4.

Configure the settings as the following figure.

340

5.

When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.


6.

Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word

“facebook” inside.

B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook

1.

Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page.

2.

In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.


3.

Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page.

4.

Configure the settings as the following figure.

5.

When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup.

6.

Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word

“facebook” inside.


P a r r t t V I I M a n a g e m e n t t

There are several items offered for the Vigor router system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator

Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,

Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and

Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation.

It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth

Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).

It is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic

(except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and password.


V I I 1 S y s t t e m M a i i n t t e n a n c e

For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration:

System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,

Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System,

Firmware Upgrade, Activation and Internal Service User List.

Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.



V I I 1 1 S y s t t e m S t t a t t u s

The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware related information from this presentation.



Model Name

Firmware Version

Build Date/Time

Display the model name of the router.

Display the firmware version of the router.

Display the date and time of the current firmware build.

- Display the MAC address of the LAN Interface.

IP Address

- Display the IP address of the LAN interface.

Subnet Mask

- Display the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.

DHCP Server

- Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN interface

DNS

- Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.


- Display current connection status.

MAC Address

- Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface.

Connection

- Display the connection type.

IP Address

- Display the IP address of the WAN interface.

Default Gateway

- Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway.

Scope - Display the scope of IPv6 address. For example, IPv6

Link Local could only be used for direct IPv6 link. It can't be used for IPv6 internet.

Internet Access Mode – Display the connection mode chosen for accessing into Internet.


V I I 1 2 T R 0 6 9

This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a

TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server

,

e.g., VigorACS.



ACS Server On Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.

ACS Server

CPE Client

URL/Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link. Please refer to Auto Configuration Server user’s manual for detailed information.

Test With Inform – Click it to send a message based on the event code selection to test if such CPE is able to communicate with VigorACS SI server.

Event Code – Use the drop down menu to specify an event to perform the test.

Last Inform Response Time – Display the time that VigorACS server made a response while receiving Inform message from

CPE last time.

Such information is useful for Auto Configuration Server.

Enable/Disable – Allow/Deny the CPE Client to connect with


348

Periodic Inform Settings

STUN Settings

Apply Settings to APs

Auto Configuration Server.

Port – Sometimes, port conflict might be occurred. To solve such problem, you might change port number for CPE.

Username and Password – Type the username and password that VigorACS can use to access into such CPE.

The default setting is Enable. Please set interval time or schedule time for the router to send notification to CPE. Or click Disable to close the mechanism of notification.

The default is Disable. If you click Enable, please type the relational settings listed below:

Server IP – Type the IP address of the STUN server.

Server Port – Type the port number of the STUN server.

Minimum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the minimum period. The default setting is “60 seconds”.

Maximum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the maximum period. A value of “-1” indicates that no maximum period is specified.

This feature is able to apply TR-069 settings (including STUN and ACS server settings) to all of APs managed by Vigor2925 at the same time.

Disable – Related settings will not be applied to VigorAP.

Enable – Above settings will be applied to VigorAP after clicking OK to save the configuration. If such feature is enabled, you have to type the password for accessing

VigorAP.

 AP Password – Type the password of the VigorAP that you want to apply Vigor2925’s TR-069 settings.



V I I 1 3 A d m i i n i i s t t r r a t t o r r P a s s w o r d

This page allows you to set new password.



Administrator Password Old Password - Type in the old password. The factory default setting for password is “admin”.

New Password -Type in new password in this field. The length of the password is limited to 23 characters.

Confirm Password -Type in the new password again.

Administrator Local User The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements.

This feature allows other user in LAN who can access into the web user interface with the same privilege of the administrator.

Local User – Check the box to enable the local user configuration.

Local User List – It displays the username of the local user.

User Name – Give a user name for the local user.


Administrator LDAP

Setting

Password – Type the password for the local user.

Confirm Password – Type the password again for confirmation.

Add – After typing the user name and password above, simply click it to create a new local user. The new one will be shown on the Local User List immediately.

Edit – If the username listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and modify it on the field of User Name. Later, click Edit to update the information.

Delete – If the local user listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and click Delete to remove it.

Enable Admin Login From Wan – The default setting is enabled. It can ensure that any user is able to successfully accesses into web user interface of Vigor router through

Internet by username/password of “admin/admin”.

Enable LDAP/AD login for Admin users – If it is enabled, any user can access into the web user interface of Vigor router through the LDAP server authentication.

Enable Admin Login From Wan – The default setting is enabled. It can ensure that any user is able to successfully accesses into web user interface of Vigor router through

Internet by username/password of “admin/admin”.

LDAP Server Profiles – Available profiles will be displayed here under the link of LDAP Profile Setup.

LDAP Profile Setup – It allows you to create a new LDAP profile.

When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web user interface again.


V I I 1 4 U s e r r P a s s w o r r d

This page allows you to set new password for user operation.



Enable User Mode for simple web configuration

After checking this box, you can access into the web user interface with the password typed here for simple web configuration.

The settings on simple web user interface will be different with full web user interface accessed by using the administrator password.

Password



Type in new password in this field. The length of the password is limited to 31 characters.

Type in the new password again.

Click to return to the factory default setting.

When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web user interface again.

Below shows an example for accessing into User Operation with User Password.

1.

Open System Maintenance>>User Password.

2.

Check the box of Enable User Mode for simple web configuration to enable user mode operation. Type a new password in the field of New Password and click OK.


352

3.

The following screen will appear. Simply click OK.

4.

Log out Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button.

5.

The following window will be open to ask for username and password. Type the new user password in the filed of Password and click Login.


6.

The main screen with User Mode will be shown as follows.

Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic configuration settings will be available in User Mode.

Info Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.


V I I 1 5 L o g i i n P a g e G r r e e t t i i n g

When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement.

354



Enable Check this box to enable the login customization function.

Login Page Title

Welcome Message and

Bulletin

Type a brief description (e.g., Welcome to DrayTek) which will be shown on the heading of the login dialog.

Type words or sentences here. It will be displayed for bulletin message. In addition, it can be displayed on the login dialog at the bottom.

Note that do not type URL redirect link here.

Preview


Click it to display the preview of the login window based on the settings on this web page.

Click to return to the factory default setting.

Below shows an example of login customization with the information typed in Login

Description and Bulletin.



V I I 1 6 C o n f f i i g u r r a t t i i o n B a c k u p

Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by Vigor2820/ Vigor2830/

Vigor2850 to Vigor3220.

B a c k u p t t h e C o n f f i i g u r r a t t i i o n

Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.

1.

Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be popped-up, as shown below.



Backup

Click Restore to restore the configuration.

Click it to perform the configuration backup of this router.

2.

Click Backup button to get into the following dialog. Click Save button to open another dialog for saving configuration as a file.

356

3.

In Save As dialog, the default filename is config.cfg. You could give it another name by yourself.


4.

Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named config.cfg.

The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available.

Info Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration

Backup does not include information of Certificate.

R e s t t o r r e C o n f f i i g u r r a t i i o n

1.

Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be popped-up, as shown below.

2.

Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router.

3.

Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that the restoration procedure is successful.


V I I 1 7 S y s l l o g / / M a i i l l A l l e r r t t

SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router.

358



SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog.

Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog server.

Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB storage disk.

Router Name

AlertLog Setup

Display the name for such router configured in System

Maintenance>>Management.

If there is no name here, simply lick the link to access into

System Maintenance>>Management to set the router name.

Server IP Address -The IP address of the Syslog server.

Destination Port - Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.

Mail Syslog – Check the box to recode the mail event on

Syslog.

Enable syslog message - Check the box listed on this web page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN,

User Access, Call, WAN, Router/DSL information to Syslog.

Check Enable to activate function of alert log.

AlertLog Port - Type the port number for alert log. The


Mail Alert Setup default setting is 514.

Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.

Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail address is available or not.

SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the

SMTP server.

Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out.

Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from outside.

Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.

Authentication - Check this box to activate this function while using e-mail application.

User Name - Type the user name for authentication.

Password - Type the password for authentication.

Enable E-mail Alert - Check the box to send alert message to the e-mail box while the router detecting the item(s) you specify here.

Click OK to save these settings.

For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:

1.

Just set your monitor PC’s IP address in the field of Server IP Address

2.

Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the

Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.


3.

From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in

Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router.

Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.


V I I 1 8 T i i m e a n d D a t t e

It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from.



Current System Time Click Inquire Time to get the current time.

Use Browser Time

Use Internet Time

Select this option to use the browser time from the remote administrator PC host as router’s system time.

Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the

Internet using assigned protocol.

Time Server

Priority

Time Zone

Enable Daylight Saving

Type the web site of the time server.

Choose Auto or IPv6 First as the priority.

Select the time zone where the router is located.

Check the box to enable the daylight saving. Such feature is available for certain area.

Advanced – Click it to open a pop up dialog.

Automatically Update

Interval


Use the default time setting or set user defined time for your requirement.

Select a time interval for updating from the NTP server.


V I I 1 9 S N M P

This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services.

The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES) and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs.

362



Enable SNMP Agent Check it to enable this function.

Get Community

Set Community

Manager Host IP (IPv4)

Set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. The default setting is public.

The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting is private.


Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.

Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.


Manager Host IP (IPv6) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.


Trap Community Set trap community by typing a proper name. The default setting is public.


Notification Host IP (IPv4) Set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

Notification Host IP (IPv6) Set the IPv6 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

Trap Timeout

Enable SNMPV3 Agent

USM User

Auth Algorithm

The default setting is 10 seconds.

Check it to enable this function.

USM means user-based security mode.

Type a username which will be used for authentication. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Choose one of the encryption methods listed below as the authentication algorithm.

Auth Password

Privacy Algorithm

Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Choose one of the methods listed below as the privacy algorithm.

Privacy Password Type a password for privacy. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.



V I I 1 1 0 M a n a g e m e n t t

This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from

Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device

Management.

The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different.

V I I 1 1 0 1 I I P v 4 M a n a g e m e n t t S e t t u p

364



Router Name Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Default: Disable

Auto-Logout

If it is enabled, the function of auto-logout for web user interface will be disabled.


The web user interface will be open until you click the

Logout icon manually.

Internet Access Control

Access List from the

Internet

Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.

There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify.

Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to reject all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is enabled by default.

You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

List index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP with Subnet Mask will appear automatically.

Management Port Setup User Define Ports - Check to specify user-defined port numbers for the Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TR-069 and SSH servers.

Default Ports - Check to use standard port numbers for the

Telnet and HTTP servers.

TLS/SSL Encryption Setup Enable SSL 3.0 – Check the box to enable the function of SSL

3.0 if required.

Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL

VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client, you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can connect, however, it's not recommended.

CVM Access Control

Device Management

CVM Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.

CVM SSL Port – Check the box to enable such port setting.

Check the box to enable the device management function for

Vigor3220.

Respond to external device – If it is enabled, Vigor3220 will be regarded as slave device. When the external device

(master device) sends request packet to Vigor3220,

Vigor3220 would send back information to respond the request coming from the external device which is able to manage Vigor3220.



V I I 1 1 0 2 I I P v 6 M a n a g e m e n t t S e t t u p

366



Management Access

Control

Access List

Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet.

There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify.

Enable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to enable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is disabled by default.

You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

Index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.



V I I 1 1 0 3 L A N A c c e s s C o n t t r r o l l



Allow management from

LAN

Apply To Subnet

Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from LAN interface. There are several servers provided by the system which allow you to manage the router from LAN interface. Check the box(es) to specify.

Check the LAN interface for the administrator to use for accessing into web user interface of Vigor router.

Index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.



368

V I I 1 1 1 R e b o o t S y s t t e m

The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System

Maintenance to open the following page.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current

configuration and click Reboot Now. To reset the router settings to default values, check

Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. The router will take 5 seconds to reboot the system.

Info When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web settings, please click Reboot Now to reboot your router for ensuring normal operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.


V I I 1 1 2 F i i r r m w a r r e U p g r r a d e

Download the newest firmware from DrayTek's web site or FTP site. The DrayTek web site is www.DrayTek.com (or local DrayTek's web site) and FTP site is ftp.DrayTek.com.

Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to launch the Firmware Upgrade Utility.

Choose the right firmware by clicking Select. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router automatically.

Click OK. The following screen will appear. Please execute the firmware upgrade utility first.

For the detailed information about firmware update, please go to Chapter 5.


V I I 1 1 3 A c t t i v a t t i i o n

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing http://myvigor.draytek.com.

370



Activate via Interface

Activate

Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating Web

Content Filter.

The Activate link brings you accessing into www.vigorpro.com to finish the activation of the account and the router.

Authentication Message As for authentication information of web filter, the process of authenticating will be displayed on this field for your reference.

Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter:


V I I 1 1 4 I I n t t e r r n a l l S e r r v i i c e U s e r r L i i s t t

User profiles (clients) defined and enabled in User Management>>User Profile will be displayed in this page.

Such page allows you to turn on or turn off security authentication service (offered by inernal

RADIUS and/or Local 802.1X) for each user profile without accessing into the User

Management configuration page.



User Name Display the name of the existed user profile. To modify the detailed settings, simply click the user name link to access into the web page for modification.

Radius

Local 802.1X

Check the box to turn on the security authentication service offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.

Uncheck the box to turn off ecurity authentication service offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.

If you check the box next to such item, all of the user profiles listed in this page will be enabled with RADIUS service enabled vice versa.

Check the box to turn on the security authentication service offered by Local 802.1X server for the user profile.

Uncheck the box to turn off ecurity authentication service offered by Local 802.1X server for the user profile.

If you check the box next to such item, all of the user profiles listed in this page will be enabled with Local 802.1X service enabled; vice versa.

Info For the detailed setting (such as IP address, port number) configuration of internal RADIUS, refer to Applications>>RADIUS/TACACS+.

For the detailed setting (such as IP address, port number) configuration of

Local 802.1X, refer to LAN>>Wired 802.1X and Wireless LAN>>Security.


V I I 2 B a n d w i i d t t h M a n a g e m e n t t

S e s s i i o n s L i i m i i t t

A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications

(e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.

B a n d w i i d t t h L i i m i i t t

The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.

Q u a l l i i t t y o f f S e r r v i i c e ( ( Q o S ) )

Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed one important aspect of modern enterprise network.

One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay or jitter (delay variation).

Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can be throttled back to a lower speed. If there’s no defined priority to specify which packets should be discarded (or in another term “dropped”) from an overflowing queue, packets of sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect application performance?

There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:

 Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.

 Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and associated service types

The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for

HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.

One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated

Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP

Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes,

DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best

Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of drop precedence in each class.


Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing, classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the whole QoS-enabled network.

However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It’s not easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole network with merely Vigor router’s effort.



Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.

V I I 2 1 S e s s i i o n s L i i m i i t t

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.

374

To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit.



Session Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit session.


Limitation List

Specific Limitation

Administration Message

Time Schedule

Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit session.

Default session limit - Defines the default session number used for each computer in LAN.

Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.

Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session.

End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session.

Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do not set the session number in this field, the system will use the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for each index.

Add - Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.

Edit - Allows you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.

Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.

Type the words which will be displayed when reaches the maximum number of Internet sessions permitted.

Default Message - Click this button to apply the default message offered by the router.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.



V I I 2 2 B a n d w i i d t t h L i i m i i t t

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.

376

To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream and downstream limit.



Bandwidth Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth.

 IP Routed Subnet – Check this box to apply the bandwidth limit to the second subnet specified in

LAN>>General Setup.

Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit bandwidth.

Default TX limit - Define the default speed of the upstream for each computer in LAN.

Default RX limit - Define the default speed of the downstream for each computer in LAN.

Allow auto adjustment … - Check this box to make the best utilization of available bandwidth.

Limitation List

Specific Limitation

Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.

Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit bandwidth.


Smart Bandwidth Limit

Time Schedule

End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.

Each /Shared - Select Each to make each IP within the range of Start IP and End IP having the same speed defined in TX limit and RX limit fields; select Shared to make all the IPs within the range of Start IP and End IP share the speed defined in TX limit and RX limit fields.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

Add - Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.

Edit - Allow you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.

Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.

Check this box to have the bandwidth limit determined by the system automatically.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.



V I I 2 3 Q u a l l i t t y o f f S e r r v i i c e

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.

378



General Setup Index – Display the WAN interface number that you can edit.

Status – Display if the WAN interface is available for such function or not.

Bandwidth – Display the inbound and outbound bandwidth setting for the WAN interface.

Direction – Display which direction that such function will influence.

Class 1/Class2/Class 3/Others – Display the bandwidth percentage for each class.

UDP Bandwidth Control – Display the UDP bandwidth control is enabled or not.

Online Statistics – Display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference

Setup – Allow to configure general QoS setting for WAN interface.

Class Rule Index – Display the class number that you can edit.

Name – Display the name of the class.

Rule – Allow to configure detailed settings for the selected

Class.

Service Type – Allow to configure detailed settings for the service type.

Enable the First Priority When this feature is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be


Item Description for VoIP SIP/RTP sent with highest priority.

SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP.

This page displays the QoS settings result of the WAN interface. Click the Setup link to access into next page for the general setup of WAN interface. As to class rule, simply click the Edit link to access into next for configuration.

You can configure general setup for the WAN interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the

Service Type for the Class Rule for your request.

O n l l i i n e S t a t t i i s t t i i c s

Display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference. This feature is available only when the Quality of Service for WAN interface is enabled.


G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p f f o r W A N I I n t t e r r f f a c e

When you click Setup, you can configure the bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN interface.

There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. Yet, the last one is reserved for the packets which are not suitable for the user-defined class rules.

380



Enable the QoS Control The factory default for this setting is checked.

Please also define which traffic the QoS Control settings will apply to.

IN- apply to incoming traffic only.

OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.

BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Check this box and click OK, then click Setup link again. You will see the Online Statistics link appearing on this page.

WAN Inbound Bandwidth It allows you to set the connecting rate of data input for other WAN. For example, if your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default value is 10000kbps.

WAN Outbound Bandwidth It allows you to set the connecting rate of data output for other WAN. For example, if your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K upstream, please set 256kbps for this box. The default value is 10000kbps.

Reserved Bandwidth Ratio It is reserved for the group index in the form of ratio of

reserved bandwidth to upstream speed and reserved

bandwidth to downstream speed.

Enable UDP Bandwidth

Control

Check this and set the limited bandwidth ratio on the right field. This is a protection of TCP application traffic since UDP application traffic such as streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.

Outbound TCP ACK The difference in bandwidth between download and upload


Prioritize are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network traffic.

Limited_bandwidth Ratio The ratio typed here is reserved for limited bandwidth of

UDP application.

Info The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by

ISP to maximize the QoS performance.

E d i i t t t t h e C l a s s R u l l e f f o r Q o S

1.

The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. To add, edit or delete the class rule, please click the Edit link of that one.

2.

After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. Now you can define the name for that Class. In this case, “Test” is used as the name of Class Index #1.


3.

For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.



ACT Check this box to invoke these settings.

Hardware

Acceleration

Ethernet Type

Check this box to enable the hardware acceleration when such rule is applied.

Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for this rule.

Local Address

Remote Address

Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for the rule.

Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on

LAN/WAN) for the rule.

382

DiffServ CodePoint

Service Type

Address Type – Determine the address type for the source address.

For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.

For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and

End IP address.

For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and

Subnet Mask.

All the packets of data will be divided with different levels and will be processed according to the level type by the system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for processing with QoS control.

It determines the service type of the data for processing with

QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the predefined service type from the Service Type drop down list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the one that you want for using by current QoS.

4.



By the way, you can set up to 20 rules for one Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please select the radio button of that one and click Edit to open the rule edit page for modification.

E d i i t t t t h e S e r r v i i c e T y p e f f o r r C l l a s s R u l l e

1.

To add a new service type, edit or delete an existed service type, please click the Edit link under Service Type field.

2.

After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page.


3.

For adding a new service type, click Add to open the following page.

384



Service Name

Service Type

Type in a new service for your request. The maximum length of the name you can set is 11 characters.

Choose the type (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP or other) for the new service.

Port Configuration Type - Click Single or Range as the Type. If you select

Range, you have to type in the starting port number and the end porting number on the boxes below.

Port Number – Type in the starting port number and the end porting number here if you choose Range as the type.

5.


By the way, you can set up to 10 service types. If you want to edit/delete an existed service type, please select the radio button of that one and click Edit/Edit for modification.

R e t a g t h e P a c k e t s f f o r r I I d e n t i i f f i i c a t t i i o n

Packets coming from LAN IP can be retagged through QoS setting. When the packets sent out through WAN interface, all of them will be tagged with certain header and that will be easily to be identified by server on ISP.

For example, in the following illustration, the VoIP packets in LAN go into Vigor router without any header. However, when they go forward to the Server on ISP through Vigor router, all of the packets are tagged with AF (configured in Bandwidth >>QoS>>Class) automatically.


V I I 2 4 A P P Q o S

The QoS function is used to do bandwidth management for the services with certain IP or port number. However, there is no effect of bandwidth management on the service such as VNC or

PPTV without fixed IP or port number.

APP QoS employs the function of APP Enforcement to detect the types of software in application layer. By combining the function of QoS (adjustment on Inbound/Outbond bandwidth and bandwidth ratio), Vigor router can perform the bandwidth management for the protocols, streaming, remote control, web HD and so on.

Click Bandwidth Management>>APP QoS to open the following page.



Enable/Disable Click Enable to activate APP QoS function.

Click Disable to deactivate APP QoS function.

Traceable

Untraceable

The protocol listed below is traceable by Vigor router.

Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request.

The protocol listed below is not easy to be traced by Vigor router.

Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your


Select All

Clear All

Apply to all request.

Click it to select all of the protocols.

Click it to de-select all of the protocols.

Choose one of the actions from the drop down list. It is prepared for applying to all protocols.

Action

Apply – Click it to make the selected action be applied all of the selected protocols immediately.

There are many protocols which can be specified with different QoS Class.




A 1 H o w t t o O p t t i i m i i z e t h e B a n d w i i d t t h t t h r o u g h Q o S T e c h n o l l o g y

Have you ever gotten any problems in uploading/downloading files (Voice, video or email/data only) with the narrow/districted bandwidth you may share from the common

Internet connection line? The advanced bandwidth management technology-QoS (Quality of

Service) helps you to well allocate the bandwidth upon your demand of Voice, Video, or Data transferring. Let's see how to get the optimum bandwidth per your request by using DrayTek

Vigor router as below.

Scenario: The Internet connection you got from ISP line is 2MB/512Kb. There are VoIP telephony network, IPTV set top box and data server at your home. Assume you want to allocate 30% of the bandwidth you got to VoIP demand, 50% for IPTV, 15% for mail/data, 5% for others. Let's see how easily it is to do the setting as below:

1.

Open Bandwidth Management>> Quality of Service.

2.

You will get the following page. Click the Edit link for Class 1.

3.

In the following page, type a name (e.g., VoIP) for such class and click Add.


388

4.

Check the box of ACT. Click Edit to specify the local address.

5.

In the pop-up window, choose Range Address as the Address Type and type the start IP address and end IP address in relational fields. Click OK to save the settings and exit the window.

6.

Click OK again to save the settings.


7.

The class rule for VoIP has been set. Click OK to return to previous page.

8.

Do the same steps to add class rules for IPTV and Data/Email with IP addresses as shown below.

and


390

9.

Assuming you get 2MB/512Kb Internet line. You can click the Setup link of WAN1 to set up the bandwidth for different groups among VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email.

10.

In the Setup page, check the box of Enable the QoS Control. Type 30, 50 and 15 in the boxes for VoIP, IPTV and Data/Email respectively. Check the box of Enable UDP

Bandwidth Control.


11.

Click OK to save the settings. The class rules for WAN1 are defined as shown below.


A 2 Q o S S e t t t i i n g E x a m p l l e

Assume a teleworker sometimes works at home and takes care of children. When working time, he would use Vigor router at home to connect to the server in the headquarter office downtown via either HTTPS or V PN to check email and access internal database. Meanwhile, children may chat on Skype in the restroom.

1.

Go to Bandwidth Management>>Quality of Service.

392

2.

Click Setup link of WAN(1/2/3/4/5). Make sure the QoS Control on the left corner is checked. And select BOTH in Direction.

3.

Set Inbound/Outbound bandwidth.

Info The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by ISP to maximize the QoS performance.


4.

Return to previous page. Enter the Name of Index Class #1 by clicking Edit link. Type the name “E-mail” for Class 1. Click OK to save the settings.

5.

Click the Setup link for WAN2. The user can set reserved bandwidth (e.g., 25%) for

E-mail using protocol POP3 and SMTP. Click OK to save the settings.

6.

Return to previous page. Enter the Name of Index Class #2 by clicking Edit link. In this index, the user will set reserved bandwidth for HTTPS. And click OK.


7.

Click Setup link for WAN2.

8.

Check Enable UDP Bandwidth Control on the bottom to prevent enormous UDP traffic influence other application. Click OK.

394

9.

If the worker has connected to the headquarter using host to host VPN tunnel. (Please refer to Chapter 3 VPN for detail instruction), he may set up an index for it. Enter the

Class Name of Index 3. In this index, he will set reserved bandwidth for 1 VPN tunnel.


10.

Click Edit for Class 3 to open a new window. In this index, the user will set reserved bandwidth for VPN.

11.

Click Add to open the following window. Check the ACT box, first.

12.

Then click Edit of Local Address to set a worker’s subnet address. Click Edit of Remote

Address to set headquarter’s IP address. Leave other fields and click OK.


V I I 3 U s s e r r M a n a g e m e n t t

User Management is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic (except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and password. Instead of managing with IP address/MAC address, User Management function manages hosts with user account. Network administrator can give different firewall policies or rules for different hosts with different User Management accounts. This is more flexible and convenient for network management. Not only offering the basic checking for Internet access, User Management also provides additional firewall rules, e.g. CSM checking for protecting hosts.

396

Info Filter rules configured under Firewall usually are applied to the host (the one that the router installed) only. With user management, the rules can be applied to every user connected to the router with customized profiles.



V I I 3 1 G e n e r r a l l S e t t u p

General Setup can determine the standard (rule-based or user-based) for the users controlled by User Management. The mode (standard) selected here will influence the contents of the filter rule(s) applied to every user.



Mode There are two modes offered here for you to choose. Each mode will bring different filtering effect to the users involved.

User-Based - If you choose such mode, the router will apply the filter rules configured in User Management>>User

Profile to the users.

Rule-Based –If you choose such mode, the router will apply


the filter rules configured in Firewall>>General Setup and

Filter Rule to the users.

Landing Page authentication.

Login Page Logo – A logo which can be used as an identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352 pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of advertisement.

Login Page Greeting - Such link allows you to access into the setting page for login greeting. For detailed information, refer to System Maintenance>>Login Page Greeting.

Display IP Address on tracking window – Check the box to display the IP address of the client on the tracking window.

Type the information to be displayed on the first web page when the LAN user accessing into Internet via such router.



V I I 3 2 U s e r r P r r o f f i i l e

This page allows you to set customized profiles (up to 200) which will be applied for users controlled under User Management. Simply open User Management>>User Profile.

To set the user profile, please click any index number link to open the following page. Notice that profile 1 (admin) and profile 2 (Dial-In User) are factory default settings. Profile 2 is reserved for future use.


400



Common Settings Enable this account - Check this box to enable such user profile.

Username - Type a name for such user profile (e.g.,

LAN_User_Group_1, WLAN_User_Group_A,

WLAN_User_Group_B, etc). When a user tries to access

Internet through this router, an authentication step must be performed first. The user has to type the User Name specified here to pass the authentication. When the user passes the authentication, he/she can access Internet via this router. However the accessing operation will be restricted with the conditions configured in this user profile.


Password - Type a password for such profile (e.g., lug123,

wug123,wug456, etc). When a user tries to access Internet through this router, an authentication step must be performed first. The user has to type the password specified here to pass the authentication. When the user passes the


Web login Setting authentication, he/she can access Internet via this router with the limitation configured in this user profile.


Confirm Password - Type the password again for confirmation.

Idle Timeout - If the user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the network connection will be stopped for such

user. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes.

Max User Login - Such profile can be used by many users.

You can set the limitation for the number of users accessing

Internet with the conditions of such profile. The default setting is 0 which means no limitation in the number of users.

Policy - It is available only when User-Based mode selected in User Management>>General Setup.

 Default – If you choose such item, the filter rules pre-configured in Firewall can be adopted for such user profile.

 Create New Policy – If you choose such item, the following page will be popped up for you to define another filter rule as a new policy.


For the detailed configuration, simply refer to

Firewall>>Filter Rule. The firewall filter rules that are not selected in Firewall>>General>>Default rule can be available for use in User Management>>User Profile.

External Service Authentication - router will authenticate the dial-in user by itself or by external service such as LDAP server or Radius server or TACACS+ server. If LDAP, Radius or

TACACS+ is selected here, it is not necessary to configure the password setting above.

Log - Time of login/log out, block/unblock for the user(s) can be sent to and displayed in Syslog. Please choose any one of the log items to take down relational records for the user(s).

Pop Browser Tracking Window - If such function is enabled, a pop up window will be displayed on the screen with time remaining for connection if Idle Timeout is set. However, the system will update the time periodically to keep the connection always on. Thus, Idle Timeout will not interrupt

401

402 the network connection.

Authentication - Any user (from LAN side or WLAN side) tries to connect to Internet via Vigor router must be authenticated by the router first. There are three ways offered by the router for the user to choose for authentication.

 Web – If it is selected, the user can type the URL of the router from any browser. Then, a login window will be popped up and ask the user to type the user name and password for authentication. If succeed, a Welcome

Message (configured in User Management >> General

Setup) will be displayed. After authentication, the destination URL (if requested by the user) will be guided automatically by the router.

 Alert Tool – If it is selected, the user can open Alert

Tool and type the user name and password for authentication. A window with remaining time of connection for such user will be displayed. Next, the user can access Internet through any browser on

Windows. Note that Alert Tool can be downloaded from

DrayTek web site.

 Telnet – If it is selected, the user can use Telnet command to perform the authentication job.

Landing Page - When a user tries to access into the web user interface of Vigor router series with the user name and password specified in this profile, he/she will be lead into the web page configured in Landing Page field in User

Management>>General Setup.

Check this box to enable such function.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

Enable Time Quota - Time quota means the total connection time allowed by the router for the user with such profile.

Check the box to enable the function of time quota. The first box displays the remaining time of the network connection.

The second box allows to type the number of time (unit is minute) which is available for the user (using such profile) to access Internet.

– Click this box to set and increase the time quota for such profile.

– Click this box to decrease the time quota for such profile.

Info A dialog will be popped up to notify how many time remained when a user accesses into Internet through Vigor router successfully.


Internal Services

When the time is up, all the connection jobs including network, IM, social media, facebook, and etc. will be terminated.

Enable Data Quota - Data Quota means the total amount for data transmission allowed for the user. The unit is MB/GB.

– Click this box to set and increase the data quota for such profile.

– Click this box to decrease the data quota for such profile.

Reset quota to default when scheduling time expired - Set default time quota and data quota for such profile. When the scheduling time is up, the router will use the default quota settings automatically.

 Enable – Check it to use the default setting for time quota and data quota.

 Default Time Quota – Type the value for the time manually.

 Default Data Quota – Type the value for the data manually.

RADIUS / Local 802.1X - Check the box to enable security authenticated via RADIUS / 802.1X server.



V I I 3 3 U s e r r G r r o u p

This page allows you to bind several user profiles into one group. These groups will be used in

Firewall>>General Setup as part of filter rules.

Please click any index number link to open the following page.

404



Name Type a name for this user group.

Available User Objects You can gather user profiles (objects) from User Profile page within one user group. All the available user objects that you have created will be shown in this box. Notice that user object, Admin and Dial-In User are factory settings. User defined profiles will be numbered with 3, 4, 5 and so on.


Selected Keyword Objects

Click box.

button to add the selected user objects in this


V I I 3 4 U s e r r O n l l i i n e S t t a t u s

This page displays the user(s) connected to the router and refreshes the connection status in an interval of several seconds.



Refresh Seconds

Refresh

Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically.

Click this link to refresh this page manually.

Index

User

Display the number of the data flow.

Display the users which connect to Vigor router currently.

You can click the link under the username to open the user profile setting page for that user.

IP Address

Profile

Last Login Time

Expired Time

Data Quota

Idle Time

Display the IP address of the device.

Display the authority of the account.

Display the login time that such user connects to the router last time.

Display the expired time of the network connection for the user.

Display the quota for data transmission.

Display the idle timeout setting for such profile.


Action Block - can avoid specified user accessing into Internet.

Unblock – allow the user to access into Internet.

Logout – the user will be logged out forcefully.



A 1 H o w t t o a u t t h e n t t i i c a t t e c l l i i e n t t s v i i a U s e r M a n a g e m e n t

Before using the function of User Management, please make sure User-Based has been selected as the Mode in the User Management>>General Setup page.

With User Management authentication function, before a valid username and password have been correctly supplied, a particular client will not be allowed to access Internet through the router. There are three ways for authentication: Web, Telnet and Alert Tool.

A u t h e n t t i i c a t t i i o n v i i a W e b

 If a LAN client who hasn’t passed the authentication opens an external web site in his browser, he will be redirected to the router’s Web authentication interface first. Then, the client is trying to access http://www.draytek.com and but brought to the Vigor router. Since this is an SSL connection, some web browsers will display warning messages.


408

 With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you may get the following warning message.

Please press Continue to this website (not recommended).

 With Mozilla Firefox, you may get the following warning message. Select I

Understand the Risks.


 With Chrome browser, you may get the following warning. Click Proceed

anyway.


After that, the web authentication window will appear. Input the user name and the password for your account (defined in User Management) and click Login.

If the authentication is successful, the client will be redirected to the original web site that he tried to access. In this example, it is http://www.draytek.com . Furthermore, you will get a popped up window as the following. Then you can access the Internet.

410

Note, if you block the web browser to pop up any window, you will not see such window.


If the authentication is failed, you will get the error message, The username or password

you entered is incorrect. Please login again.

 In above description, you access an external web site to trigger the authentication. You may also directly access the router’s Web UI for authentication. Both HTTP and HTTPS are supported, for example http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 . Replace

192.168.1.1 with your router’s real IP address, and add the port number if the default management port has been modified.

If the authentication is successful, you will get the Welcome Message that is set in the

User Management >> General Setup page.

With the default setup <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>

window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>, you will be redirected to http://www.draytek.com . You may change it if you want. For example, you will get the following welcome message if you enter Login Successful in the Welcome Message table.


412

Also you will get a Tracking Window if you don’t block the pop-up window.

 Don’t setup a user profile in User Management and a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile with the same Username. Otherwise, you may get unexpected result. It is because the

VPN Remote Dial-in User profiles can be extended to the User profiles in User

Management for authentication.

There are two different behaviors when a User Management account and a VPN profile share the same Username:

 If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is enabled in the VPN profile, the user profile in

User Management will always be invalid for Web authentication. For example, if you create a user profile in User Management with chaochen/test as username/password, while a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile with the same username “chaochen” but a different password “1234”, you will always get error message The username or password you entered is incorrect when you use

chaochen/test via Web to do authentication.


 If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is disabled in the VPN profile, a User

Management account and a remote dial-in VPN profile can use the same

Username, even with different passwords. However, we recommend you to use different usernames for different user profiles in User Management and VPN profiles.

A u t h e n t t i i c a t t i o n v i i a T e l n e t t

The LAN clients can also authenticate their accounts via telnet.

1.

Telnet to the router’s LAN IP address and input the account name for the authentication:

2.

Type the password for authentication and press Enter. The message User login

successful will be displayed with the expired time (if configured).

Info Here expired time is “Unlimited” means the Time Quota function is not enabled for this account. After login, this account will not be expired until it is logout.

3.

In the Web interface of router, the configuration page of Time Quota is shown as below.


4.

If the Time Quota is set with “0” minute, you will get the following message which means this account has no time quota.

If the Time Quota is enabled and time is not 0 minute,

414

You will get the following message. The expired time is shown after you login.

After you run out the available time, you can’t use this account any more until the administrator manually adds additional time for you.


A u t h e n t t i i c a t t i i o n v i i a V i i g o r r P r o A l l e r t t N o t t i i c e T o o l l

Authentication via Web or Telnet is convenient for users; however, it has some limitations.

The most advantage with VigorPro Alert Notice Tool to operate the authentication is the ability to do auto login. If the timeout value set on the router for the user account has been reached, the router will stop the client computer from accessing the Internet until it does an authentication again. Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool allows user to setup the re-authentication interval so that the utility will send authentication requests periodically.

This will keep the client hosts from having to manually authenticate again and again.

The configuration of the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool is as follows:

1.

Click Authenticate Now!! to start the authentication immediately.

2.

You may get the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool from the following link: http://www.draytek.com/user/SupportDLUtility.php

Info 1

Info 2

Any modification to the Firewall policy will break down the connections of all current users. They all have to authenticate again for Internet access.

The administrator may check the current users from User Online

Status page.


A 2 H o w t t o u s e L a n d i i n g P a g e F e a t t u r r e

Landing Page is a special feature configured under User Management. It can specify the message, content to be seen or specify which website to be accessed into when users try to access into the Internet by passing the authentication. Here, we take Vigor3220 Series router as an example.

E x a m p l l e 1 ： U s e r r s c a n s e e t h e m e s s a g e f f o r r l l a n d i i n g p a g e a f f t t e r r l l o g g i i n g i i n t t o I I n t t e r r n e t s u c c e s s f f u l l l y

1.

Open the web user interface of Vigor3220.

2.

Open User Management -> General Setup to get the following page. In the field of

Landing Page, please type the words of “Login Success”. Please note that the maximum number of characters to be typed here is 255.

416

3.

Now you can enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.


4.

In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.

5.

Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password.

6.

Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will see the message of Login Success from the browser you use.


E x a m p l l e 2 ： T h e s y s t t e m w i i l l l l c o n n e c t t t t o h t t t p : : / / / w w w .

.

d r a y t e k .

.

c o m a u t t o m a t t i i c a l l l l y a f f t t e r r l l o g g i n g i i n t t o I I n t t e r n e t t s u c c e s s f u l l l l y

1.

In the field of Landing Page, please type the words as below:

“ <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>

window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>”

418

2.

Next, enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.


3.

In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.

4.

Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and asks for username and password. Please type the correct username and password.


5.

Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will be directed into the website of www.draytek.com.


V I I 4 C e n t t r r a l l A P M a n a g e m e n t t ( ( C A M ) )

Vigor3220 can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP

Management.

A P M a p

AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from the list to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly indicated through simulated signal strength

A P M a i i n t t e n a n c e

Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

L o a d B a l l a n c e f f o r r A P

The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.



V I I 4 1 S t t a t t u s

This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption, channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router. Please open Central AP Management>>Function Support List to check what AP Models are supported.

422



Index Click the index number link for viewing the settings summary of the access point.

Device Name

IP Address

SSID

The name of the AP managed by Vigor router will be displayed here.

Display the true IP address of the access point.

Display the SSID configured for the access point(s) connected to Vigor3220.

Display the encryption mode used by the access point. Encryption

Ch.

WL Client

Display the channel used by the access point.

Display the number of wireless clients (stations) connecting to the access point.

In which, 0/64 means that up to 64 clients are allowed to connect to the access point. But, now no one connects to the access point.


Version

Password

The number displayed on the left side means 2.4GHz; and the number displayed on the right side means 5GHz.

Display the firmware version used by the access point.

Vigor3220 can get related information of the access point by accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

This button is used to modify the logging password of the connected access point.

V I I 4 2 W L A N P r r o f f i i l l e

WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface of the access point.

Check the box on the left side of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. The

Clone, Edit and Apply To Device buttons will be available then.



Profile Display the name of the profile.

The default profile cannot be renamed.

Main SSID

Security

Multi-SSID

Display the SSID configured by such wireless profile.

Display the security mode selected by such wireless profile.

Enable means multiple SSIDs (more than one) are active.

Disable means only SSID1 is active.

WLAN ACL

Rate Control

Display the name of the access control list.

Display the upload and/or download transmission rate.


424

Clone It can copy settings from an existing WLAN profile to another

WLAN profile.

First, you have to check the box of the existing profile as the original profile. Second, click Clone. The following dialog will appear.

Edit

Apply to Device

Third, choose the profile index to accept the settings from the original profile. Forth, type a new name in the field of

Renamed as. Last, click Apply to save the settings on this dialog.

The new profile has been created with the settings coming from the original profile.

It allows you to modify an existing wireless profile or create a new wireless profile.

Click it to apply the selected wireless profile to the specified

Access Point.

Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field.

Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then, click OK.

The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot.


H o w t t o e d i i t t t h e w i i r r e l l e s s L A N p r o f f i i l l e ?

1.

Check the box on the left side of the selected profile.

2.

Click the Edit button to display the following page.

Info The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile.


3.

After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page for 2.4G wireless security settings.


4.

After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page for 5G wireless security settings.

5.

When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.


V I I 4 3 A P M a i i n t t e n a n c e

Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

Info Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions

(e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor3220.



Action There are four actions provided by Vigor router to manage the access points.

428

File/Path

Select Device

Selected Device

Vigor router can backup the configuration of the selected AP,

restore the configuration for the selected AP, perform the

firmware upgrade of the selected AP, reboot the selected AP remotely and perform the factory reset for the selected AP.

Specify the file and the path which will be used to perform

Config Restore or Firmware Upgrade.

Display all the available access points managed by Vigor router. Simply click << or >> to move the device(s) between

Select Device and Selected Device areas.

Display the access points that will be applied by such function


after clicking OK.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action.


430

V I I 4 4 A P M a p

This function is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from the list to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly indicated through simulated signal strength.



Check the box to view or edit the AP Map.

Location Display a brief description (e.g., ground, roof) of the AP Map.

AP Display the model name and number of VigorAP located on the

AP map.

AP Signal Strength

Dimension(m)

Map

View

Edit

Display the pre-defined signal strength of the AP map.

Display the width and length of the AP map.

Display if the uploaded file for AP map is ready or not.

Click it to review the layout for the selected AP map.

Click it to modify the geographic settings for the selected AP

Map profile.

Cancel


Click it to cancel the configuration in such page.

Click the link to clear current page configuration.


E d i i t t i n g t t h e A P M a p P r o f f i l e

1.

Select an index and click Edit to open the following web page.



Location (Profile Name) Type a name (e.g., groudfloor) for the AP map profile.

Dimensions

Upload Map

Type the real length and width of the uploaded map.

Click the Select button to choose an image file (only JPG and PNG are supported) for floor plan.

Cancel

Next

Click it to cancel the configuration.

Click it to go to the next configuration page.

2.

Click Next. The configuration page with floor plan will be shown as follows.


3.

Drag and drop an AP icon from Compatible AP List to the map on the left side.

4.

Choose the signal strength (e.g., 30% in this case) from User Define drop down list. Click

Apply.

432

5.

Adjust the AP on the map to find out which place can have the best wireless coverage. At last, click Save.


V I I 4 5 T r r a f f f i i c G r r a p h

Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.

The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in kbps).

Info Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External

Devices function.


V I I 4 6 L o a d B a l l a n c e

The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.

434




Mode

Force Overload

Disassociation

It is used to determine the operation mode when the system detects overload between access points.

By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be executed based on the station number configured in this page.

It is used to limit the allowed number for the station connecting to the access point. The purpose is to prevent lots of stations connecting to access point at the same time and causing traffic unbalanced. Please define the required station number for WLAN (2.4GHz) and WLAN (5GHz) separately.

By Traffic – The operation of load balance will executed according to the traffic configuration in this page.

 Upload Limit –Use the drop down list to specify the traffic limit for uploading.

 Download Limit – Use the drop down list to specify the traffic limit for downloading.

By Idle Time - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the network connection of the client’s station which is idle for a longest time.

By signal Strength - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the network connection of the client’s station with the weakest signal.



V I I 4 7 F u n c t t i i o n S u p p o r r t t L i i s t t

Click the Client tab to list the AP management functions that the Access Points support under different firmware versions.

Click the Server tab to list the AP management functions that Vigor router supports under different firmware versions.


V I I 5 E x t t e r r n a l l D e v i i c e s

Vigor router can be used to connect with many types of external devices. In order to control or manage the external devices conveniently, open External Devices to make detailed configuration.



External Device Auto

Discovery

Check this box to detect the external device automatically and display on this page.

From this web page, check the box of External Device Auto Discovery. Later, all the available devices will be displayed in this page with icons and corresponding information. You can change the device name if required or remove the information for off-line device whenever you want.

436

When you finished the configuration, click OK to save it.

Info Only DrayTek products can be detected by this function.


P a r r t t V I I I I O t t h e r r s

USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications.


V I I I I 1 O b j j e c t t s S e t t t t i i n g s

For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address).



V I I I I 1 1 I I P O b j j e c t t

You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.




Index

Name

Display the profile number that you can configure.

Display the name of the object profile.

To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:

1.

Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.

2.

The configuration page will be shown as follows:




Name

Interface

Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Choose a proper interface.

Address Type

For example, the Direction setting in Edit Filter Rule will ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN or any IP address. If you choose LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN as the

Interface here, and choose LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN as the direction setting in Edit Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses specified with LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN interface will be opened for you to choose in Edit Filter Rule page.

Determine the address type for the IP address.

Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address only.

Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs within a range.

Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for

IP address.

Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address.

Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.

440

MAC Address

Start IP Address

End IP Address

Type the MAC address of the network card which will be controlled.

Type the start IP address for Single Address type.

Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is


Subnet Mask

Invert Selection selected.

Type the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.

If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen.

4.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. Below is an example of IP objects settings.


V I I I I 1 2 I I P G r r o u p

This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.

442




Index

Name




1.


2.





Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP objects with the specified interface.

Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box.

Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.

3.


V I I I I 1 3 I I P v 6 O b j j e c t t

You can set up to 64 sets of IPv6 Objects with different conditions.




Index

Name





1.


2.





Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address.

Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address only.

Select Range Address if this object contains several IPv6s within a range.

Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for

IPv6 address.

Select Any Address if this object contains any IPv6 address.

Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.

444

Mac Address

Start IP Address

End IP Address

Prefix Length

Invert Selection

Type the MAC address of the network card which will be controlled.

Type the start IP address for Single Address type.

Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is selected.

Type the number (e.g., 64) for the prefix length of IPv6 address.

If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen.

3.



V I I I I 1 4 I I P v 6 G r o u p

This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group.




Index

Name




1.


2.






Available IPv6

Objects

All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box.

Selected IPv6 Objects Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box.

3.


V I I I I 1 5 S e r v i i c e T y p e O b j j e c t t

You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.

446




Index

Name





1.


2.





Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.

Source/Destination

Port

Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols.

The filter rule will filter out any port number.

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.

(!=) – when the first and last value are the same,

it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and

last values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.

(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.

(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this profile.


3.


V I I I I 1 6 S e r v i i c e T y p e G r r o u p

This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.

448




Index

Name





1.

Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details.

2.





Available Service

Type Objects

Selected Service Type

Objects

All the available service objects that you have added on

Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this box.

Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.

3.



450

V I I I I 1 7 K e y w o r r d O b j j e c t t

You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web

Content Filter Profile.




Index

Name

Clear all profiles.





1.


2.




Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Contents Type the content for such profile. For example, type

gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the page with gambling information will be watched out and be passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall settings.

3.



V I I I I 1 8 K e y w o r r d G r o u p

This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile.

452




Index

Name




1.


2.





Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Available Keyword

Objects

You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page within one keyword group. All the available Keyword objects that you have created will be shown in this box.

Selected Keyword

Objects

Click this box.

button to add the selected Keyword objects in

3.


V I I I I 1 9 F i i l l e E x t t e n s i i o n O b j j e c t t

This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter.

All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to the chosen action.




Index

Name





1.

Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details.

2.


454



Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 7 characters.

3.

Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.


V I I I I 1 1 0 S M S / / M a i i l l S e r r v i i c e O b j j e c t t

S M S S e r v i i c e O b j j e c t

This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert

Service.



Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.

Index

Profile

SMS Provider


Display the name for such SMS profile.

Display the service provider which offers SMS service.


1.

Click the SMS Provider tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.


2.


456



Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

Service Provider

Username

Password

Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which offers SMS service.

Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Quota

Sending Interval

Type the number of the credit that you purchase from the service provider chosen above.

Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the standard route.

To avoid quota being exhausted soon, type time interval for sending the SMS.

3.



C u s t o m i i z e d S M S S e r v i i c e

Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index

10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed.

You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details.



Profile Name Display the name of this profile. It cannot be modified.

Service Provider Type the website of the service provider.

Type the URL string in the box under the filed of Service

Provider. You have to contact your SMS provider to obtain the exact URL string.


Username

Password

Quota

Sending Interval

Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Type the total number of the messages that the router will send out.

Type the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.


M a i i l l S e r r v i i c e O b j j e c t t


Service.

458



Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.

Index

Profile


Display the name for such mail server profile.



1.

Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.

2.




Profile Name Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

SMTP Server

SMTP Port

Type the IP address of the mail server.

Type the port number for SMTP server.

Sender Address

Use SSL

Authentication

Type the e-mail address of the sender.

Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.

The mail server must be authenticated with the correct username and password to have the right of sending message out. Check the box to enable the function.

Username – Type a name for authentication. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

Password – Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the password you can set is 31 characters.


Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out.

3.


V I I I I 1 1 1 N o t t i i f f i i c a t t i i o n O b j j e c t t


Service.

You can set an object with different monitoring situation.

460


1.

Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.


2.




Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Category

Status

Display the types that will be monitored.

Display the status for the category. You can check the box you want to be monitored.

For example, the check box of CPE firmware upgrade fail under the category of Central VPN Management is checked.

Once such profile is enabled, Vigor router system will send out notification to the recipient via SMS.

3.




A 1 H o w t t o S e n d a N o t t i i f i i c a t i i o n t t o S p e c i i f i i e d P h o n e N u m b e r r v i i a S M S S e r v i i c e i i n

W A N D i i s c o n n e c t t i i o n

Follow the steps listed below:

1.


2.

Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to get the following page.

462

Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider. If the SMS service provider is not on the list, you can configure Index 9 and Index 10 to add the new service provider to Vigor router.

3.

Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure the SMS Provider setting. In the following page, type the username and password and set the quota that the router can send the message out.


4.

After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting.

5.

Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the notification.

6.

Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending the SMS. In the following page, type the name of the profile and check the Disconnected and Reconnected boxes for WAN to work in concert with the topic of this paper.


7.

After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the configuration of the notification object profile setting.

8.

Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose

SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS).

464

9.

Click OK to save the settings. Later, if one of the WAN connections fails in your router, the system will send out SMS to the phone number specified. If the router has only one

WAN interface, the system will send out SMS to the phone number while reconnecting the WAN interface successfully.


R e m a r r k : : H o w t t h e c u s t t o m i i z e t t h e S M S P r r o v i i d e r r

Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify for sending SMS out.


V I I I I 2 U S B A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n

USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of

Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications. After setting the configuration in USB Application, you can type the IP address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User

Management on the client software. Then, the client can use the FTP site (USB storage disk) or share the Samba service through Vigor router.

Info USB ports on Vigor router are allowed to connect to USB modem. Models of the modems supported by Vigor router can be seen from USB

Application>>Modem Support List. For network connection via USB modem, refer to WAN>>Internet Access and WAN>>General Setup for detailed information.



V I I I I 2 1 U S B G e n e r r a l l S e t t t i i n g s

This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP server and enable SMB service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the

Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32.

It is recommended for you to use FAT32 for viewing the filename completely (FAT16 cannot support long filename).



General Settings Simultaneous FTP Connections - This field is used to specify the quantity of the FTP sessions. The router allows up to 6

FTP sessions connecting to USB storage disk at one time.

Default Charset - At present, Vigor router supports four types of character sets. Default Charset is for English based file name.


SMB File Sharing Service Click Enable to invoke SMB file sharing service via the router.

Access Mode

NetBios Name Service

LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the samba server of the router.

LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access samba server of the router.

For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name. The workgroup name can have as many as 15 characters and the host name can have as many as 23 characters. Both them cannot contain any of the following--- ; : " < > * + = \ | ?.

Workgroup Name – Type a name for the workgroup.

Host Name – Type the host name for the router.


V I I I I 2 2 U S B U s e r r M a n a g e m e n t

This page allows you to set profiles for FTP/Samba users. Any user who wants to access into the USB storage disk must type the same username and password configured in this page.

Before adding or modifying settings in this page, please insert a USB storage disk first.

Otherwise, an error message will appear to warn you.

468

Click index number to access into configuration page.




FTP/SMB User Enable – Click this button to activate this profile (account) for FTP service or SMB file sharing service. Later, the user can use the username specified in this page to login into FTP server.

Disable – Click this button to disable such profile.

Username

Password


Home Folder

Type the username for FTP/Samba users for accessing into

FTP server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access into USB storage disk in anonymity. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the username specified here for accessing into USB storage disk. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.

Note: “Admin” could not be typed here as username, for the word is specified for accessing into web pages of Vigor router only. Also, it is reserved for FTP firmware upgrade usage.

Note: FTP Passive mode is not supported by Vigor Router.

Please disable the mode on the FTP client.

Type the password for FTP/Samba users for accessing FTP server. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the password specified here for accessing into USB storage disk.

The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.

Type the password again to make confirmation.

It determines the folder for the client to access into.

The user can enter a directory name in this field. Then, after clicking OK, the router will create the specific/new folder in the USB storage disk. In addition, if the user types “/” here, he/she can access into all of the disk folders and files in USB storage disk.

Note: When write protect status for the USB storage disk is

ON, you cannot type any new folder name in this field. Only

“/” can be used in such case.

You can click to open the following dialog to add any new folder which can be specified as the Home Folder.


Access Rule It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must follow the rule specified here.

File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such profile.

Directory –Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for such profile.

Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB storage disk into the USB interface of the Vigor router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.

V I I I I 2 3 F i i l l e E x p l l o r r e r r

File Explorer offers an easy way for users to view and manage the content of USB storage disk connected on Vigor router.

470



Click this icon to refresh files list.

Refresh

Click this icon to return to the upper directory.

Back

Click this icon to add a new folder.

Create

Current Path

Upload

Display current folder.

Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB


storage disk. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be shared for other user through FTP.

V I I I I 2 4 U S B D e v i i c e S t t a t t u s

This page is to monitor the status for the users who accessing into FTP or Samba server (USB storage disk) via the Vigor router. In addition, the status of the USB modem or USB printer connecting to Vigor router can be checked from such page. If you want to remove the storage disk from USB port in router, please click Disconnect USB Disk first. And then, remove the

USB storage disk later.



Connection Status If there is no USB storage disk connected to Vigor router, “No

Disk Connected” will be shown here.

Disk Capacity

Free Capacity

It displays the total capacity of the USB storage disk.

It displays the free space of the USB storage disk. Click

Refresh at any time to get new status for free capacity.

Index

IP Address

Username

It displays the number of the client which connects to FTP server.

It displays the IP address of the user’s host which connects to the FTP server.

It displays the username that user uses to login to the FTP server.

When you insert USB storage disk into the Vigor router, the system will start to find out such device within several seconds.


472

V I I I I 2 5 M o d e m S u p p o r r t L i i s t t

Such page provides the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.


V I I I I 2 6 S M B C l l i i e n t t S u p p o r r t L i s t t

SMB Client Support List provides the test status information for applications with file sharing operated under different platforms.



A 1 H o w c a n I I g e t t t t h e f i i l l e s f r r o m U S B s t o r r a g e d e v i i c e c o n n e c t t i i n g t t o V i i g o r r r r o u t t e r ?

Files on USB storage device can be reviewed by opening USB Applicaiton>>File Explorer. If it is necessary for you to delete, copy files on the device or write, paste files to the devcie, it must be done through SAMBA server or FTP server.

Samba service is based on the original USB FTP service. You will need to setup USB FTP first.

We would like to give brief instructions on USB FTP setup here.

1.

Plug the USB device to the USB port on the router. Open USB Application>>USB Device

Status. Make sure Disk Connected appears on the Connection Status as the figure shown below:

2.

Then, please open USB Application >> USB General Settings to enable SMB service.


3.

Setup a user account for the FTP service by using USB Application >>USB User

Management. Click Enable to enable FTP/Samba User account. Here we add a new account "user1" and assign authorities “Read”, “Write” and “List” to it.

4.

Click OK to save the configuration.

5.

Make sure the FTP service is running properly. Please open a browser and type

ftp://192.168.1.1. Use the account "user1" to login.


476

6.

When the following screen appears, it means the FTP service is running properly.

7.

Return to USB Application >> USB Disk Status. The information for FTP server will be shown as below.

Now, users in LAN of Vigor3220 can access into the USB storage device by typing ftp://192.168.1.1 on any browser. They can add or remove files / directories, depending on the Access Rule for FTP account settings in USB Application >>USB User

Management.


P a r r t t V I I I I I I T r r o u b l l e s s h o o t t i i n g

This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration.


V I I I I I I 1 D i i a g n o s t t i i c s

This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage.

 Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.

 Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.

 Pinging the router from your computer.

 Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.

 Backing to factory default setting if necessary.

If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to contact your dealer or DrayTek technical support for advanced help.



Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router.

V I I I I I I 1 1 D i i a l l o u t t T r r i i g g e r r i i n g

Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.



Decoded Format

Refresh

It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP

(remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.

Click it to reload the page.


V I I I I I I 1 2 R o u t t i i n g T a b l l e

Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.

480



Refresh Click it to reload the page.


V I I I I I I 1 3 A R P C a c h e T a b l e

Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address

Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an

Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.




V I I I I I I 1 4 I P v 6 N e i i g h b o u r r T a b l e

The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6 address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.

Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page.





V I I I I I I 1 5 D H C P T a b l l e

The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.

Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page. and

482



Index It displays the connection item number.

IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified

PC.


MAC Address

Leased Time

HOST ID

Refresh

It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP assigned IP address for it.

It displays the leased time of the specified PC.

It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.


V I I I I I I 1 6 N A T S e s s i i o n s T a b l l e

Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page.



Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.

#Pseudo Port

Peer IP:Port

It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.

It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote host.

Interface

Refresh

It displays the representing number for different interface.



V I I I I I I 1 7 D N S C a c h e T a b l l e

Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page.

The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from

LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS

Cache Table.

484



Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.

Refresh

When an entry’s TTL is larger than….


Check the box the type the value of TTL (time to live) for each entry. Click OK to enable such function.

It means when the TTL value of each DNS query reaches the threshold of the value specified here, the corresponding record will be deleted from router’s Cache automatically.


V I I I I I I 1 8 P i i n g D i i a g n o s i i s

Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page. or



IPV4 /IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.

Ping through

Ping to

Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you want to ping through or choose Unspecified to be determined by the router automatically.

Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you want to ping.


IP Address

Ping IPv6 Address

Run

Clear

Type the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.

Type the IPv6 address that you want to ping.

Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be displayed on the screen.

Click this link to remove the result on the window.


V I I I I I I 1 9 D a t t a F l l o w M o n i i t t o r

This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth

Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoking Data

Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.

Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address,

TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.



Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function.

Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically.


488

Refresh

Index

IP Address

TX rate (kbps)


Display the number of the data flow.

Display the IP address of the monitored device.

Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.

RX rate (kbps)

Sessions

Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.

Display the session number that you specified in Limit

Session web page.

Action Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet within 5 minutes.

Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking .

Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate for WAN interface.

Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in data transmission.

Speed means line speed specified in WAN>>General Setup.

If you do not specify any rate at that page, here will display

Auto for instead.


V I I I I I I 1 1 0 T r r a f f f i i c G r r a p h

Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 Bandwidth, Sessions, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted) data of

WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.

The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings. For

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5 Bandwidth chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the transmitted and received packets in the past.

For Sessions chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the NAT sessions during the past.


V I I I I I I 1 1 1 T r r a c e R o u t t e

Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click

Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen. or

490



IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it.

Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want


Protocol

Host/IP Address

Trace Host/IP Address

Run

Clear to ping through.

Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want to ping through.

It indicates the IP address of the host.

It indicates the IPv6 address of the host.

Click this button to start route tracing work.

Click this link to remove the result on the window.

V I I I I I I 1 1 2 S y s l l o g E x p l l o r r e r r

Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.

F o r W e b S y s l o g

This page displays the time and message for User/Firewall/call/WAN/VPN settings. You can check Enable Web Syslog, specify the type of Syslog and choose the display mode you want.

Later, the event of Syslog with specified type will be shown for your reference.



Enable Web Syslog Check this box to enable the function of Web Syslog.

Syslog Type Use the drop down list to specify a type of Syslog to be displayed.

Export

Refresh

Clear

Display Mode

Click this link to save the data as a file.


Click this link to clear information on this page.

There are two modes for you to choose.

Time

Message

Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of syslog is full, the system will stop recording.

Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system.

Display the time of the event occurred.



F o r U S B S y s l l o g

This page displays the syslog recorded on the USB storage disk.



Time Display the time of the event occurred.

Log Type

Message

Display the type of the record.


V I I I I I I 1 1 3 I I P v 6 T S P C S t t a t t u s

IPv6 TSPC status web page could help you to diagnose the connection status of TSPC.

If TSPC has configured properly, the router will display the following page when the user connects to tunnel broker successfully.

492



Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually.

V I I I I I I 1 1 4 H i i g h A v a i i l l a b i i l l i i t t y S t t a t t u s

All of the routers under the same DARP (DrayTek Address resolution Protocol) group can be viewed in such page. However, only partial information of the router status will be displayed.

Vigor routers with the following condtions will be treated as the same DARP group:


 HA enabled

 the same Redundancy method

 the same Group ID

 the same Authentication Key

 the same Management Interface

Open Diagnostics>>High Availablity Status.



– configuration for the selected router.

Back – Return to previous page.

HA Setup

Renew

Refresh

Click it to open Applications>>High Availability for modifying the configuration.

Click it to get the newest status of other router (except the primary router).

Click it to get the newest status of the primary router.

Router Name

IPv4

State

Stable

WAN

Config Sync Status information and modify HA settings if required.

Display the name of the device.

Display the IPv4 address of such router.

“Down” means the function of HA is disabled.

“Primary” means such router stands for the primary router in

HA.

“Secondary” means such router stands for the secondary router in HA.

“No” means the primary router has not been determined yet.

DARP is negotiating.

“YES” means the primary router is determined.

“At Least One UP” means that at least one WAN interface connects to Internet.

“All WANs Down” means that no WAN interface connects to

Internet.

“Not Ready” means configuration synchronization is unable to execute, or configuration synchronization is disabled, or synchronization initialization executes but fails.

“Ready” means configuration synchronization is ready to execute.

“Progressing” means configuration synchronization is


Cached Time operating.

“Fail” means configuration synchronization executed and failed; or wrong model name.

“Equal” means the corresponding settings are equal to the primary router.

Display the time period since the last time to get the newest status of other router (except the primary router).

Cick the link of Status, Router Name, IPv4 or Details, the following page will be displayed on the screen.

V I I I I I I 1 1 5 A u t t h e n t t i i c a t t i i o n I I n f f o r m a t t i i o n

A u t h e n t t i i c a t t i i o n U s e r L i i s t

Such page displays authentication jobs made by Internal RADIUS or Local 802.1X.

When the mouse cursor moves to the name link under User Name, the connection message

(including authentication failed information) about internal RADIUS or local 802.1X service will be shown by a popped up dialog box.

494

A u t h e n t t i i c a t t i o n I n f f o r m a t i i o n L o g

This page will display the complete authentication log information.





Refresh

Clear

Syslog Type

Click it to update current page.

Click it to remove all of the records.

Display Mode

Specify RADIUS, 802.1X or All to display related authentication information log.

Choose the mode you want to display the related information on the following table.

 Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is full, the system will stop recording.

 Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system.

Time

Message

Display the time the user authenticated by Vigor2860 series.

Display authentication information done by Vigor2860 series.


V I I I I I I 1 1 6 D o S F l l o o d T a b l l e

This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism.

It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection.

Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.

Moreover, IP address detected and suspected to attack the network system can be blocked shortly by clicking the Block button shown on pages of SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood.

496

Info The icon - - means there is something wrong (e.g., attacking the system) with that IP address.


However, if an IP address is comfirmed to be blocked due to its abnormal behavior, click the

Blocking IP List tab to block it forever. For example, IP address “192.168.1.123” (displayed on the following web page) will be blocked forever.



Blocking IP Type the IP address in this field and click add. It will be added to the IP List and appear in the right frame.

IP list in the right frame will be blocked by Vigor system permanatly.

Remove – It is used to remove selected IP address from the

Blocking IP List.

Refresh Click this link to refresh current page.


V I I I I I I 2 C h e c k i i n g I I f f t t h e H a r r d w a r r e S t t a t t u s I I s O K o r r N o t t

Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.

1.

Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections.

Refer to “1.3 Hardware Installation” for details.

2.

Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent

LAN LED is bright.

3.

If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to

“1.2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try again.


V I I I I I I 3 C h e c k i i n g I I f f t t h e N e t t w o r r k C o n n e c t t i i o n S e t t t t i i n g s o n Y o u r r

C o m p u t t e r r I I s O K o r r N o t t

Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure the network connection settings is OK.

F o r W i i n d o w s

Info The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in www.DrayTek.com.

1.

Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Control Panel. Click Network and Sharing

Center.

2.

In the following window, click Change adapter settings.

3.

Icons of network connection will be shown on the window. Right-click on Local Area

Connection and click on Properties.


500

4.

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.

5.

Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address

automatically. Finally, click OK.


F o r M a c O S

1.

Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.

2.

Open the Application folder and get into Network.

3.

On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.


V I I I I I I 4 P i i n g i i n g t t h e R o u t t e r r f f r r o m Y o u r r C o m p u t t e r r

The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is

that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP

automatically. (Please refer to the section 5.2)

Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.

F o r W i i n d o w s

1.

Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).

2.

Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/7).

The DOS command dialog will appear.

502

3.

Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “Reply from

192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255” will appear.

4.

If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.

F o r M a c O S ( ( T e r r m i i n a l l ) )

1.

Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.

2.

Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.

3.

Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.

4.

Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “64 bytes from

192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms” will appear.



V I I I I I I 5 C h e c k i i n g I I f f t t h e I I S P S e t t t t i i n g s a r r e O K o r r N o t t

If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed on section 1.2) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please:

 Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex).

 Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL/FTTX(GPON)/Cable modem) offered by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router. Check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.

 If not, please install an additional switch for connecting both Vigor router and the modem offered by ISP. Then, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.

 If the problem of LEDs cannot be solved by the above measures, please contact with the nearest reseller, or send an e-mail to DrayTek FAE for technical support.

 Check if the settings offered by ISP are configured well or not.

When the LEDs are on and correct, yet the WAN connection still cannot be up, please:

 Open WAN >> Internet Access page and then check whether the ISP settings are set correctly. Click Details Page of WAN1~WAN4 to review the settings that you configured previously.


V I I I I I I 6 P r r o b l l e m s f f o r r 3 G / / 4 G N e t t w o r r k C o n n e c t t i i o n

When you have trouble in using 3G/4G network transmission, please check the following:

C h e c k i i f f U S B L E D l l i i g h t s o n o r o f f f f

You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G/4G USB Modem into your Vigor3220.

Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails, restart Vigor3220.

U S B L E D l l i i g h t s o n b u t t t t h e n e t t w o r r k c o n n e c t i i o n d o e s n o t t w o r r k

Check the PIN Code of SIM card is disabled or not. Please use the utility of 3G/4G USB Modem to disable PIN code and try again. If it still fails, it might be the compliance problem of system.

Please open DrayTek Syslog Tool to capture the connection information (WAN Log) and send the page (similar to the following graphic) to the service center of DrayTek.

T r a n s m i i s s i i o n R a t e i i s n o t t f f a s t t e n o u g h

Please connect your Notebook with 3G/4G USB Modem to test the connection speed to verify if the problem is caused by Vigor3220. In addition, please refer to the manual of 3G/4G USB

Modem for LED Status to make sure if the modem connects to Internet via HSDPA mode. If you want to use the modem indoors, please put it on the place near the window to obtain better signal receiving.


V I I I I I I 7 B a c k i i n g t t o F a c t t o r r y D e f f a u l l t t S e t t t t i i n g I I f f N e c e s s a r r y

Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.

Info After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing.

The password of factory default is null.

S o f f t t w a r r e R e s e t

You can reset the router to factory default via Web page. Such function is available in Admin

Mode only.

Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. After few seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.


H a r r d w a r r e R e s e t t

While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button.

Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.

After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again to fit your personal request.

V I I I I I I 8 C o n t t a c t t i i n g D r r a y T e k

If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to [email protected].


A p p e n d i i x I I : : V L A N A p p l l i i c a t t i i o n s o n V i i g o r r R o u t t e r r

Virtual Local Area Network is so-called VLAN. It offers the logical grouping technique to separate the physical ports of Ethernet switches, thus we can manage our local network easier, more flexible and secure. For instance, you’re a networking administrator in your company and you’re planning to isolate the visitors’ traffics from your private network for security considerations because you cannot ensure that visitors’ computer is clean. Or you want to separate your private network into several parts by divisions because there are too many computers in the same network segment and it results in the local traffics heavily.

VLAN helps you to solve these situations, and DrayTek’s products support bellow two popular types:

P o r r t t b a s e d

It uses a matrix table of the physical ports to define the traffics how to exchange between each port, and the traffics will be isolated from the ports are not being ticked in the same line. It is the easiest way to setup an isolate network, but not a flexible way to maintain a growing network. Because the idea of port-based VLAN is grouping by physical ports, but the difficulty is how to handle the traffics between two or more Ethernet switches. Thus, VLAN is suitable for some circumstances, for example, the rental apartment, SOHO office…and so on.

These clients may need two or three isolated networks only and setup a network in a simple way.

508

T a g b a s e d

The idea of tag-based VLAN is to identify a virtual LAN with a specific ID, therefore, VLAN ID introduced by tag-based VLAN. Through VLAN ID, ports with different VID (VLAN ID) will be identified as in different LANs, so the traffics also will be isolated from each of VLANs. Many administrators who manage an enterprise network or even the internet service providers (ISP) adopt Tag-based VLAN popularly because it is convenient to maintain and manage a distributed network. Setting a large-scale network is easy by giving each of them with different VID and isolating the traffics at the same time. Besides the VLAN ID, there is another feature, Trunk, introduced. While the role of a port on an Ethernet switch is setup as a Trunk port, it means the VLAN ID will be kept while forwarding the packets between switches. By this feature, VLANs are able to distribute over two or more Ethernet switches easily, moreover design a large and secured network is possible through Trunk port. When VLAN is being enabled on Vigor routers, the LAN ports are being turned into Trunk mode automatically.

Therefore, a VLAN supported switch, like VigorSwitch G2260/P2261, or VigorSwitch G1240, is needed.


Vigor routers [Note] support Tag-based feature both on LAN and WAN interfaces. The next we’ll demonstrate our web design and how to configure the settings by introducing the functionalities of Vigor router.

[Note]

Broadband router: Vigor2920/Vigor3200/Vigor2925/Vigo2960/Vigor3900

Modem router: Vigor2850/Vigor3220

V L A N P a c k e t s o n V i i g o r r r o u t t e r r s

Trunk mode of LAN

Trunk Port can carry the packets with VID but replace the Non-VID packet as the VID of Trunk port while forwarding the packets to another switch.

Bridge mode of WAN

P1 and P2 are doing NAT flow to access to the internet, but P3 and P4 will forward the packets between WAN and LAN ports directly.

W e b U s e r I I n t e r f f a c e

So far, there are two kinds of open system on Vigor router. One is DrayOS, which is DrayTek owned, and another is Linux-like which customized by DrayTek from OpenWRT. Here DrayOS system is going to be introduced to you because it is the most stable and superfast booting system in DrayTek products. If the UI style of yours is different from the following. It may not

DrayOS system with new web style or maybe the Linux-like model.

WAN



LAN

V L A N a p p l l i i c a t i i o n s o n V i i g o r r r r o u t t e r

 Multi Subnet (VLAN of LAN)


512

Port-based mode

Tag-based mode

By above settings, there are four private networks will be created and computers attached with each of LAN ports or SSIDs which are able to obtain a private IP address from each

DHCP server (LAN1/LAN2/LAN3/LAN4). However, the traffics of the LAN port or SSID that are NOT being grouped in the same VLAN are unable to forward to each other. The benefit of Port-based is able to extend the wired ports by installing a cheaper dumb switch as many as you need, but Tag-based offers you a flexible and well-managed network. The networks are isolated, secured and reduce the broadcasting storm effectively in each of networks with VLAN.

 Guest Network


Port-based mode

Tag-based mode

To deploy a guest network, which serves your guests the internet accessibility, but the traffics have to be isolated from your private network due to the security considerations, it can be done by above settings. However, a switch support VLAN function is need if VLAN

Tag enabled.

 Triple Play (Multi-WAN)

NAT mode with VLAN

Following settings, the set-top box (STB) is able to attach with any LAN port. Video streaming which your ISP provided will be played on your monitor.



Bridge mode with VLAN

Set-top box (STB) or the other kinds of media devices are able to attach with Port4 or

Port5 of LAN. Those devices that attached with Port4 or Port5 are able to access the services network directly which your ISP provided.




P a r r t t I I X D r r a y T e k T o o l l s s


I I X 1 S m a r r t t V P N C l l i i e n t t

I I X 1 1 D r r a y T e k A n d r o i i d b a s e d S m a r r t t V P N A P P f f o r r t t h e e s t a b l l i i s h m e n t t o f f S S L V P N c o n n e c t t i i o n

DrayTek has been the world-leading company to integrate VPN with Vigor SOHO routers to serve professionals and business customers with secure data transactions over Internet. The facilities of VPN let businesses are able to receive and send data over Internet with secure tunnels. We provide multiple protocol VPN connections such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP protocols for secure data exchange and communication. With SSL VPN embedded on Vigor routers, teleworkers can have convenient and simple access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish

VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe.

518

DrayTek provided free SmartVPN for Windows-based users to easily establish VPN tunnels.

There were million downloads. Now, DrayTek released Android-based SmartVPN app for those who would like to set up SSL VPN connection with the VPN server working at the main office.

The SmartVPN app is available for your free download! Then, you can use the SmartVPN App on smartphone/tablet PC to establish SSL VPN tunnels with your main office.


I I X 1 2 H o w t t o U s e S m a r r t t V P N A n d r o i i d A P P t t o E s t t a b l l i i s h S S L V P N

T u n n e l l ?

SmartVPN APP for Android is now available on Google play. This document demonstrates how to use the APP to establish a SSL VPN tunnel.

1.

On VPN server, create a SSL user account. Please refer to “How to Set up SSL VPN” on www.draytek.com for detailed instructions.

2.

Download the APP from Google play, and run the APP.

3.

Click “+” to add a new profile.


520

4.

Edit the profile. a.

Enter description of this profile. b.

Enter VPN Server's IP in Server. c.

Enter Port as the port which VPN server uses for SSL VPN; for Vigor Routers, it is 443 by default. d.

Tap SAVE to save the profile or “<” to cancel.

Info Installation of relevant Root CA is required to enable server certificate authentication.

If you check “Use default gateway on remote network”, all the traffic of this smart device will be forwarded to the remote gateway.

5.

Tap the profile bar to establish SSL VPN tunnel.

6.

Enter Username and Password, then tap Dial.


7.

When the tunnel is up, the profile will turn green. Tap the bar again will disconnect the tunnel.

8.

Tap the pencil icon to edit or remove the profile.




P a r r t t X T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d s s


A c c e s s i i n g T e l l n e t t o f f V i i g o r r 3 2 2 0

This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.

Info For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet

Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.

Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.

In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default, enter the current IP address of the router.

524

Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. Then, type ?. You will see a list of valid/common commands depending on the router that your use.


For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type

Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password.

And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.


526

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : b p a

This command allows to configure a network setting specified for Australia’s ISP.

S y n t t a x

bpa m [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]

S y n t t a x D e s c r i i p t i i o n

Parameter Description m Available settings are 1 and 2.

<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.

[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.

-a <enable> 1/0 to enable/disable this entry

-n <UserName>

-p <PassWord>

-s <select> contact UserName(max. 24 characters) contact PassWord (max. 24 characters)

-l <List>

It means to specify an IP address for Server.

0 : no selection.

1 : NSW(61.9.192.13)

2 : QLD(61.9.208.13),

3 : VIC(61.9.128.13)

4 : SA(61.9.224.13),

5 : WA(61.9.240.13)

List all settings configured.

E x a m p l l e

> bpa 1 -a 1 -n testUser -p testPassword -s 4

> bpa -l

-------index: 1 active------

UserName[1]: testUser

PassWord[1]: testPassword

ServerIP[1]:4

-------index: 2 inactive------

UserName[2]:

PassWord[2]:

ServerIP[2]:0

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e p r o f f

Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application.

“csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.

S y n t t a x

csm appe prof -i INDEX [-v | -n NAME|setdefault]



Parameter Description

INDEX Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.

- v

- n

View the configuration of the CSM profile.

Set a name for the CSM profile.

NAME setdefault

Specify a name for the CSM profile, less then 15 characters.

Reset to default settings.

E x a m p l e

> csm appe prof -i 1 -n games

The name of APPE Profile 1 was setted.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e s e t

It is used to configure group settings for IM/P2P/Protocol and Others in APP Enforcement

Profile.

S y n t t a x

csm appe set -i INDEX [-v GROUP| -e AP_IDX | -d AP_IDX| -a AP_IDX [ACTION]]

S y n t t a x D e s c r i i p t i o n

Parameter Description


- v View the IM/P2P/Protocol and Others configuration of the CSM profile.

-e

-d

-a

GROUP

AP_IDX

ACTION

Enable to block specific application.

Disable to block specific application.

Set the action of specific application

Specify the category of the application. Available options are: IM,

P2P, Protocol and Others.

Each application has independent index number for identification in

CLI command.

Specify the index number of the application here. If you have no idea of the inex number, do the following (Take IM as an example):

Type “csm appe set –I 1 –v IM”, the system will list all of the index numbers of the applications categorized under IM.

Specify the action of the application, 0 or 1.

0: Block. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be blocked.

1: Pass. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be passed.

E x a m p l l e

>csm appe set -i 1 -a 1 1

Profile 1 - : <NULL> action set to Pass.

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e s h o w

It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile.


528

S y n t t a x

csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m]



-a View the configuration status for All groups.

-i

-p

-t

-m

View the configuration status of IM group.

View the configuration status of P2P group.

View the configuration status of protocol group.

View the configuration status of Others group.

E x a m p l l e

>csm appe show -t

Type Index Name Version Advance

Advanced Option: (M)essage, (F)ile Transfer, (G)ame, (C)onference, and (O)ther

Activities

-------------------------------------------------------------

PROTOCOL 52 DB2

PROTOCOL 53 DNS

PROTOCOL 54 FTP

PROTOCOL 55 HTTP 1.1

PROTOCOL 56 IMAP 4.1

PROTOCOL 57 IMAP STARTTLS 4.1

PROTOCOL 58 IRC 2.4.0 …………

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e c o n f f i i g

It is used to display the configuration status (enabled or disabled) for IM/P2P/Protocol/Other applications.

S y n t t a x

csm appe config -v INDEX [-i|-p|-t|-m]




-i

-p

View the configuration status of IM group.

View the configuration status of P2P group.

-t

-m

View the configuration status of protocol group.

View the configuration status of Others group.

E x a m p l e

> csm appe config -v 1 -m

Group Type Index Name Enable A vance Enable

Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other

Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O

-------------------------------------------------------------------

OTHERS TUNNEL 75 DNSCrypt Disable


OTHERS TUNNEL 76 DynaPass Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 77 FreeU Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 78 HTTP Proxy Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 79 HTTP Tunnel Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 80 Hamachi Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 81 Hotspot Shield Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 82 MS Teredo Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 83 PGPNet Disable

OTHERS TUNNEL 84 Ping Tunnel Disable

.

.

.

------------------------------------------------------------------

Total 66 APPs

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e i i n t t e r f f a c e

It is used to configure APPE signature download interface.

S y n t t a x

csm appe interface [AUTO/WAN#]


P a r r a m e t t e r

AUTO

WAN

D e s c r r i p t i i o n

Vigor router specifies WAN interface automatically.

Specify the WAN interface for signature downloading.

E x a m p l l e

> csm appe interface wan1

Download interface is set as "WAN1" now.

> csm appe interface auto

Download interface is set as "auto-selected" now.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m a p p e e m a i i l l

It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in

System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert).

S y n t t a x

csm appe email [-e|-d|-s]


P a r r a m e t t e r

-e

-d

-s

D e s c r r i i p t i i o n

Enable notification e-mail mechanism.

Disable notification e-mail mechanism.

Send an example e-mail.

E x a m p l e

> csm appe email -e

Enable APPE email.


530

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m u c f f

It is used to configure settings for URL control filter profile.

S y n t t a x csm ucf show csm ucf setdefault csm ucf msg MSG

csm ucf obj INDEX [-n PROFILE_NAME | -l [P|B|A|N] | uac | wf ]

csm ucf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm ucf obj INDEX -p VALUE

csm ucf obj INDEX -l P|B|A|N

csm ucf obj INDEX uac

csm ucf obj INDEX wf


P a r r a m e t t e r show setdefault msg MSG obj

INDEX

-n

PROFILE_NAME

-p

VALUE

-l

MSG uac wf

D e s c r r i p t i i o n

Display all of the profiles.

Return to default settings for all of the profile.

Set the administration message.

MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message itself.

Specify the object for the profile.

Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.

Set the profile name.

Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)

Set the priority (defined by the number specified in VALUE) for the profile.

Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions.

0: It means Bundle: Pass.

1: It means Bundle: Block.

2: It means Either: URL Access Control First.

3: It means Either: Web Feature First.

It means the log type of the profile. They are:

P: Pass,

B: Block,

A: All,

N: None

Specify the Administration Message, less then 255 characters

Set URL Access Control part.

Set Web Feature part.

E x a m p l e

> csm ucf obj 1 -n game -l B

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[game]


Log:[none]

Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]

[ ]Enable URL Access Control

Action:[pass]

[ ]Prevent web access from IP address.

No Obj NO. Object Name

--- -------- ---------------------------------

No Grp NO. Group Name

--- -------- ---------------------------------

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m u c f f o b j I I N D E X u a c

It means to configure the settings regarding to URL Access Control (uac).

S y n t t a x

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -v

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -e csm ucf obj INDEX uac -d

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -a P|B

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -i E|D

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -o KEY_WORD_Object_Index

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -g KEY_WORD_Group_Index




- v

-e

-d

-a

View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.

Enable the function of URL Access Control.

Disable the function of URL Access Control.

Set the action of specific application, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed.

-i

-o

KEY_WORD_Object_Index

-g

KEY_WORD_Group_Index

Prevent the web access from any IP address.

E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will be blocked.

D: Disable the function.

Set the keyword object.

Specify the index number of the object profile.

Set the keyword group.

Specify the index number of the group profile.

E x a m p l l e

> csm ucf obj 1 uac -i E


Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[game]

Log:[none]



Action:[pass]

[v]Prevent web access from IP address.


--- -------- ---------------------------------


--- -------- ---------------------------------

> csm ucf obj 1 uac -a B

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[game]

Log:[none]



Action:[block]

[v]Prevent web access from IP address.


--- -------- ---------------------------------


--- -------- ---------------------------------


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m u c f f o b j I I N D E X w f f

It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf).

S y n t t a x

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index



INDEX

- v

-e

-d

-a

-s

-u

-f

File_Extension_Object_inde x

Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 8.

View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.

Enable the restriction of web feature.

Disable the restriction of web feature.

Set the action of web feature, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.

Enable the the Web Feature configuration.

Features available for configuration are: c: Cookie p: Proxy u: Upload

Cancel the web feature configuration.

Set the file extension object index number.

Type the index number (1 to 8) for the file extension object.

E x a m p l l e

> csm ucf obj 1 wf -s c

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[game]

Log:[none]



Action:[block]

[v] Prevent web access from IP address.


--- -------- ---------------------------------


--- -------- ---------------------------------


534

[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature

Action:[pass]

File Extension Object Index : [0] Profile Name : []

[V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m w c f f

It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).

S y n t t a x csm wcf show csm wcf look csm wcf cache csm wcf server WCF_SERVER csm wcf msg MSG csm wcf setdefault

csm wcf obj INDEX -v

csm wcf obj INDEX -a P|B

csm wcf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm wcf obj INDEX -l N|P|B|A

csm wcf obj INDEX -o KEY_WORD Object Index

csm wcf obj INDEX -g KEY_WORD Group Index

csm wcf obj INDEX -w E|D|P|B

csm wcf obj INDEX -s CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP

csm wcf obj INDEX -u CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP


Parameter Description show Display the web content filter profiles.

Look

Cache

Display the license information of WCF.

Set the cache level for the profile.

Server WCF_SERVER

Msg MSG setdefault obj

INDEX

- v

-a

-n

PROFILE_NAME

-l

Set web content filter server.

Set the administration message.

MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message itself.

Return to default settings for all of the profile.

Specify the object profile.

Specify the index number of web content filter profile, from 1 to 8.

View the web content filter profile.

Set the action of web content filter profile, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.

Set the profile name.

Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)

It means the log type of the profile. They are:

P: Pass,


-o

KEY_WORD_Object_Index

-g

KEY_WORD_Group_Index

-w

B: Block,

A: All,

N: None

Set the keyword object.

Specify the index number of the object profile.

Set the keyword group.

Specify the index number of the group profile.

Set the action for the black and white list.

E:Enable,

D:Disable,

P:Pass,

B:Block

It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP. -s

-u

WEB_GROUP

It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.

Child_Protection, Leisure, Business, Chating, Computer Internet,

Other

CATEGORY Includes:

Alcohol & Tobacco, Criminal Activity, Gambling, Hate & Intoleranc,

Illegal Drug, Nudity, Pornography/Sexually Explicit, Weapons,

Violence, School Cheating,Sex Education, Tasteless, Child Abuse

Imges, Entertainment, Games, Sports, Travel, Leisure & Recreation,

Fashin & Beauty, Business, Job Search, Web-based Emai, Chat,

Instant Messaging, Anonymizers, Forums & Newsgroups, Computers

& Technology, Download Sites, Streaming Media & Downloads,

Phishing & Fraud, Search Engines & Portals, Social Networking,

Spam Sites,Malware, Botnets, Hacking, Illegal Software,

Information Security,Peer-to-eer, Advertisements & Pop-Ups, Arts,

Transportation, Compromised, Dating & Personals, , Education,

Finance, Government,Health & Medcine, News, Non-profits &

NGOs, Personal Sites,Politics, Real Estate, Rligion, Restaurants &

Dining,Shopping, Translators, General, Cults,Greetig cards, Image

Sharing, Network Errors, Parked Domains, Private IP Addresses)


536

E x a m p l e

> csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[test_wcf]

[]White/Black list

Action:[block]


--- -------- ---------------------------------


--- -------- ---------------------------------

Action:[block]

Log:[block]

------------------------------------------------------------------

------------- child Protection Group:

[v]Alcohol & Tobacco [v]Criminal & Activity [v]Gambling

[v]Hate & Intolerance [v]Illegal Drug [v]Nudity

[v]Pornography & Sexually explicit [v]Violence

[v]Weapons

[v]School Cheating [v]Sex Education [v]Tasteless

[v]Child Abuse Images

------------------------------------------------------------------

------------- leisure Group:

[ ]Entertainment [ ]Games [ ]Sports

[ ]Travel [ ]Leisure & Recreation [ ]Fashion & Beauty

.

.

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : c s m d n s f f

It means to configure the settings regarding to DNS filter.

S y n t t a x

csm dnsf enable ON|OFF

csm dnsf syslog N|P|B|A csm dnsf service WCF_PROFILE csm dnsf service_ucf UCF_PROFILE csm dnsf time CACHE_TIME

csm dnsf blockpage show/on/off csm dnsf profile_show

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -l N|P|B|A


csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -w WCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -u UCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME


Parameter Description enable Enable or disable DNS Filter.

ON: enable.

OFF: disable. syslog Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog.

P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

N: None. No record will be sent to Syslog. service WCF_PROFILE time CACHE_TIME

WCF_PROFILE: Specify a WCF profile as the base of DNS filtering.

Type a number to indicate the index number of WCF profile (1 is first profile, 2 is second profile, and so on ...).

CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for

DNS filter. blockpage profile_show profile_edit

-n PROFILE_NAME

-l N|P|B|A

DNS sends block page for redirect port. When a web page is blocked by DNS filter, the router system will send a message page to describe that the page is not allowed to be visisted.

ON: Enable the function of displaying message page.

OFF: Disable the function of displaying message page.

SHOW: Display the function of displaying message page is ON or

OFF.

Display the table of the DNS filter profile.

Modify the content of the DNS filter profile.

PROFILE_NAME: Type the name of the DNS filter profile that you want to modify.

Specify the log type of the profile.

P: Pass.

B: Block.

A: All.

N: None.

-w WCF_PROFILE

-u UCF_PROFILE

-c CACHE_TIME

WCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the WCF profile.

UCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the UCF profile.

-c means to set the cache time for DNS filter.

CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for

DNS filter.

E x a m p l l e

> csm dnsf service 2 dns service set up!!!

>csm dnsf service 3 wcf profile 3 is empty.....

>csm dnsf cachetime 1


538 dns cache time set up!!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : d d n s l l o g

Displays the DDNS log.

E x a m p l l e

>ddns log

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : d d n s t t i i m e

Sets and displays the DDNS time.

S y n t t a x

ddns time <update in minutes>



Update in minutes Type the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400 .

E x a m p l l e

> ddns time ddns time <update in minutes>

Valid: 1 ~ 14400

%Now: 14400

> ddns time 1000 ddns time <update in minutes>

Valid: 1 ~ 14400

%Now: 1000

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : d o s

This command allows users to configure the settings for DoS defense system.

S y n t t a x dos [-V | D | A] dos [-s ATTACK_F [THRESHOLD][ TIMEOUT]]

dos [-a | e [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0] | d [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0]]



-V View the configuration of DoS defense system.

-D

-A

-s

Deactivate the DoS defense system.

Activate the DoS defense system.

ATTACK_F

Enable the defense function for a specific attack and set its parameter(s).

Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or portscan, e.g., synflood,


THRESHOLD

TIMEOUT

-a

-e

ATTACK_0

-d udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.

It means the packet rate (packet/second) that a flooding attack will be detected. Set a value larger than 20.

It means the time (seconds) that a flooding attack will be blocked.

Set a value larger than 5.

Enable the defense function for all attacks listed in ATTACK_0.

Enable defense function for a specific attack(s).

Specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.

Disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).

E x a m p l l e

>dos –A

The Dos Defense system is Activated

>dos –s synflood 50 10

Synflood is enabled! Threshold=50 <pke/sec> timeout=10 <pke/sec>


540

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : e x i i t

Type this command will leave telnet window.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : I I n t t e r n e t t

This command allows you to configure detailed settings for WAN connection.

S y n t t a x

internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



-W n W means to set WAN interface.

1=WAN1, 2=WAN2,…. Default is WAN1.

-M n M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means different modes (represented by 0 – 3) n=0: Offline n=1: PPPoE n=2: Dynamic IP n=3: Static IP n=4: PPTP with Dynamic IP, n=5: PPTP with Static IP, n=6: L2TP with Dynamic IP n=7: L2TP with Static IP n=A: 3G/4G USB Modem(PPP mode), n=B: 3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP mode)



-S <isp name>

-P <on/off>

-u <username>

-p <password>

-a n

Set ISP Name (max. 23 characters).

Enable PPPoE Service.

Set username (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.

Set password (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.

-t n

-i <ip address>

-w <ip address>

-n <netmask>

-g <gateway>

It means to set PPP Authentication Type and n means different types (represented by 0-1). n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting) n=1: PAP Only

Set connection duration and n means different conditions. n=-1: Always-on n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds)

It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here for CPE (PPPoE client).

If you type 0.0.0.0 as the <ip address>, ISP will assign suitable IP address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router will use that one as a fixed IP.

It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection. Please type an IP address here for WAN port.

It means to assign netmask for WAN connection. You have to type

255.255.255.xxx (x is changeable) as the netmask for WAN port.

Assign gateway IP for such WAN connection.


-V

-C <sim pin code>

-O <init string>

-T <init string2>

-D <dial string>

-v <service name>

-m <ppp username>

-o <ppp password>

-e n

-q n

-x n

-y n

-z n

-Q <mode>

-I <ping ip>

-L n

-E <sim pin code>

-G <mode>

-N <apn name>

-U n

View Internet Access profile.

Set (PPP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 15 characters).

Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String (max. 47 characters).

Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String2 (max. 47 characters)

Set (PPP mode) Modem Dial String (max. 31 characters).

Set (PPP mode) Service Name (max. 23 characters).

Set (PPP mode) PPP Username (max. 63 characters).

Set (PPP mode) PPP Password (max. 62 characters).

Set (PPP mode) PPP Authentication Type. n= 0: PAP/CHAP (default),

1: PAP Only

(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-One

(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Two

(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Three

(PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Four

Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Mode.

<mode>

0: ARP Detect;

1: Ping Detect

Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Ping IP.

<ping ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: WAN Connection Detection Ping IP

Set (PPP mode) WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value.

Set (DHCP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters).

Set (DHCP mode) Network Mode.

<mode>

0: 4G/3G/2G;

1: 4G Only;

2: 3G Only;

3: 2G Only

Set (DHCP mode) APN Name (max. 47 characters)

(DHCP mode) MTU(1000-1440)

E x a m p l l e

>internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.0

WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA

WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom

WAN1 Username set to username

WAN1 Password set successful

WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP

WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on

WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0

> internet -V

WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE

ISP Name: tcom

Username: username

Authentication: PAP/CHAP


542

Idle Timeout: -1

WAN IP: Dynamic IP

> internet -W 1 -M 1 -u link1 -p link1 -a 0

You are going to watching and setting in WAN 1

WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA

WAN1 Username set to link1

WAN1 Password set successful

WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p p u b s u b n e t t

This command allows users to enable or disable the IP routing subnet for your router.

S y n t t a x

ip pubsubnet <Enable/Disable>



Enable Enable the function.

Disable Disable the function.

E x a m p l e

> ip 2ndsubnet enable public subnet enabled!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p p u b a d d r

This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router.

S y n t t a x

ip pubaddr ?

ip pubaddr <public subnet IP address>



? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet IP address. public subnet IP address Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you specified as the public subnet IP address.

E x a m p l e

> ip pubaddr ?

% ip addr <public subnet IP address>

% Now: 192.168.0.1

> ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5

% Set public subnet IP address done !!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p p u b m a s k


This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router.

S y n t t a x

ip pubmask ?

ip pubmask <public subnet mask>



? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet mask. public subnet IP address Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you specified as the public subnet mask.

E x a m p l l e

> ip pubmask ?

% ip pubmask <public subnet mask>

% Now: 255.255.255.0

> ip pubmask 255.255.0.0

% Set public subnet mask done !!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p a u x

This command is used for configuring WAN IP Alias.

S y n t t a x

ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool][wanX]

ip aux remove [index]


Parameter Description add Create a new WAN IP address. remove

IP

Delete an existed WAN IP address.

It means the auxiliary WAN IP address.

Join to NAT Pool wanX index

0 (disable) or 1 (enable).

Add or remove an address for WAN interface.

Type the index number of the table displayed on your screen.

E x a m p l l e

> ip aux add 192.168.1.65 1

% 192.168.1.65 has added in index 3.

When you type ip aux?, the current auxiliary WAN IP Address table will be shown as the following:

Index no. Status IP address IP pool

----------------------------------------------


544

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p a d d r

This command allows users to set/add a specified LAN IP your router.

S y n t t a x

ip addr [IP address]



IP address The LAN IP address.

E x a m p l l e

>ip addr 192.168.50.1

% Set IP address OK !!!

Info When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP server.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p n m a s k

This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router.

S y n t t a x

ip nmask [IP netmask]



IP netmask The netmask of LAN IP.

E x a m p l e

> ip nmask 255.255.0.0

% Set IP netmask OK !!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p a r p

ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.

S y n t t a x

ip arp add [IP address] [MAC address] [LAN or WAN]

ip arp del [IP address] [LAN or WAN] ip arp flush


ip arp status

ip arp accept [0/1/2/3/4/5status]

ip arp setCacheLife [time]

In which, arp add allows users to add a new IP address into the ARP table; arp del allows users to remove an IP address; arp flush allows users to clear arp cache; arp status allows users to review current status for the arp table; arp accept allows to accept or reject the source

/destination MAC address; arp setCacheLife allows users to configure the duration in which

ARP caches can be stored on the system. If ip arp setCacheLife is set with “60”, it means you have an ARP cache at 0 second. Sixty seconds later without any ARP messages received, the system will think such ARP cache is expired. The system will issue a few ARP request to see if this cache is still valid.



IP address It means the LAN IP address.

MAC address

LAN or WAN

0/1/2/3/4/5

Time

It means the MAC address of your router.

It indicates the direction for the arp function.

0: disable to accept illegal source mac address

1: enable to accept illegal source mac address

2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address

3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address

4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table

5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table status: display the setting status.

Available settings will be 10, 20, 30,....2550 seconds.

E x a m p l l e

> ip arp status

[ARP Table]

Index IP Address MAC Address Netbios Name Interface VLAN

Port

1 192.168.1.5 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE LAN1

VLAN0 P1

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p d h c p c

This command is available for WAN DHCP.

S y n t t a x

ip dhcpc option

ip dhcpc option -h|l

ip dhcpc option -d [idx] ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -v [option value] ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -x "[option value]"

ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -a [option value]

ip dhcpc option -u [idx unmber]


ip dhcpc release [wan number]

ip dhcpc renew [wan number]

ip dhcpc status


Parameter Description option It is an optional setting for DHCP server.

-h: display usage

-l: list all custom set DHCP options

-d: delete custom dhcp client option by index number

-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable

-w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1)

-c: set option number: 0~255

-v: set option value by string

-x: set option value by raw byte (hex)

-u: update by index number release renew status

It means to release current WAN IP address.

It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another new one.

It displays current status of DHCP client.

E x a m p l e

>ip dhcpc status

I/F#3 DHCP Client Status:

DHCP Server IP : 172.16.3.7

546

Secondary DNS : 0.0.0.0

Leased Time T1 : 129600

Leased Time T2 : 226800

Leased Elapsed : 259194

Leased Elapsed T1 : 129594

Leased Elapsed T2 : 226794

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p p i i n g

This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2 for verifying if the WAN connection is OK or not.

S y n t t a x

ip ping [IP address] [WAN1/WAN2]



IP address It means the WAN IP address.

WAN1/WAN2 It means the WAN interface that the above IP address passes


through.

E x a m p l l e

>ip ping 172.16.3.229 WAN1

Pinging 172.16.3.229 with 64 bytes of Data:

Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms



Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <0% loss>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p t t r a c e r t t

This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host.

S y n t t a x

ip tracert [Host/IP address] [WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5] [Udp/Icmp]



IP address The target IP address.

WAN1/WAN2

Udp/Icmp

It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes through.

The UDP or ICMP.

E x a m p l l e

>ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1

Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max

3 Request Time out.

4 168.95.90.66 50ms

5 211.22.38.134 50ms

6 220.128.2.62 50ms

Trace complete

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p t t e l l n e t t

This command allows users to access specified device by telnet.

S y n t t a x

ip telnet [IP address][Port]



IP address Type the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device.

Port Type a port number (e.g., 23).

Available settings: 0 ~65535.

E x a m p l e

> ip telnet 172.17.3.252 23


548

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p r i i p

This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of IP.

S y n t t a x

ip rip [0/1/2]



0/1/2 0 means disable;

1 means LAN1 and 2 means IP Routed.

E x a m p l e

> ip rip 1

%% Set RIP LAN1.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p w a n r i i p

This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP.

S y n t t a x

ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1]


Parameter Description ifno It means the connection interface.

1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5

Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs.

-e It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN interface.

1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP.

0: Disable the function.

E x a m p l l e

> ip wanrip ?

Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>

<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2

3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5

-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable

Now status:

WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable





> ip wanrip 5 -e 1


> ip wanrip ?

Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>

<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2

3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5

-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable

Now status:





WAN[5] Rip Protocol enable

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p r o u t t e

This command allows users to set static route.

S y n t t a x

ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype]

ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype]

ip route status

ip route cnc

ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?]

ip route clean [1/0]


Parameter Description add It means to add an IP address as static route. del status

It means to delete specified IP address.

It means current status of static route. dst netmask gateway ifno

It means the IP address of the destination.

It means the netmask of the specified IP address.

It means the gateway of the connected router.

It means the connection interface.

3=WAN1, 4=WAN2, 5=WAN3, 6=WAN4 rtype cnc default clean

It means the type of the route. default : default route; static: static route.

It means current IP range for CNC Network.

Set WAN1/WAN2/off as current default route.

Clean all of the route settings.

1: Enable the function.


E x a m p l l e

> ip route add 172.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.4 3 static


> ip route status

Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private

C~ 192.168.9.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, DMZ

C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN1

S 172.16.2.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 172.16.2.4, WAN1


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p i i g m p _ p r o x y

This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server.

S y n t t a x

ip igmp_proxy set

ip igmp_proxy reset

ip igmp_proxy wan

ip igmp_proxy query

ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1]

ip igmp_proxy status


Parameter Description set It means to enable proxy server. reset wan query

It means to disable proxy server.

It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service. ppp status

It means to set IGMP general query interval.

The default value is 125000 ms.

0 – No need to set IGMP with PPP header.

1 – Set IGMP with PPP header.

It means to display current status for proxy server.

E x a m p l l e

This command is for setting IGMP General Query Interval

The default value is 125000 ms

Current Setting is:130000 ms

> ip igmp_proxy set

% ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON

> ip igmp_proxy status

%% ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON

%%% igmp_proxy WAN:

239.255.255.250 state=1

239.255.255.250 timer=0


552

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p i i g m p _ s n o o p

This command is used to enable/disable igmp snoop server.

S y n t t a x

ip igmp_snoop enable

ip igmp_snoop disable

ip igmp_snoop status

ip igmp_snoop table

ip igmp_snoop txquery [on|off] [v2|v3]

ip igmp_snoop mode [hw/sw]

ip igmp_snoop chkleave [on|off]

ip igmp_snoop separate [on|off]

ip igmp_snoop portchk [on|off]


Parameter Description enable It means to enable proxy server. disable status

It means to disable proxy server.

It means to display current status for proxy server. table txquery [on|off] [v2|v3] mode [hw/sw] chkleave [on|off] separate [on|off]

Display the whole table of IGMP Snoop configuration.

IGMP query will be sent out to LAN periodically.

Make IGMP snooping work on software or hardware.

Off – Vigor router will drop LEAVE if clients still on the same group.

On – IGMP packets will be separated by NAT/Bridge mode.

E x a m p l l e

> ip igmp_snoop mode sw

igmp snooping works on SW mode now.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p d m z

Specify MAC address of certain device as the DMZ host.

S y n t t a x

ip dmz [mac]


Parameter Description mac It means the MAC address of the device that you want to specify.

E x a m p l l e

>ip dmz ?

% ip dmz <mac>, now : 00-00-00-00-00-00

> ip dmz 11-22-33-44-55-66

> ip dmz ?

% ip dmz <mac>, now : 11-22-33-44-55-66


>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p d m z s w i i t t c h

This command is to enable /disable private IP DMZ or Active True IP DMZ for DMZ host.

S y n t t a x

ip dmzswitch off

ip dmzswitch private

ip dmaswitch active_trueip


Parameter Description off Disable the function of DMZ host. private

Active_trueip

Enable private IP address of the DMZ host.

Enable active true IP address of the DMZ host.

E x a m p l l e

> ip dmzswitch ?

%% ip dmzswitch [off|private|active_trueip], DMZ is OFF

> ip dmzswitch private

%% ip dmzswitch [off|private|trueip|active_trueip], PRIVATE IP DMZ is

ON

> ip dmzswitch trueip

> ip dmzswitch active_trueip

%% ip dmzswitch [off|private|trueip|active_trueip], ACTIVE TRUE IP DMZ is ON

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p s e s s i i o n

This command allows users to set maximum session limit number for the specified IP; set message for exceeding session limit and set how many seconds the IP session block works.

S y n t t a x

ip session on

ip session off

ip session default [num]

ip session defaultp2p [num]

ip session status

ip session show

ip session timer [num]

ip session [block/unblock][IP]

ip session [add/del][IP1-IP2][num][p2pnum]




554 on off default [num]

Defautlp2p [num] status show timer [num]

[block/unblock][IP] add del

IP1-IP2 num p2pnum

Turn on session limit for each IP.

Turn off session limit for each IP.

Set the default number of session num limit.

Set the default number of session num limit for p2p.

Display the current settings.

Display all session limit settings in the IP range.

Set when the IP session block works.

The unit is second.

Block/unblock the specified IP address.

Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router.

Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the router.

Add the session limits in an IP range.

Delete the session limits in an IP range.

It means the range of IP address specified for this command.

It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100.

It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 50 for P2P.

E x a m p l l e

>ip session default 100

> ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50

> ip session on

> ip session status

IP range:

192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.100 : 100

Current ip session limit is turn on

Current default session number is 100

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p b a n d w i i d t t h

This command allows users to set maximum bandwidth limit number for the specified IP.

S y n t t a x

ip bandwidth on

ip bandwidth off

ip bandwidth default [tx_rate][rx_rate]

ip bandwidth status

ip bandwidth show

ip bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2][tx][rx][shared]


Parameter Description on Turn on the IP bandwidth limit.


off Turn off the IP bandwidth limit. default [tx_rate][rx_rate] Set default tx and rx rate of bandwidth limit. The range is from 0 –

65535 Kpbs. status show add del

IP1-IP2 tx rx shared

Display the current settings.

Display all the bandwidth limits settings within the IP range.

Add the bandwidth within the IP range.

Delete the bandwidth within the IP range.

It means the range of IP address specified for this command.

Set transmission rate for bandwidth limit.

Set receiving rate for bandwidth limit.

It means that the bandwidth will be shared for the IP range.

E x a m p l l e

> ip bandwidth default 200 800

> ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60

> ip bandwidth status

IP range:

192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K

Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off

Auto adjustment is off

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p b i i n d m a c

This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.

S y n t t a x

ip bindmac on

ip bindmac off

ip bindmac strict_on

ip bindmac show

ip bindmac add [IP][MAC][Comment]

ip bindmac del [IP]/all


Parameter Description on off

Turn on IP bandmac policy. Even the IP is not in the policy table, it can still access into network.

Turn off all the bindmac policy. strict_on show

It means that only those IP address in IP bindmac policy table can access into network.

Display the IP address and MAC address of the pair of binded one.


add del

IP

MAC

Comment

All

Add one IP bindmac.

Delete one IP bindmac.

Type the IP address for binding with specified MAC address.

Type the MAC address for binding with the IP address specified.

Type words as a brief description.

Delete all the IP bindmac settings.

E x a m p l e

> ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test

> ip bindmac show ip bind mac function is turned ON

IP : 192.168.1.46 bind MAC : 00-50-7f-22-33-55 Comment : just


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p m a x n a t t u s e r

This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users.

S y n t t a x

ip maxnatuser user no



User no A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router supports.

0 – It means no limitation.

E x a m p l l e

> ip maxnatuser 100

% Max NAT user = 100

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p p o l l i i c y _ r t t

This command is used to set the IP policy route profile.

S y n t t a x

ip policy_rt [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]





General Setup for Policy Route

-i [value] Specify an index number for setting policy route profile.

Value: 1 to 60. “-1” means to get a free policy index automatically.

-e [0/1]

-o [value]

-1 [any/range]

0: Disable the selected policy route profile.

1: Enable the selected policy route profile.

Determine the operation of the policy route.

Value: add – Create a new policy rotue profile. del – Remove an existed policy route profile. edit – Modify an existed policy route profile. flush – Reset policy route to default setting.

Specify the source IP mode.

Range: Indicate a range of IP addresses.

Any: It means any IP address will be treated as source IP address.

-2

[any/ip_range/ip_subnet/do main]

-3 [any/range]

Specify the destination IP mode.

Any: No need to specify an IP address for any IP address will be treated as destination IP address. ip_range: Indicates a range of IP addresses. ip_subnet: Indicates the IP subnet. domain: Indicates the domain name.

Specify the destination port mode.

Range: Indicate a range of port number.


558

-g [value]

-l [value]

-t [value]

-n [0/1]

-a [0/1]

-f [value]

-G [default/specific]

-L [default/specific]

-s [value]

-S [value]

-d [value]

-D [value]

-p [value]

-P [value]

-y [value]

-I [value]

-b [value]

Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port.

Specify the gateway mode.

Specify the failover gateway mode.

Indicate the source IP start.

Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0)

Indicate the source IP end.

Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,

192.168.1.100)

Indicate the destination IP start.


Indicate the destination IP end.

Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,

192.168.2.100)

Indicate the destination port start.

Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port start (e.g., 1000).

Indicate the destination port end.

Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port end (e.g., 2000).

Indicate the priority of the policy route profile.

Value: Type a number (0 ~ 250). The default value is “150”.

Indicate the interface specified for the policy route profile.

Value: Available interfaces include,

LAN1 ~ LAN8, IP_Routed_Subnet,

DMZ_Subnet,

WAN1 ~ WAN5,

VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,

WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8

Indicate the gateway IP address.


Indicate the failover IP address.


It means “protocol”.

Value: Available settings include “TCP”, “UDP”, “TCP/UDP”, “ICMP” and “Any”.

Indicates the function of “Force NAT”.



Indicates to enable the function of failover.



It means to specify the interface for failover.

Value: Avaialbe interfaces include,

NO_FAILOVER,

Default_WAN,

Policy1 ~ Policy60

LAN1 ~ LAN8

IP_Routed_Subnet,

DMZ_Subnet,

WAN1 ~ WAN5,

VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,

WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8

It means “failback”.


Value: Available settings include,

0: Disable the function of “failback”.

1: Enable the function of “failback”.

-v: View current failback setting.

Diagnose for Policy Route

-s [value]

-d [value]

-p [value]

-t [value]

It means “source IP”.

Value: Available settings include:

Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0).

It means “destination IP”.

Value : Available settings include:

Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: Specify an IP address.

It means “destination port”.

Value: Specify a number or type Any (indicating any number).

It means “protocol”.

Value: Available settings include “ICMP”, “TCP”, “UDP” and “Any”.

E x a m p l l e

> ip policy_rt diagnose -s 192.168.1.100 -d any -p any -t ICMP

-------------------------------------------------

Matched Route (Priority)

-------------------------------------------------

* No_Match

-------------------------------------------------

Matched Policy (Priority)

-------------------------------------------------

* Policy_1 (200)

* Conclusion:The packet was dropped because the send-to interface of the mat ched policy "policy 1" was inactive and there was no failover setting

> ip policy_rt -i -1 -o add -1 range -s 192.168.1.10 -S 192.168.1.20 -2 ip_range –d 202.211.100.10 -D 202.211.100.20 -g 202.211.100.1 -I WAN2


560

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p l l a n D N S R e s

This command is used to set LAN DNS profile.

S y n t t a x

ip lanDNSRes [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]





-a <IP Address>

-c <CNAME>

-d <address mapping index number>

-e <0/1>

Set IP Address that domain name mapped.

Set CNAME value.

Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.

0: disable the selected LAN DNS profile.

1: enable the selected LAN DNS profile.

Type the index number of the profile. -i <profile setting index number>

-l

-n <domain name>

-p <profile name>

-r

List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message).

Set domain name.

Set profile name for LAN DNS.

Reset the settings for selected profile.

-z

1:reply only same subnet packet.

Update LAN DNS config to DNS Cache.

E x a m p l l e

> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -p test

% Configure Set1's Profile:test

> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -l

% Idx: 1

% State: Disable

% Profile: test

% Domain Name:

% -------- Address Mapping Table --------

% Not Set Address Mapping.

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p d n s f f o r w a r d

This command is used to set LAN DNS profile for conditional DNS forwarding.

S y n t t a x

ip dnsforward [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]




[<command><parameter>|…

]

The available commands with parameters are listed below.


-a <IP Address>

-d <DNS server mapping index number>

-e <0/1>

Set forwarded DNS server IP Address.

Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.

0: disable such function.

1: enable such function.

Type the index number of the profile. -i <profile setting index number>

-l

-n <domain name>

-p <profile name>

-r

List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message).

Set domain name.

Set profile name for LAN DNS.

Reset the settings for selected profile.

E x a m p l e

> ip dnsforward -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com

% Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com

> ip dnsforward -i 1 -a 172.16.1.1

% Configure Set1's IP:172.16.1.1

> ip dnsforward -i 1 -l

% Idx: 1

% State: Disable

% Profile: test

% Domain Name: ftp.drayTek.com

% DNS Server IP: 172.16.1.1

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 a d d r

This command allows users to set the IPv6 address for your router.

S y n t t a x

ip6 addr -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]

ip6 addr -d [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]

ip6 addr -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]



-s It means to add a static ipv6 address.

-d

-a

It means to delete an ipv6 address.

It means to show current address(es) status.

-u prefix prefix-length

LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#

It means to show only unicast addresses.

It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.

It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.

It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.


562

E x a m p l e

> ip6 addr -a

LAN

Unicast Address:

FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link)

Multicast Address:

FF02::2

FF02::1:FF00:0

FF02::1

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 d h c p r e q _ o p t t

This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client.

S y n t t a x

ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]


-n

-i

-I

-p

-S

-d

-D

Parameter Description req_opt It means option-request.

LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.



-a

-s

It means to show current DHCPv6 status.

It means to ask the SIP.

-P

-b

-B

-r

Parameter

It means to ask the SIP name.

It means to ask the DNS setting.

It means to ask the DNS name.

It means to ask NTP.

It means to ask NIS.

It means to ask NIS name.

It means to ask NISP.

It means to ask NISP name.

It means to ask BCMCS.

It means to ask BCMCS name.

It means to ask refresh time.

1: the parameter related to the request will be displayed.

0: the parameter related to the request will not be displayed.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -S 1

> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -r 1

> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -a

% Interface WAN2 is set to request following DHCPv6 options:

% sip name


>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 d h c p c l l i i e n t

This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.

S y n t t a x

ip6 dhcp client [WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]


Parameter Description client It means the dhcp client settings.

[<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.


-a

-p [IAID]

-n [IAID]


It means to request identity association ID for Prefix Delegation.

It means to request identity association ID for Non-temporary

Address.

It means to send rapid commit to server. -c [parameter]

-i [parameter]

-e[parameter]

It means to send information request to server.

It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client.

1: Enable

0: Disable

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –p 2008::1

> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a

Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:

DHCPv6 client enabled

request IA_PD whose IAID equals to 2008

> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –n 1023456

> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a

Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:

DHCPv6 client enabled

request IA_NA whose IAID equals to 2008

> system reboot

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 d h c p s e r v e r

This command allows you to configure DHCPv6 server.

S y n t t a x

ip6 dhcp server [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]

S y n t t a x D e s c r i i p t i i o n server

[<command>

<parameter>|…]

It means the dhcp server settings.




564

-a

-i<pool_min_addr>

-x<pool_max_addr>

-d<addr>

-D<addr>

-c<parameter>

-e<parameter>


It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool.

It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool.

It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address.

It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address.

It means to send rapid commit to server.

1: Enable

0: Disable

It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.

1: Enable

0: Disable

E x a m p l e

> ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1

> ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1

> ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3

> ip6 dhcp server -a

% Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings:

% DHCPv6 server disabled

% maximum address of the pool: FF02::3

% minimum address of the pool: FF02::1

% 1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 i i n t t e r n e t t

This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.

S y n t t a x

ip6 internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



-W n W means to set WAN interface and n means different selections.

Default is WAN1. n=1: WAN1 n=2: WAN2 n=3: WAN3

-M n

.

. n=X: WANx

M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means different modes (represented by 0 – 5) n= 0: Offline, n=1: PPP, n=2: TSPC, n=3: AICCU, n=4: DHCPv6,


[<command>

<parameter>|…]

-m n

-u <username>

-p <password>

-s <server>

-d <server>

-D <server>

-t <dhcp/ra/none>

-V

-o n=5: Static n=6:6in4-Static n=7:6rd



It means to set IPv6 MTU.

N = any value (0 means “unspecified”).

It means to set Username.

<username>= type a name as the username (maximum 63 characters).

It means to set Password.

<password> = type a password (maximum 63 characters).

It means to set Tunnel Server IP.

<server>= IPv4 address or URL (maximum 63 characters).

It means to set the primary DNS Server IP.

<server>= type an IPv6 address for first DNS server.

It means to set the secondary DNS Server IP.

<server>= type an IPv6 address for second DNS server.

It means to set IPv6 PPP WAN test mode for DHCP or RADVD.

<dhcp/ra/none>= type IPv6 address.

It means to view IPv6 Internet Access Profile.

It means to set AICCU always on.

1=On,

0=Off

E x a m p l e

> ip6 internet -W 2 -M 2 -u 88886666 -p draytek123456 –s amsterdam.freenet6.net

This setting will take effect after rebooting.

Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

> system reboot

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 n e i i g h

This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table.

S y n t t a x

ip6 neigh -s[ inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]

ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]

ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]



-s It means to add a neighbour.

-d

-a

It means to delete a neighbour.

It means to show neighbour status. inet6_addr eth_addr

Type an IPv6 address

Type submask address.


LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the neighbor.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 neigh -s 2001:2222:3333::1111 00:50:7F:11:ac:22:WAN2

Neighbour 2001:2222:3333::1111 successfully added!

> ip6 neigh -a

I/F ADDR MAC STATE

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

LAN FF02::1 33-33-00-00-00-01 CONNECTED

WAN2 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED

WAN2 2001:2222:3333::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED

WAN2 2001:2222:6666::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED

WAN2 :: 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED

LAN :: NONE

>


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p 6 p n e i i g h

This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour.

S y n t t a x

ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]

ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]

ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]



-s It means to add a proxy neighbour.

-d

-a

It means to delete a proxy neighbour.

It means to show proxy neighbour status. inet6_addr

LAN|WAN1|WAN2

Type an IPv6 address

Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 neigh -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 LAN

% Neighbour FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 successfully added!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 r o u t t e

This command allows you to

S y n t t a x

ip6 route -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [gateway] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#> [-D]

ip6 route -d [prefix] [prefix-length]

ip6 route -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]



-s It means to add a route.

-d

-a

It means to delete a route.

It means to show the route status.

-D prefix prefix-length gateway

LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#

It means that such route will be treated as the default route.

It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.

It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.

It means the gateway of the router.

It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 route -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500 16 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 LAN

% Route FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500/16 successfully added!

> ip6 route -a LAN


568

PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_ I/F METRIC STATE FLAGS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

FE80::/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U

0 ::

FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U

0 ::

FE80::/64 LAN 256 UNICAST U

0

FE80::/16 LAN 1024 UNICAST UGA

0 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100

FF02::1/128 LAN 0 UNICAST UC

0 FF02::1

FF00::/8 LAN 256 UNICAST U

0

::/0 LAN -1 UNREACHABLE !

0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 p i i n g

This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a host.

S y n t t a x

ip6 ping [IPV6 address/Host] [LAN/WAN1/WAN2]



IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.

LAN/WAN1/WAN2 It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 ping 2001:4860:4860::8888 WAN2

Pinging 2001:4860:4860::8888 with 64 bytes of Data:

Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms





Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <% loss>

>


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p 6 t t r a c e r t t

This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host.

S y n t t a x

ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host]



IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.

E x a m p l e

> ip6 tracert 2001:4860:4860::8888 traceroute to 2001:4860:4860::8888, 30 hops max through protocol ICMP

1 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 340 ms

2 2001:4DE0:1000:A22::1 330 ms

3 2001:4DE0:A::1 330 ms

4 2001:4DE0:1000:34::1 340 ms

5 2001:7F8:1: :A501:5169:1 330 ms

6 2001:4860::1:0:4B3 350 ms

7 2001:4860::8:0:2DAF 330 ms

8 2001:4860::2:0:66

E

340 ms

9 Request timed out. *

10 2001:4860:4860::8888 350 ms

Trace complete.

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 t t s p c

This command allows you to display TSPC status.

S y n t t a x

ip6 tspc [ifno]



Ifno=1 (means WAN1)

Info=2 (means WAN2)

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 tspc 2

Local Endpoint v4 Address : 111.243.177.223

Local Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b9

Router DNS name : 8886666.broker.freenet6.net

Remote Endpoint v4 Address :81.171.72.11

Remote Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b8

Tspc Prefixlen : 56

Tunnel Broker: Amsterdam.freenet.net


570

Status: Connected

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p 6 r a d v d

This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server.

S y n t t a x

Ip6 radvd –s [1|0] [lifetime]

ip6 radvd –V



-s It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD server.

1: Enable the RADVD server.

0: Disable the RADVD server.

Lifetime It means to set the lifetime.

The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds.

It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix. The maximum value corresponds to 18.2 hours. A lifetime of 0 indicates that the router is not a default router and should not appear on the default router list.

Type the number (unit: second) you want.

-V

-r

-r [num]

It means to show the RADVD configuration.

It means RA default test.

It means RA test for item [num].

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 radvd -s 1 1800

> ip6 radvd -V

% IPv6 Radvd Config:

Radvd : Enable, Default Lifetime : 1800 seconds

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p 6 m n g t

This command allows you to manage the settings for access list.

S y n t t a x ip6 mngt list

ip6 mngt list [add<index> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <index>|flush] ip6 mngt status

ip6 mngt [http|telnet|ping|https|ssh] [on|off]


Parameter Description list It means to show the setting information of the access list. status add

It means to show the status of IPv6 management.

It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute


index management through Internet.

It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6 management. prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing

Internet.

It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix. prefix-length remove flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table. http|telnet|ping|https|ssh These protocols are used for accessing Internet. on|off

It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6 settings.

It means to enable (on) or disable (off) the Internet accessing through http/telnet/ping.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 mngt list add 1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128



> ip6 mngt list

% IPv6 Access List :

Index IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length

========================================

1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128

2 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020 128

3 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080 128

> ip6 mngt status

% IPv6 Remote Management : telnet : off, http : off, ping : off

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p 6 o n l l i i n e

This command allows you to check the online status of IPv6 LAN /WAN.

S y n t t a x

ip6 online [ifno]



0=LAN1

1=WAN1

2=WAN2

E x a m p l e

> ip6 online 0

% LAN 1 online status :

% Interface : UP

% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static




572

% Tx packets = 408, Tx bytes = 32160, Rx packets = 428, Rx bytes =

33636

> ip6 online 1

% WAN 1 online status :

% IPv6 WAN1 Disabled

% Default Gateway : ::

% UpTime : 0:00:00

% Interface : DOWN




% Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 a i i c c u

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of

AICCU.

S y n t t a x

ip6 aiccu [ifno]

ip6 aiccu subnet [add <ifno> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <ifno>|show <info>]



1=WAN1

2=WAN2 add prefix prefix-length remove

It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute management through Internet.

It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing

Internet.

It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix. show

It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6 settings.

It means to display the AICCU status.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 aiccu subnet add 2 2001:1111:0000::1111 64

> ip6 aiccu 2

Status: Connecting

>ip6 aiccu subnet show 2

IPv6 WAN2 AICCU Subnet Prefix Config:

2001:1111::1111/64

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p 6 n t p

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for NTP (Network Time Protocols) server.

S y n t t a x


ip6 ntp –h

ip6 ntp –v

ip6 ntp –p [0/1]



–h It is used to display the usage of such command.

-v

-p <0/1>

It is used to show the NTP state.

It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6.

0 – Auto

1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server.

E x a m p l l e

> ip6 ntp -p 1

% Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p f v i i e w

IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP filter rules.

S y n t t a x

ipf view [-VcdhrtzZ]


-h

-r

-t

-z

-Z


-V It means to show the version of this IP filter.

-c

-d

It means to show the running call filter rules.

It means to show the running data filter rules.

It means to show the hit-number of the filter rules.

It means to show the running call and data filter rules.

It means to display all the information at one time.

It means to clear a filter rule’s statistics.

It means to clear IP filter’s gross statistics.

E x a m p l e

> ipf view -V -c -d ipf: IP Filter: v3.3.1 (1824)

Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1

Running: yes

Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip

Default: pass all, Logging: available

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p f s e t t

This command is used to set general rule for firewall.


574

S y n t t a x

ipf set [Options] ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options]



Options There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c

[SET_NO],… and etc.

[SET_NO], -d

SET_NO

RULE_NO

It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set.

It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 7) of filter rule set.

-v

-c [SET_NO]

-d [SET_NO]

-l [VALUE]

- p [VALUE]

Type “-v” to view the configuration of general set.

It means to setup Call Filter, e.g., -c 2. The range for the index number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).

It means to setup Data Filter, e.g., -d 3 . The range for the index number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).

It means to setup Log Flag, e.g., -l 2

Type “0” to disable the log flag.

Type “1” to display the log of passed packet.

Type “2” to display the log of blocked packet.

Type “3” to display the log of non-matching packet.

It means to setup actions for packet not matching any rule, e.g., -p

1

Type “0” to let all the packets pass;

Type “1” to block all the packets.

-M [P2P_NO]

-U [URL_NO]

-a [AD_SET]

-f [VALUE]

-E [VALUE]

-F [VALUE]

-Q [VALUE]

It means to configure IM/P2P for the packets not matching with any rule, e.g., -M 1



It means to configure URL content filter for the packets not matching with any rule, e.g., -U 1



It means to configure the advanced settings.

It means to accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets.

It means to set the maximum count for session limitation.

It means to configure the load-balance policy.

It means to set the QoS class.

E x a m p l e

> ipf set -c 1 #set call filter start from set 1

Setting saved.

> ipf set -d 2 #set data filter start from set 2

Setting saved.

> ipf set -v

Call Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 1)

Data Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 2)


Log Flag : None

Actions for packet not matching any rule:

Pass or Block : Pass

CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I

Max Sessions Limit: 60000

Current Sessions : 0

Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict

QOS Class : None

APP Enforcement : None

URL Content Filter: None

Load-Balance policy : Auto-select

--------------------------------------------------------------


Window size : 65535

Session timeout : 1440

DrayTek Banner : Enable

---------------------------------------------------------------

Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets : Enable

Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets: Enable

----------------------------------------------------------------

Strict Security Checking

[ ]APP Enforcement

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i i p f r u l l e

This command is used to set filter rule for firewall.

S y n t t a x ipf rule s r [-<command> <parameter> | .

.. ipf rule s r -v


Parameter Description s r

[<command><parameter>|…

]

-e

Such word means Filter Set, range form 1~12.

Such word means Filter Rule, range from 1~7.



It means to enable or disable the rule setting.

0- disable

1- enable

-s o:g <obj>

–s u <Address Type> <Start IP

Address> <End IP Address> |

<Address Mask>

It means to specify source IP object and IP group. o - indicates “object”. g - indicates “group”. obj - indicates index number of object or index number of group.

Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-s g 3" means the third source IP group profile.

It means to configure source IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask. u – It means “user defined”.


576

–d u <Address Type> <Start IP

Address> <End IP Address> |

<Address Mask>

-d o:g <obj>

-S o:g <obj>

-S u <protocol>

<source_port__value>

<destination_port_vale>

-F

Address Type - Type the number (representing different address type).

0 - Subnet Address

1 - Single Address

2 - Any Address

3 - Range Address

Example:

Set Subnet Address => -s u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

Set Single Address => -s u 1 192.168.1.10

Set Any Address => -s u 2

Set Range Address => -s u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15

It means to configure destination IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask. u – It means “user defined”.

Address Type - Type the number (representing different address type).

0 - Subnet Address

1 - Single Address

2 - Any Address

3 - Range Address

Example:

Set Subnet Address => -d u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

Set Single Address => -d u 1 192.168.1.10

Set Any Address => -d u 2

Set Range Address => -d u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15

It means to specify destination IP object and IP group. o – indicates “object”. g – indicates “group”

<obj>– indicates index number of object or index number of group.

Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-d g 1" means the first destination IP group profile.

It means to specify Service Type object and IP group. o – indicates “object”. g – indicates “group”

<obj> – indicates index number of object or index number of group.

Available settings range from 1-96. For example, “-S 0 1" means the first service type object profile.

It means to configure advanced settings for Service Type, such as protocol and port range. u – it means “user defined”.

<protocol> – It means TCP(6),UDP(17), TCP/UDP(255).

<source_port__value> –

1 – Port OP, range is 0-3. 0:= =, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<

3 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is

1-65535.

5 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.

<destination_port_value>:

2 – Port OP, range is 0-3, 0:==, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<

4 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is

1-65535.

6 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.

It means the Filter action you can specify.

0 –Pass Immediately,


-q

-l

-E

-a<index>

-u<index>

-c

-C <Windows Size>

<Session_Timeout>

-v

1 – Block Immediately,

2 – Pass if no further match,

3 – Block if no further match.

It means the classification for QoS.

1– Class 1,

2 – Class 2,

3 – Class 3,

4 – Other

It means load balance policy.

Such function is used for “debug” only.

It means to enable APP Enforcement.

It means to specify which APP Enforcement profile will be applied.

<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 32. “0” means no profile will be applied.

It means to specify which URL Content Filter profile will be applied.

<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 8. “0” means no profile will be applied.

It means to set code page. Different number represents different code page.

0. None

1. ANSI(1250)-Central Europe

2. ANSI(1251)-Cyrillic

3. ANSI(1252)-Latin I

4. ANSI(1253)-Greek

5. ANSI(1254)-Turkish

6. ANSI(1255)-Hebrew

7. ANSI(1256)-Arabic

8. ANSI(1257)-Baltic

9. ANSI(1258)-Viet Nam

10. OEM(437)-United States

11. OEM(850)-Multilingual Latin I

12. OEM(860)-Portuguese

13. OEM(861)-Icelandic

14. OEM(863)-Canadian French

15. OEM(865)-Nordic

16. ANSI/OEM(874)-Thai

17. ANSI/OEM(932)-Japanese Shift-JIS

18. ANSI/OEM(936)-Simplified Chinese GBK

19. ANSI/OEM(949)-Korean

20. ANSI/OEM(950)-Traditional Chinese Big5

It means to set Window size and Session timeout (Minute).

<Windows Size> - Available settings range from 1 ~ 65535.

<Session_Timeout> - Make the best utilization of network resources.

It is used to show current filter/rule settings.

E x a m p l e

> ipf rule 2 1 -e 1 -s "o 1" -d "o 2" -S "o 1" -F 2

> ipf rule 2 1 -v

Filter Set 2 Rule 1:


578

Status : Enable

Comments: xNetBios -> DNS

Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: <null>, <null>, <null>, <null>

Direction : LAN -> WAN

Source IP : Group1,

Destination IP: Group2,

Service Type : TCP/UDPGroup1,

Fragments : Don't Care

Pass or Block : Block Immediately

Branch to Other Filter Set: None

Max Sessions Limit : 32000

Current Sessions : 0

Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict

Qos Class : None

APP Enforcement : None

URL Content Filter : None

Load-Balance policy : Auto-select

Log : Disable

------------------------------------------------------------------

----


Window size : 65535

Session timeout : 1440

DrayTek Banner : Enable

------------------------------------------------------------------

---

Strict Security Checking

[ ]APP Enforcement

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : i p f f f l o w t t r a c k

This command is used to set and view flowtrack sessions.

S y n t t a x

ipf flowtrack set [-re]

ipf flowtrack view [-f]

ipf flowtrack [-i][-p][-t]



-r It means to refresh the flowtrack.

-e It means to enable or disable the flowtrack.

0: Disable

1: Enable


-f

-b

- i [IP address]

-p[value]

-t [value]

It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do not specify any IP address, then all the session state of flowtrack will be displayed.

It means to show all of IP sessions state.

It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55).

It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024).

Available settings are 0 ~ 65535.

It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp).

Available settings include: tcp udp

icmp

E x a m p l l e

>ipf flowtrack set -r

Refresh the flowstate ok

> ipf flowtrack view -f

Start to show the flowtrack sessions state:

ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0

REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:59939 ,ifno=3

proto=17, age=93023180(3920), flag=203

ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:15073 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0

REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:15073 ,ifno=3

proto=17, age=93025100(2000), flag=203

ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11: 7247 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0

REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11: 7247 ,ifno=3

proto=17, age=93020100(7000), flag=203

End to show the flowtrack sessions state

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : L o g

This command allows users to view log for WAN interface such as call log, IP filter log, flush log buffer, etc.

S y n t t a x

log [-cfhiptwx?] [-F a| c | f | w]



-c

-f

-F

It means to show the latest call log.

It means to show the IP filter log.

-h

It means to show the flush log buffer. a: flush all logs c: flush the call log f: flush the IP filter log w: flush the WAN log

It means to show this usage help.


580

-p

-t

-w

-x

It means to show PPP/MP log.

It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer.

It means to show WAN log.

It means to show packet body hex dump.

E x a m p l l e

> log -w

25:36:25.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4

Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Your IP = 0.0.0.0

Next server IP = 0.0.0.0

Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0


Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Your IP = 0.0.0.0




Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Your IP = 0.0.0.0




Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Your IP = 0.0.0.0




Client IP = 0.0.0.0

Your IP = 0.0.0.0

--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]

---

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t f f t t p p o r t

This command allows users to set FTP port for management.

S y n t t a x

mngt ftpport [FTP port]



FTP port It means to type the number for FTP port. The default setting is

21.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt ftpport 21

% Set FTP server port to 21 done.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t h t t t t p p o r t t


This command allows users to set HTTP port for management.

S y n t t a x

mngt httpport [Http port]



Http port It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is

80.

E x a m p l e

> mngt httpport 80

% Set web server port to 80 done.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t h t t t t p s p o r t t

This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.

S y n t t a x

mngt httpsport [Https port]



Https port It means to type the number for HTTPS port. The default setting is

443.

E x a m p l e

> mngt httpsport 443

% Set web server port to 443 done.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t t t e l l n e t p o r t t

This command allows users to set telnet port for management.

S y n t t a x

mngt telnetport [Telnet port]



Telnet port It means to type the number for telnet port. The default setting is

23.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt telnetport 23

% Set Telnet server port to 23 done.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t s s h p o r t

This command allows users to set SSH port for management.


582

S y n t t a x

mngt sshport [ssh port]


Parameter Description ssh port It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is

22.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt sshport 23

% Set ssh port to 23 done.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t f f t t p s e r v e r

This command can enable/disable FTP server.

S y n t t a x

mngt ftpserver [enable]

mngt ftpserver [disable]


Parameter Description enable It means to activate FTP server function. disable It means to inactivate FTP server function.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt ftpserver enable

%% FTP server has been enabled.

> mngt ftpserver disable

%% FTP server has been disabled.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t n o p i i n g

This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet.

S y n t t a x

mngt noping [on]

mngt noping [off]

mngt noping [viewlog]

mngt noping [clearlog]


Parameter Description on All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet. off viewlog

All PING packets will be blocked from LAN PC to Internet.

It means to display a log of ping action, including source MAC and source IP.


clearlog It means to clear the log of ping action.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt noping off

No Ping Packet Out is OFF!!


584

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t d e f f e n s e w o r m

This command can block specified port for passing through the router.

S y n t t a x

mngt defenseworm [on]

mngt defenseworm [off]

mngt defenseworm [add port]

mngt defenseworm [del port]

mngt defenseworm [viewlog]

mngt defenseworm [clearlog]


Parameter Description on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out. off add port

It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet out.

It means to add a new TCP port for block. del port viewlog clearlog

It means to delete a TCP port for block.

It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including source

MAC and source IP.

It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt defenseworm add 21

Add TCP port 21

Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445, 21

> mngt defenseworm del 21

Delete TCP port 21

Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t r m t c f f g

This command can allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. By default, it is not allowed.

S y n t t a x

mngt rmtcfg [status]

mngt rmtcfg [enable]

mngt rmtcfg [disable]

mngt rmtcfg [http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069] [on/off]


Parameter Description status It means to display current setting for your reference. enable disable

It means to allow the system administrators to login from the

Internet.

It means to deny the system administrators to login from the


http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/t r069 on/off

Internet.

It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling or disabling. on – enable the function. off – disable the function.

E x a m p l e

> mngt rmtcfg ftp on

Enable server fail

Remote configure function has been disabled please enable by enter mngt rmtcfg enable

> mngt rmtcfg enable

%% Remote configure function has been enabled.

> mngt rmtcfg ftp on

%% FTP server has been enabled.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t l l a n a c c e s s

This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port.

S y n t t a x

mngt lanaccess -e [0/1] –s [value] –i [value]

mngt lanaccess –f

mngt lanaccess –d

mngt lanaccess –v

mngt lanaccess –h


-f

-d

-v

-h


-e[0/1] It means to enable/disable the function.

0-disable the function.

1-enable the function.

-s[value]

-i[value]

It means to specify service offered.

Available values include:

FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, SSH, None, All

It means the interface which is allowed to access.


LAN2~LAN6, DMZ, IP Routed Subnet, None, All

Note: LAN1 is always allowed for accessing into the router.

It means to flush all of the settings.

It means to restore the factory default settings.

It means to view current settings.

It means to get the usage of such command.

E x a m p l l e

> mngt lanaccess -e 1

> mngt lanaccess -s FTP,TELNET


586

> mngt lanaccess -i LAN3

> > mngt lanaccess -v

Current LAN Access Control Setting:

* Enable:Yes

* Service:

- FTP:Yes

- HTTP:No

- HTTPS:No

- TELNET:Yes

- SSH:No

* Subnet:

- LAN 2: disabled

- LAN 3: enabled

- LAN 4: disabled

- LAN 5: disabled

- LAN 6: disabled

- DMZ: disabled

- IP Routed Subnet: disabled

Note: the settings do NOT apply to LAN1, LAN1 is always allowed to access the router

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t e c h o i i c m p

This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet.

S y n t t a x

mngt echoicmp [enable]

mngt echoicmp [disable]


Parameter Description enable It means to accept the echo ICMP packet. disable It means to drop the echo ICMP packet.

E x a m p l e

> mngt echoicmp enable

%% Echo ICMP packet enabled.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t a c c e s s l l i i s t

This command allows you to specify that the system administrator can login from a specific host or network. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

S y n t t a x

mngt accesslist list

mngt accesslist add [index][ip addr][mask]

mngt accesslist remove [index]

mngt accesslist flush



Parameter Description list It can display current setting for your reference. add index

It means adding a new entry.

It means to specify the number of the entry. ip addr mask remove flush

It means to specify an IP address.

It means to specify the subnet mask for the IP address.

It means to delete the selected item.

It means to remove all the settings in the access list.

E x a m p l e

> mngt accesslist add 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0

%% Set OK.

> mngt accesslist list

%% Access list :

Index IP address Subnet mask

==========================================

1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m n g t t s n m p

This command allows you to configure SNMP for management.

S y n t t a x

mngt snmp [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command>

<parameter>|…]



-e <1/2> 1: Enable the SNMP function.

2: Disable the SNMP function.

-g<Community name>

-s <Community name>

-m <IP address>

-t <Community name>

It means to set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. (max. 23 characters)

It means to set community by typing a proper name. (max. 23 characters)

It means to set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.


It means to set trap community by typing a proper name. (max. 23 characters)

-n <IP address>

-T <seconds>

-V

It means to set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

It means to set the trap timeout <0~999>.

It means to list SNMP setting.

E x a m p l e

> mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m 192.168.1.1 -t trapcom -n 10.20.3.40


588

-T 88

SNMP Agent Turn on!!!

Get Community set to draytek

Set Community set to DK

Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.1

Trap Community set to trapcom

Notification Host IP set to 10.20.3.40

Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t s w i i t t c h

This command is used to configure multi-subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet switch [2/3/4/5/6][On/Off]



2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

On/Off On means turning on the subnet for the specified LAN interface.

Off means turning off the subnet.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet switch 2 On

% LAN2 Subnet On!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t a d d r

This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface.

S y n t t a x msubnet addr [2/3/4/5/6][IP address]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6


IP address Type the private IP address for the specified LAN interface.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1

% Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t n m a s k

This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.

S y n t t a x

msubnet nmask [2/3/4/5/6][IP address]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

IP address Type the subnet mask address for the specified LAN interface.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet nmask 2 255.255.0.0

% Set LAN2 subnet mask done !!!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t s t a t u s

This command is used to display current status of subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet status [2/3/4/5/6]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

E x a m p l l e


590

> msubnet status 2

% LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60

% DHCP server: Off

% Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t d h c p s

This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet dhcps [2/3/4/5/6][On/Off]



2/3/4/5/6

On/Off

It means LAN interface.

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

On means enabling the DHCP server for the specified LAN interface.

Off means disabling the DHCP server.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet dhcps 3 off

% LAN3 Subnet DHCP Server disabled!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t n a t t

This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage.

S y n t t a x

msubnet nat [2/3/4/5/6] [On/Off]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

On/Off On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage.

Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage.

E x a m p l l e

> > msubnet nat 2 off


% LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage!

%Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup a Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded to the right WAN interface!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t g a t t e w a y

This command is used to configure an IP address as the gateway used for subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet gateway [2/3/4] [Gateway IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

Gateway IP Specify an IP address as the gateway IP.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet gateway 2 192.168.1.13

% Set LAN2 Dhcp Gateway IP done !!!



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t i i p c n t t

This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface.

S y n t t a x

msubnet ipcnt [2/3/4] [IP counts]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

IP counts Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface.

The available range is from 0 to 220.


592

E x a m p l e

> msubnet ipcnt 2 15



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t t a l l k

This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces.

S y n t t a x

msubnet talk [1/2/3/4/5/6] [1/2/3/4/5/6] [On/Off]



1/2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.

1=LAN1

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

On/Off On – It means

Off - It means

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet talk 1 2 on

% Enable routing between LAN1 and LAN2 !



> msubnet talk ?

% msubnet talk <1/2/3/4/5/6> <1/2/3/4/5/6> <On/Off>

% where 1:LAN1, 2:LAN2, 3:LAN3, 4:LAN4, 5:LAN5, 6:LAN6

% Now:

% LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 LAN6

% LAN1 V

% LAN2 V V

% LAN3 V

% LAN4 V

% LAN5 V

% LAN6 V

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t s t a r t i i p

This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP.

S y n t t a x

msubnet startip [2/3/4/5/6] [Gateway IP]





2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

Gateway IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90

%Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!!



> msubnet startip ?

% msubnet startip <2/3/4/5/6> <Gateway IP>

% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.90; LAN3 192.168.3.10; LAN4 192.168.4.10; LAN5

192.168.5.1

0; LAN6 192.168.6.10

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t p p p i i p

This command is used to configure a starting IP address for PPP connection.

S y n t t a x

msubnet pppip [2/3/4/5/6] [Start IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

Start IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for PPP connection.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250

% Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!!



> msubnet pppip ?

% msubnet pppip <2/3/4/5/6> <Start IP>

% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200; LAN5

192.168.5.200; LAN6 192.168.6.200


594

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t n o d e t t y p e

This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.

S y n t t a x

msubnet nodetype [2/3/4/5/6][count]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6 count Choose the following number for specifying different node type.

1= B-node

2= P-node

4= M-node

8= H-node

0= Not specify any type for node.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet nodetype ?

% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5/6> <count>

% Now: LAN2 0; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0; LAN6 0

% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node

> msubnet nodetype 2 1

% Set LAN2 Dhcp Node Type done !!!

> msubnet nodetype ?

% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5/6> <count>

% Now: LAN2 1; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0; LAN6 0

% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t p r i i m W I I N S

This command is used to configure primary WINS server.

S y n t t a x

msubnet primWINS [2/3/4/5/6] [WINS IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3


WINS IP

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

Type the IP address as the WINS IP.

E x a m p l e

> > msubnet primWINS ?

% msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> <WINS IP>

% Now: LAN2 0.0.0.0; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0; LAN6

0.0.0.0

> msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5

% Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!!

> msubnet primWINS ?

% msubnet primWINS <2/3/4/5/6> <WINS IP>

% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0; LAN6

0.0.0.0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t s e c W I I N S

This command is used to configure secondary WINS server.

S y n t t a x

msubnet secWINS [2/3/4/5/6] [WINS IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP.

E x a m p l l e

> > msubnet secWINS 2 192.168.3.89

% Set LAN2 Dhcp Secondary WINS IP done !!!

> msubnet secWINS ?

% msubnet secWINS <2/3/4/5/6> <WINS IP>

% Now: LAN2 192.168.3.89; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0; LAN5 0.0.0.0;

LAN6 0.0.0.0


596

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t t f f t t p

This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet tftp [2/3/4/5/6] [TFTP server name]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

5=LAN5

6=LAN6

TFTP server name Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.

E x a m p l l e

> msubnet tftp ?

% msubnet tftp <2/3/4/5/6> <TFTP server name>

% Now: LAN2

LAN3

LAN4

LAN5

LAN6

> msubnet tftp 2 publish

% Set LAN2 TFTP Server Name done !!!

> msubnet tftp ?

% msubnet tftp <2/3/4/5/6> <TFTP server name>

% Now: LAN2 publish

LAN3

LAN4

LAN5

LAN6

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : m s u b n e t t m t t u

This command allows you to configure MTU value for LAN/DMZ/IP Routed Subnet.

S y n t t a x

msubnet mtu [interface][value]


Parameter Description interface Available settings include LAN1~LAN6, IP_Routed_Subnet, and DMZ. value 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)


E x a m p l e

> msubnet mtu LAN1 1492

> msubnet mtu ?

Usage:

>msubnet mtu <interface> <value>

<interface>: LAN1~LAN6,IP_Routed_Subnet,DMZ

<value>: 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)

e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492

Current Settings:

LAN1 MTU: 1492 (Bytes)






DMZ MTU: 1500 (Bytes)

IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes)

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t i i p o b j

This command is used to create an IP object profile.

S y n t t a x object ip obj setdefault

object ip obj INDEX -v

object ip obj INDEX -n NAME

object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT

object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]


Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.

INDEX

-v

It means the index number of the specified object profile.

It means to view the information of the specified object profile.

Example: object ip obj 1 -v

-n NAME

-i INTERFACE

It means to define a name for the IP object.

NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.

Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce

It means to define an interface for the IP object.

INTERFACE=0, means any

INTERFACE=1, means LAN


598

-s INVERT

-a TYPE

[START_IP]

[END/MASK_IP]

INTERFACE=3, means WAN

Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0

It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.

INVERT=0, means disableing the function.

INVERT=1, means enabling the function.

Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1

It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.

TYPE=0, means Mask

TYPE=1, means Single

TYPE=2, means Any

TYPE=3, means Rang

Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2

When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a starting point and another IP address as end point.

Type an IP address.

Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.

E x a m p l l e

> object ip obj 1 -n marketing

> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45

> object ip obj 1 -v

IP Object Profile 1

Name :[marketing]

Interface:[Any]

Address type:[single]

Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]

End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]

Invert Selection:[0]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t i i p g r p

This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.

S y n t t a x

object ip grp setdefault

object ip grp INDEX -v

object ip grp INDEX -n NAME

object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX



INDEX

-v

It means the index number of the specified group profile.

It means to view the information of the specified group profile.

Example: object ip grp 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.



-i INTERFACE

-a IP_OBJ_INDEX

E x a m p l e

> object ip grp 2 -n First

IP Group Profile 2

Name :[First]

Interface:[Any]

Included ip object index:

[0:][0]

[1:][0]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]

[7:][0]

> object ip grp 2 -i 1

> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2

IP Group Profile 2

Name :[First]

Interface:[Lan]


[0:][1]

[1:][2]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]

[7:][0]

Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce

It means to define an interface for the IP group.




Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0

It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.

Example:

:object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5

The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.


600

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t i i p v 6 o b j j

This comman is used to create an IP object profile.

S y n t t a x object ip obj setdefault

object ip obj INDEX -v

object ip obj INDEX -n NAME

object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT

object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]



INDEX

-v

It means the index number of the specified object profile.

It means to view the information of the specified object profile.

Example: object ip obj 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object.


Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce

-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.




Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0

-s INVERT

-a TYPE

[START_IP]

[END/MASK_IP]

It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.

INVERT=0, means disableing the function.

INVERT=1, means enabling the function.

Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1

It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.

TYPE=0, means Mask

TYPE=1, means Single

TYPE=2, means Any

TYPE=3, means Rang

Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2

When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a starting point and another IP address as end point.

Type an IP address.

Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.

E x a m p l e

> object ip obj 1 -n marketing

> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45

> object ip obj 1 -v

IP Object Profile 1

Name :[marketing]


Interface:[Any]

Address type:[single]

Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]

End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]

Invert Selection:[0]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t i i p v 6 g r p

This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.

S y n t t a x

object ip grp setdefault

object ip grp INDEX -v

object ip grp INDEX -n NAME

object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX



INDEX

-v



Example: object ip grp 1 -v

-n NAME

-i INTERFACE

It means to define a name for the IP group.


Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce

It means to define an interface for the IP group.




Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0

-a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.

Example:

:object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5

The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.

E x a m p l e

> object ip grp 2 -n First

IP Group Profile 2

Name :[First]

Interface:[Any]


[0:][0]

[1:][0]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]


602

[7:][0]

> object ip grp 2 -i 1

> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2

IP Group Profile 2

Name :[First]

Interface:[Lan]


[0:][1]

[1:][2]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]

[7:][0]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t s e r v i i c e o b j j

This command is used to create service object profile.

S y n t t a x

object service obj setdefault

object service obj INDEX -v

object service obj INDEX -n NAME

object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL

object service obj INDEX -s CHK [START_P] [END_P]

object service obj INDEX -d CHK [START_P] [END_P]



INDEX

-v

It means the index number of the specified service object profile.

It means to view the information of the specified service object profile.

Example: object service obj 1 -v

-n NAME

-i PROTOCOL

CHK

It means to define a name for the IP object.


Example: object service obj 9 -n bruce

It means to define a PROTOCOL for the service object profile.

PROTOCOL =0, means any

PROTOCOL =1, means ICMP

PROTOCOL =2, means IGMP

PROTOCOL =6, means TCP

PROTOCOL =17, means UDP

PROTOCOL =255, means TCP/UDP

Other values mean other protocols.

Example: object service obj 8 -i 0

It means the check action for the port setting.

0=equal(=), when the starting port and ending port values are the


-s CHK [START_P] [END_P]

-d CHK [START_P] [END_P] same, it indicates one port; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.

1=not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending port values are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.

2=larger(>), the port number greater than this value is available..

3=less(<), the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

It means to set souce port check and configure port range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP.

END_P, type a port number to indicate source port.

Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200

It means to set destination port check and configure port range

(1~65565) for TCP/UDP.

END_P, type a port number to indicate destination port.

Example: object service obj 3 -d 1 100 200

E x a m p l l e

> object service obj 1 -n limit

> object service obj 1 -p 255

> object service obj 1 -s 1 120 240

> object service obj 1 -d 1 200 220

> object service obj 1 -v

Service Object Profile 1

Name :[limit]

Protocol:[255]

Source port check action:[!=]

Source port range:[120~240]

Destination port check action:[!=]

Destination port range:[200~220]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t s e r v i i c e g r p

This command is used to integrate several service objects under a service group profile.

S y n t t a x

object service grp setdefault

object service grp INDEX -v

object service grp INDEX -n NAME

object service grp INDEX -a SER_OBJ_INDEX



INDEX

-v



Example: object service grp 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the service group.


604

-a SER_OBJ_INDEX


Example: object service grp 8 -n bruce

It means to specify service object profiles for the group profile.

Example:

:object service grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5

The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.

E x a m p l l e

>object service grp 1 -n Grope_1

Service Group Profile 1

Name :[Grope_1]

Included service object index:

[0:][0]

[1:][0]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]

[7:][0]

> object service grp 1 -a 1 2

Service Group Profile 1

Name :[Grope_1]

Included service object index:

[0:][1]

[1:][2]

[2:][0]

[3:][0]

[4:][0]

[5:][0]

[6:][0]

[7:][0]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t k w

This command is used to create keyword profile.

S y n t t a x object kw obj setdefault object kw obj show PAGE

object kw obj INDEX -v

object kw obj INDEX -n NAME

object kw obj INDEX -a CONTENTS


Parameter Description setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles. show PAGE It means to show the contents of the specified profile.


show

INDEX

-v

-n NAME

-a CONTENTS

PAGE: type the page number.

It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.

It means the index number of the specified keyword profile.

It means to view the information of the specified keyword profile.

It means to define a name for the keyword profile.


It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.

Example: object kw obj 40 -a test

E x a m p l l e

> object kw obj 1 -n children

Profile 1

Name :[children]

Content:[]

> object kw obj 1 -a gambling

Profile 1

Name :[children]

Content:[gambling]

> object kw obj 1 -v

Profile 1

Name :[children]

Content:[gambling]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : o b j e c t t f f e

This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.

S y n t t a x

object fe show

object fe setdefault

object fe obj INDEX -v

object fe obj INDEX -n NAME

object fe obj INDEX -e CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION

object fe obj INDEX -d CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION


Parameter Description show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles. setdefault

INDEX

It means to return to default settings for all profiles.

It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified file extension object profile.

-v

-n NAME

-e

It means to view the information of the specified file extension object profile.

It means to define a name for the file extension object profile.


It means to enable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION.


606

-d It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION

CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION CATEGORY:

Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression, Executation

Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image

FILE_EXTENSION:

".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",

".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",

".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",

".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3",

".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox", ".wav", ".wma",

".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm", ".js", ".jse",

".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx", ".olb", ".ole",

".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2", ".bz2", ".cab",

".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas", ".bat", ".com",

".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr"

Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp

E x a m p l e

> object fe obj 1 -n music

> object fe obj 1 -e Audio

> object fe obj 1 -v

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name:[music]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Image category:

[ ].bmp [ ].dib [ ].gif [ ].jpeg [ ].jpg [ ].jpg2 [ ].jp2 [ ].pct

[ ].pcx [ ].pic [ ].pict [ ].png [ ].tif [ ].tiff

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Video category:

[ ].asf [ ].avi [ ].mov [ ].mpe [ ].mpeg [ ].mpg [v].mp4 [ ].qt

[ ].rm [v].wmv [ ].3gp [ ].3gpp [ ].3gpp2 [ ].3g2

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Audio category:

[v].aac [v].aiff [v].au [v].mp3 [v].m4a [v].m4p [v].ogg [v].ra

[v].ram [v].vox [v].wav [v].wma

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Java category:

[ ].class [ ].jad [ ].jar [ ].jav [ ].java [ ].jcm [ ].js [ ].jse

[ ].jsp [ ].jtk

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

ActiveX category:

[ ].alx [ ].apb [ ].axs [ ].ocx [ ].olb [ ].ole [ ].tlb [ ].viv

[ ].vrm

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Compression category:

[ ].ace [ ].arj [ ].bzip2 [ ].bz2 [ ].cab [ ].gz [ ].gzip [ ].rar

[ ].sit [ ].zip


-------------------------------------------------------------------------

------

Executation category:

[ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : p o r t t

This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router.

S y n t t a x port [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, wan2, all] [AN, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status] port status

port sniff [on,off,port,txrx,restart,status]

port 802.1x[enable,disable,status,addport,delport] port jumbo

port wanfc



1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, wan2, all

AN… 10H

It means the number of LAN port and WAN port.

It means the physical type for the specific port.

AN: auto-negotiate.

100F: 100M Full Duplex.

100H: 100M Half Duplex.

10F: 10M Full Duplex.

10H: 10M Half Duplex.

It means to view the Ethernet port status. status sniff

[on,off,port,txrx,restart,sta tus]

802.1x[enable,disable,statu s,addport,delport] wanfc It means to set WAN flow control.

E x a m p l l e

> port 1 100F

%Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : p o r t t m a p t t i i m e

This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified protocol.

S y n t t a x

portmaptime [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



608


[<command>

<parameter>|…]



-t <sec>

-u <sec>

It means “TCP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.

It means “UDP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the UDP session timeout.

-i <sec>

-w <sec>

-s <sec>

-f

-l <List>

It means “IGMP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout.

It means “TCP WWW” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP WWW session timeout.

It means “TCP SYN” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP SYN session timeout.

It means to flush all portmaps (useful for diagnostics).

List all settings.

E x a m p l l e

> portmaptime -t 86400 -u 300 -i 10

> portmaptime -l

------ Current setting ------

TCP Timeout : 86400 sec.

UDP Timeout : 300 sec.

IGMP Timeout : 10 sec.

TCP WWW Timeout: 60 sec.

TCP SYN Timeout: 60 sec.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : p r n

This command allows you to view current status (interface and driver) of USB printer.

S y n t t a x prn status prn debug

E x a m p l l e

> prn status

Interface: USB bus 2.0

Printer: NotReady

> prn debug conn[0] : none conn[1] : none conn[2] : none conn[3] : none

LPD_data_total=0


usblp_ptr=0

UsbPrintReady=0, UsbIsPrinting=0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : q o s s e t t u p

This command allows user to set general settings for QoS.

S y n t t a x

qos setup [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command>

<parameter>|…]



-h

-m <mode>

Type it to display the usage of this command.

It means to define which traffic the QoS control settings will apply to and eable QoS control.

0: disable.

1: in, apply to incoming traffic only.

2: out, apply to outgoing traffic only.

3: both, apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Default is enable (for outgoing traffic).

-i <bandwidth>

-o <bandwidth>

-r <index:ratio>

-u <mode>

It means to set inbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only)

The available setting is from 1 to 100000.

It means to set outbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only).

The available setting is from 1 to 100000.

It means to set ratio for class index, in %.

It means to enable bandwidth control for UDP.

0: disable

1: enable

Default is disable.

-p <ratio>

-t <mode>

-V

-D

[…]

It means to enable bandwidth limit ratio for UDP.

It means to enable/disable Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize.

0: disable

1: enable

Show all the settings.

Set all to factory default (for all WANs).

It means that you can type in several commands in one line.

E x a m p l e

> qos setup -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1

WAN1 QOS mode is both

Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up

Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up

WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20

WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable

WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50


610

WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable

QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : q o s c l l a s s

This command allows user to set QoS class.

S y n t t a x

qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command>

<parameter>|…]



-h

-c <no>

Type it to display the usage of this command.

Specify the inde number for the class.

Available value for <no> contains 1, 2 and 3. The default setting is class 1.

-n <name>

-a

-e <no>

-d <no>

It means to type a name for the class.

It means to add rule for specified class.

It means to edit specified rule.

<no>: type the index number for the rule.

It means to delete specified rule.

<no>: type the index number for the rule.

-m <mode>

-l <addr>

-r <addr>

-p <DSCP id>

-s <Service type>

It means to enable or disable the specified rule.

0: disable,

1: enable

Set the local address.

Addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.

addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”

addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.

Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l

172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0

any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command.

Set the remote address.

addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.

addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”

addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.

Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l

172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0

any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command.

Specify the ID.

Specify the service type by typing the number. The available types are listed as below:

1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.323


-S <d/s>

-V <1/2/3>

[…]

6:HTTP 7:HTTPS 8:IKE 9:IPSEC-AH 10:IPSEC-ESP

11:IRC 12:L2TP 13:NEWS 14:NFS 15:NNTP

16:PING 17:POP3 18:PPTP 19:REAL-AUDIO 20:RTSP

21:SFTP 22:SIP 23:SMTP 24:SNMP 25:SNMP-TRAPS

26:SQL-NET 27:SSH 28:SYSLOG 29:TELNET 30:TFTP

Show the content for specified DSCP ID/Service type.

Show the rule in the specified class.

It means that you can type in several commands in one line.

E x a m p l e

> qos class -c 2 -n draytek -a -m 1 -l 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80

Following setting will set in the class2

class 2 name set to draytek

Add a rule in class2

Class2 the 1 rule enabled

Set local address type to Range, 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : q o s t t y p e

This command allows user to configure protocol type and port number for QoS.

S y n t t a x

qos type [-a <service name> | -e <no> | -d <no>].



-a <name> It means to add rule.

-e <no>

-d <no>

-n <name>

-t <type>

It means to edit user defined service type. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.

It means to delete user defined service type. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.

It means the name of the service.

It means protocol type.

6: tcp(default)

17: udp

0: tcp/udp

<1~254>: other

-p <port>

-l

It means service port. The typing format must be [start:end] (ex.,

510:330).

List user defined types. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.


612

E x a m p l e

> qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330

service name set to draytek

service type set to 6:TCP

Port type set to Range

Service Port set to 510 ~ 1330

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : q u i i t

This command can exit the telnet command screen.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w l l a n

This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings.

E x a m p l l e

> show lan

The LAN settings:

ip mask dhcp star_ip pool gateway

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

-----

[V]LAN1 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.1.10 200

192.168.1.1

[X]LAN2 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.2.10 100

192.168.2.1

[X]LAN3 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.3.10 100

192.168.3.1

[X]LAN4 192.168.4.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.4.10 100

192.168.4.1

[X]LAN5 192.168.5.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.5.10 100

192.168.5.1

[X]LAN6 192.168.6.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.6.10 100

192.168.6.1

[X]Route 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w d m z

This command displays current status of DMZ host.

E x a m p l l e

> show dmz

% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:

Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP

----------------------------------------------------

1 Disable 172.16.3.221

2 Disable 192.168.1.65

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w d n s

This command displays current status of DNS setting

E x a m p l e

> show dns

%% Domain name server settings:

% Primary DNS: [Not set]

% Secondary DNS: [Not set]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w o p e n p o r t t

This command displays current status of open port setting.

E x a m p l e

> show openport

%% Openport settings:

Index Status Comment Local IP Address

********************************************************

No data entry.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w n a t t

This command displays current status of NAT.

E x a m p l l e

> show nat

Port Redirection Running Table:

Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port

1 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0


614

11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w p o r t t m a p

This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.

E x a m p l e

> show portmap

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

Private_IP:Port Pseudo_IP:Port Peer_IP:Port [Timeout/Protocol/Flag]

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w p m t t i i m e

This command displays the reuse time of NAT session.

Level0: It is the default setting.

Level1: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than 25% of the default setting.

Level2: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than the eighth of the default setting.

E x a m p l l e

> show pmtime

Level0 TCP=86400001 UDP=300001 ICMP=10001



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w s e s s i i o n

This command displays current status of current session.

E x a m p l l e

> show session

% Maximum Session Number: 10000

% Maximum Session Usage: 49

% Current Session Usage: 0

% Current Session Used(include waiting for free): 0

% WAN1 Current Session Usage: 0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w s t t a t u s

This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections.


E x a m p l e

> show status

System Uptime:20:36:35

LAN Status

Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4

IP Address:192.168.1.1 Tx Rate:12923 Rx Rate:8152

WAN 1 Status: Disconnected

Enable:Yes Line:xDSL Name:tcom

Mode:Static IP Up Time:0:00:00 IP:172.16.3.221 GW

IP:172.16.3.2

TX Packets:0 TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate:0

ADSL Information: ADSL Firmware Version:05-04-04-04-00-01

Mode: State:TRAINING TX Block:0 RX Block:0

Corrected Blocks:0 Uncorrected Blocks:0

UP Speed:0 Down Speed:0 SNR Margin:0 Loop Att.:0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w a d s l l

This command displays current status of ADSL.

E x a m p l e

> Vigor> show adsl

--------------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A) -----------

Running Mode : T1.413 State : TRAINING

DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps

DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps

DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast

DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0

NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB

DS actual PSD : 0. 0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB

ADSL Firmware Version : 05-04-04-04-00-01

-------------------------------- ATU-C Info ---------------------------------

Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB

CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000

DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < ADI >

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s h o w s t t a t i i s t t i i c

This command displays statistics for WAN interface.

S y n t t a x show statistic

show statistic reset [interface]


Parameter Description reset interface

It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero.

It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 (including multi-PVC) interface for displaying related statistics.

E x a m p l l e


616

> show statistic

WAN1 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes





>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p b a d i i p

This command is reserved for future using.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp badip

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp badip

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p p u b l l i i c

This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp public start [IP address]

srv dhcp public cnt [IP counts]

srv dhcp public status

srv dhcp public add [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX]

srv dhcp public del [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX/all/ALL]


Parameter Description start It means the starting point of the IP address pool for the DHCP server.

IP address cnt

IP counts

It means to specify an IP address as the starting point in the IP address pool.

It means the IP count number. status add del

MAC Addr all/ALL

It means to specify the number of IP addresses in the pool. The maximum is 10.

It means the execution result of this command.

It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned.

It means removing the selected MAC address.

It means to specify MAC Address of the host.

It means all of the MAC addresses.

E x a m p l l e

Vigor> ip route add 192.168.1.56 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.12 3 default

Vigor> srv dhcp public status

Index MAC Address


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p d n s 1

This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp dns1 [?]

srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address]



? It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server.

DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1.

Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet

DNS).

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1

% srv dhcp dns1 <DNS IP address>

% Now: 168.95.1.1

(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p d n s 2

This command allows users to set Secondary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp dns2 [?]

srv dhcp dns2 [DNS IP address]



? It means to display current IP address of DNS 2 for the DHCP server.

DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS2.

Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet

DNS).

E x a m p l e

> srv dhcp dns2 10.1.1.1

% srv dhcp dns2 <DNS IP address>

% Now: 10.1.1.1

(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)


618

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p f r c d n s m a n l l

This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on]

srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off]



? It means to display the current status. on

Off

It means to use manual setting for DNS setting.

It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl on

% Domain name server now is using manual settings!

> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl off

% Domain name server now is using auto settings!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p g a t t e w a y

This command allows users to specify gateway address for DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp gateway [?]

srv dhcp gateway [Gateway IP]



?

Gateway IP

It means to display current gateway that you can use.

It means to specify a gateway address used for DHCP server.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp gateway 192.168.2.1




T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p i i p c n t t

This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp ipcnt [?]

srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts]



? It means to display current used IP count number.

IP counts It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp ipcnt ?

% srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts>

% Now: 150

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p o f f f

This function allows users to turn off DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys reboot" command to reboot router.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p o n

This function allows users to turn on DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys reboot" command to reboot router.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p r e l l a y

This command allows users to set DHCP relay setting.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp relay servip [server ip]

srv dhcp relay subnet [index]


Parameter Description server ip It means the IP address that you want to used as DHCP server.

Index It means subnet 1 or 2. Please type 1 or 2. The router will invoke this function according to the subnet 1 or 2 specified here.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp relay servip 192.168.1.46

> srv dhcp relay subnet 2

> srv dhcp relay servip ?

% srv dhcp relay servip <server ip>

% Now: 192.168.1.46

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p s t t a r t t i i p


S y n t t a x

srv dhcp startip [?]

srv dhcp startip [IP address]



? It means to display current used start IP address.

IP address It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as the starting point.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53



T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p s t t a t t u s

This command can display general information for the DHCP server, such as IP address, MAC address, leased time, host ID and so on.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp status

DHCP server: Relay Agent

Default gateway: 192.168.1.1

Index IP Address MAC Address Leased Time HOST ID

1 192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE 17:20:08 A1000351


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p l l e a s e t i i m e

This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp leasetime [?]

srv dhcp leasetime [Lease Time (sec)]



? It means to display current leasetime used for the DHCP server.

Lease Time (sec) It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is second.

E x a m p l e

> srv dhcp leasetime ?

% srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec.)>

% Now: 86400

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p n o d e t t y p e

This command can set the node type for the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp nodetype <count>


Parameter Description count It means to specify a type for node.

1. B-node

2. P-node

4. M-node

8. H-node

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp nodetype 1

> srv dhcp nodetype ?

%% srv dhcp nodetype <count>

%% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node

% Now: 1


622

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p p r i i m W I I N S

This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp primWINS [WINS IP address]

srv dhcp primWINS clear



WINS IP address It means the IP address of primary WINS server. clear It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS server.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88

> srv dhcp primWINS ?

%% srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address>

%% srv dhcp primWINS clear

% Now: 192.168.1.88

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p s e c W I I N S

This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp secWINS [WINS IP address]

srv dhcp secWINS clear



WINS IP address It means the IP address of secondary WINS server. clear It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS server.

E x a m p l e

> srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180

> srv dhcp secWINS ?

%% srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address>

%% srv dhcp secWINS clear

% Now: 192.168.1.180


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p e x p i i r e d _ R e c y c l l e I I P

This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP server or not.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp expRecycleIP <sec time>


Parameter Description sec time It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP can be assigned again or not.

E x a m p l l e

Vigor> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250

% DHCP expired_RecycleIP = 250

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p t f f t p

This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>



TFTP server name It means to type the name of TFTP server.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp tftp TF123

> srv dhcp tftp ?

%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>

% Now: TF123

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v d h c p o p t i i o n

This command can set the custom option for the DHCP server.

S y n t t a x

srv dhcp option -h

srv dhcp option -l

srv dhcp option -d [idx]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -v [option value]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -a [option value]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -x [option value]

srv dhcp option -u [idx unmber]




-h It means to display usage of this command.

-l

-d[idx]

-e [1 or 0]

It means to display all the user defined DHCP options.

It means to delete the option number by specifying its index number.

It means to enable/disable custom option feature.

1:enable

0:disable

-c

-v

-a

-x

-u idx number

It means to set option number. Available number ranges from 0 to 255.

It means to set option number by typing string.

It means to set the option value by specifying the IP address.

It means to set option number with the format of Hexadecimal characters.

It means to update the option value of the sepecified index.

It means the index number of the option value.

E x a m p l l e

> srv dhcp option -e 1 -c 18 -v /path

> srv dhcp option -l

% state idx interface opt type data

% enable 1 ALL LAN 18 ASCII /path


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t d m z

This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP

Alias first.

S y n t t a x

Srv nat dmz n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]


-i

-r

-v

Parameter Description n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.

1: wan1

2: wan2 m

[<command>

<parameter>|…]

It means the index number of the DMZ host.

Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP mode. If you use other mode, you can set 1 ~ 8 in this field. If WAN

IP alias has been configured, then the number of DMZ host can be added more.



-e It means to enable/disable such feature.

1:enable

0:disable

It means to specify the private IP address of the DMZ host.

It means to remove DMZ host setting.

It means to display current status.

E x a m p l l e

> srv nat dmz 1 1 -i 192.168.1.96

> srv nat dmz -v

% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:

Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP

----------------------------------------------------

1 Disable 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t i i p s e c p a s s

This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.

S y n t t a x

Srv nat ipsecpass [options]



[options] The available commands with parameters are listed below. on off

It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port

(500) preservation.

It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.


626 status It means to display current status for checking.

E x a m p l l e

> srv nat ipsecpass status

%% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is

OFF.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t o p e n p o r t t

This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server.

S y n t t a x

srv nat openport n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]


Parameter Description n It means the index number for the profiles. The range is from 1 to

20. m

[<command>

<parameter>|…]

It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile. The range is from 1 to 10.



-a <enable>

-c <comment>

-i <local ip>

-w <idx>

-p <protocol>

It means to enable or disable the open port rule profile.

0: disable

1:enable

It means to type the description (less than 23 characters) for the defined network service.

It means to set the IP address for local computer.

Local ip: Type an IP address in this field.

It means to specify the public IP.

1: WAN1 Default,

2: WAN1 Alias 1,

…and so on.

Specify the transport layer protocol.

Available values are TCP, UDP and ALL.

-s<start port>

-e<end port>

-v

-r <remove>

-f <flush>

It means to specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535.

It means to specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host.


It means to display current settings.

It means to delete the specified open port setting. remove: Type the index number of the profile.

It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports profiles.

E x a m p l e

> srv nat openport 1 1 -a 1 -c games -i 192.168.1.100 -w 1 -p TCP -s

23 -e 83

> srv nat openport -v


%% Status: Enable

%% Comment: games

%% Private IP address: 192.168.1.100

Index Protocal Start Port End Port

*****************************************************************

1. TCP 23 83

%% Status: Disable

%% Comment:



*****************************************************************

%% Status: Disable

%% Comment:



*****************************************************************

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t p o r t m a p

This command allows users to set port redirection table for NAT server.

S y n t t a x

srv nat portmap add [idx][serv name][proto][pub port][pri ip][pri port][wan1/wan2]

srv nat portmap del [idx]

srv nat portmap disable [idx]

srv nat portmap enable [idx] [proto]

srv nat portmap flush

srv nat portmap table



Add[idx] It means to add a new port redirection table with an index number.

Available index number is from 1 to 10. serv name proto pub port pri ip

It means to type one name as service name.

It means to specify TCP or UDP as the protocol.

It means to specify which port can be redirected to the specified

Private IP and Port of the internal host.

It means to specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service. pri port wan1/wan2 del [idx] disable [idx] enable [idx] flush

It means to specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.

It means to specify WAN interface for the port redirection.

It means to remove the selected port redirection setting.

It means to inactivate the selected port redirection setting.

It means to activate the selected port redirection setting.

It means to clear all the port mapping settings.


628 table It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table.

E x a m p l l e

> srv nat portmap add 1 game tcp 80 192.168.1.11 100 wan1

> srv nat portmap table

NAT Port Redirection Configuration Table:

Index Service Name Protocol Public Port Private IP Private

Port ifno

1 game 6 80 192.168.1.11 100

-1

2 0 0 0 -2

3 0 0 0 -2

4 0 0 0 -2

5 0 0 0 -2

6 0 0 0 -2

7 0 0 0 -2

8 0 0 0 -2

9 0 0 0 -2

10 0 0 0 -2

11 0 0 0 -2

12 0 0 0 -2

13 0 0 0 -2

14 0 0 0 -2

15 0 0 0 -2

16 0 0 0 -2

17 0 0 0 -2

18 0 0 0 -2

19 0 0 0 -2

20 0 0 0 -2

Protocol: 0 = Disable, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t s t a t u s

This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table.

E x a m p l l e

> srv nat status

NAT Port Redirection Running Table:

Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port

1 6 80 192.168.1.11 100

2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0


6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0


---

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s r v n a t t s h o w a l l l l

This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and

DMZ settings.

E x a m p l e

> srv nat showall ?

Index Proto WAN IP:Port Private IP:Port Act

*************************************************************************

****

R01 TCP 0.0.0.0:80 192.168.1.11:100 Y

O01 TCP 0.0.0.0:23~83 192.168.1.100:23~83 Y

D01 All 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96 Y

R:Port Redirection, O:Open Ports, D:DMZ

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h i i

This command is used to obtain the TX (transmitted) or RX (received) data for each connected switch.

S y n t t a x

switch -i [switch idx_no] [option]


Parameter Description switch idx_no It means the index number of the switch profile. option The available commands with parameters are listed below. cmd acc

traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx]


630 cmd acc traffic

[on/off/status/tx/rx]

It means to send command to the client.

It means to set the client authentication account and password.

It means to turn on/off or display the data transmission from the client.

E x a m p l e

> switch -i 1 traffic on

External Device NO. 1 traffic statistic function is enable

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h o n

This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices.

E x a m p l l e

> switch on

Enable Extrnal Device auto discovery!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h o f f f

This command is used to turn off the auto discovery for external devices.

E x a m p l l e

> switch off

Disable External Device auto discovery!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h l l i i s t t

This command is used to display the connection status of the switch.

E x a m p l e

> switch list?

No. Mac IP status Dur Time Model_Name

------------------------------------------------------------------

---------

[1] 00-50-7f-cd-07-48 192.168.1.3 On-Line 00:01:01

Vigor2920 Series

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h c l l e a r

This command is used to reset the switch table and reboot the router.

S y n t t a x switch clear [idx]


Parameter Description idx It means the index number of each item shown on the table.


-f It means to clear all of the data.

E x a m p l l e


> switch clear 1

Switch Data clear successful

> switch clear -f

Switch Data clear successful

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s w i i t t c h q u e r y

This command is used to enable or disable the switch query.

E x a m p l l e

> switch query on

Extern Device status query is Enable

> switch query off

Extern Device status query is Disable

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s a d m i i n

This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s a d m i i n u s e r

This command is used to create user account and specify LDAP server. The server will authenticate the local user who wants to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

S y n t t a x

sys adminuser [option]

sys adminuser edit [index] username password


Parameter Description option Available options includes:

Local [0-1]

LDAP [0-1] edit [INDEX] delete [INDEX] view [INDEX]

Local [0-1]

LDAP [0-1] edit [INDEX] username password

0 – Disable the local user.

1 – Enable the local user.

0 – Disable the LDAP.

1 – Enable the LDAP.

Edit an existed user account or create a new local user account.

[INDEX] – 1 ~8. There are eight profiles to be added / edited.

Username – Type a new name for local user.

Password – Type a password for local user. delete [INDEX] view [INDEX]

Delete a local user account.

Show the user account/password detail information.

E x a m p l l e

> > sys adminuser Local 1

Local User has enabled!


632

> sys adminuser LDAP 1

LDAP has enabled!

>> sys adminuser edit 1 carrie test123

Updated!

>> sys adminuser view 1

Index:1

User Name:carrie

User Password:test123

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s b o n j j o u r

This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service.

S y n t t a x

sys bonjour [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command>

<parameter>|…]



-e <enable>

-h <enable>

It is used to disable/enable bonjour service (0: disable, 1: enable).

It is used to disable/enable http (web) service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-t <enable>

-f <enable>

-s <enable>

-p <enable>

-6 <enable>

It is used to disable/enable telnet service (0: disable, 1: enable).

It is used to disable/enable FTP service (0: disable, 1: enable).

It is used to disable/enable SSH service (0: disable, 1: enable).

It is used to disable/enable printer service (0: disable, 1: enable).

It is used to disable/enable IPv6 (0: disable, 1: enable).

E x a m p l l e

> sys bonjour -s 1

>


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s c f f g

This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command, all the configuration will be reset to default setting.

S y n t t a x

sys cfg default

sys cfg status


Parameter Description default It means to reset current settings with default values. status It means to display current profile version and status.

E x a m p l e

> sys cfg status

Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x491e5e6c)

> sys cfg default

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s c m d l l o g

This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed.

E x a m p l l e

> sys cmdlog

% Commands Log: (The lowest index is the newest !!!)

[1] sys cmdlog

[2] sys cmdlog ?

[3] sys ?

[4] sys cfg status

[5] sys cfg ?

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s f t t p d

This command displays current status of FTP server.

S y n t t a x

sys ftpd on

sys ftpd off


Parameter Description on It means to turn on the FTP server of the system. off It means to turn off the FTP server of the system.

E x a m p l l e

> sys ftpd on

% sys ftpd turn on !!!


634

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s d o m a i i n n a m e

This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is selected for WAN.

S y n t t a x

sys domainname [wan1/wan2] [Domain Name Suffix]

sys domainname [wan1/wan2] clear


Parameter Description wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.

Domain Name Suffix clear

It means the name for the domain of the system. The maximum number of characters that you can set is 40.

It means to remove the domain name of the system.

E x a m p l e

> sys domainname wan1 clever

> sys domainname wan2 intellegent

> sys domainname ?

% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix (max. 40 characters)>

% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear

% Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intelligent

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s i i f f a c e

This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address,

MAC address and Netmask for the router.

E x a m p l e

> sys iface

Interface 0 Ethernet:

Status: UP

IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 0xFFFFFF00 (Private)

IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0xFFFFFFFF

MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00


Status: DOWN

IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000

MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-02


Status: DOWN


MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-03


Status: DOWN


MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-04



Status: DOWN


MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05


Status: DOWN


MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06


Status: DOWN


MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-07


---

>


636

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s n a m e

This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for

WAN.

S y n t t a x

sys name [wan1] [ASCII string]

sys name [wan1] clear


Parameter Description wan1 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.

ASCII string It means the name for router. The maximum character that you can set is 20.

E x a m p l l e

> sys name wan1 drayrouter

> sys name ?

% sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string (max. 20 characters)>

% sys name <wan1/wan2> clear

% Now: wan1 == drayrouter, wan2 ==

Note: Such name can be used to recognize router’s identification in SysLog dialog.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s p a s s w d

This command allows users to set password for the administrator.

S y n t t a x

sys passwd [ASCII string]



ASCII string It means the password for administrator. The maximum character that you can set is 23.

E x a m p l l e

> sys passwd admin123

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s r e b o o t t

This command allows users to restart the router immediately.

E x a m p l l e

> sys reboot

>


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s a u t t o r e b o o t

This command allows users to restart the router automatically within a certain time.

S y n t t a x

sys autoreboot [on/off/hour(s)]


Parameter Description on/off On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot.

Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot. hours It means to set the time schedule for router reboot.

For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot with an interval of two hours.

E x a m p l l e

> sys autoreboot on

autoreboot is ON

> sys autoreboot 2

autoreboot is ON

autoreboot time is 2 hour(s)

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s c o m m i i t t

This command allows users to save current settings to FLASH. Usually, current settings will be saved in SRAM. Yet, this command will save the file to FLASH.

E x a m p l l e

> sys commit

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s t f f t p d

This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware.

E x a m p l l e

> sys tftpd

% TFTP server enabled !!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s c c

This command can display current country code and wireless region of this device.

E x a m p l l e

> sys cc

Country Code : 0x 0 [International]

Wireless Region Code: 0x30

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s v e r s i o n


638

This command can display current version for the system.

E x a m p l l e

> sys version

Router Model: Vigor3220Vn+ Version: 3.7.4.1 English

Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x49165e6c)

Router IP: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0

Firmware Build Date/Time: Mar 20 2014 14:09:50

Router Name: drayrouter

Revision: 40055 2860_374

VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-04-08-00-00-06

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s q r y b u f f

This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.

E x a m p l e

> sys qrybuf

System Memory Status and Leakage List

Buf sk_buff ( 200B), used#: 1647, cached#: 30

Buf KMC4088 (4088B), used#: 0, cached#: 8



Buf KMC504 ( 504B), used#: 8, cached#: 8





Dynamic memory: 13107200B; 4573168B used; 190480B/0B in level 1/2 cache.

FLOWTRACK Memory Status

# of free = 12000

# of maximum = 0

# of flowstate = 12000

# of lost by siganture = 0

# of lost by list = 0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s p o l l l l b u f f

This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router.

S y n t t a x

sys pollbuf [on]

sys pollbuf [off]


Parameter Description on It means to turn on pulling buffer.


off It means to turn off pulling buffer.

E x a m p l l e

> sys pollbuf on

% Buffer polling is on!

> sys pollbuf off

% Buffer polling is off!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s b r i i t a s k

This command can improve triple play quality.

S y n t t a x

sys britask [on]

sys britask [off]


Parameter Description on It means to turn on the bridge task for improving the triple play quality. off It means to turn off the bridge task.

E x a m p l e

> sys britask on

% bridge task is ON, now

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s t r 0 6 9

This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.

S y n t t a x

sys tr069 get [parm] [option]

sys tr069 set [parm] [value]

sys tr069 getnoti [parm]

sys tr069 setnoti [parm] [value] sys tr069 log

sys tr069 debug [on/off] sys tr069 save sys tr069 inform [event code]

sys tr069 port [port num]

sys tr069 cert_auth [on/off]


Parameter Description get [parm] [option] It means to get parameters for tr-069. option=<nextlevel>: only gets nextlevel for GetParameterNames.


640 set [parm] [value]

getnoti [parm]

setnoti [parm] [value] log

debug [on/off] save

Inform [event code] port [port num]

cert_auth [on/off]

It means to set parameters for tr-069.

It means to get parameter notification value.

It means to set parameter notification value.

It means to display the TR-069 log. on: turn on the function of sending debug message to syslog. off: turn off the function of sending debug message to syslog.

It means to save the parameters to the flash memory of the router.

It means to inform parameters for tr069 with different event codes.

[event code] includes:

0-"0 BOOTSTRAP",

1-"1 BOOT",

2-"2 PERIODIC",

3-"3 SCHEDULED",

4-"4 VALUE CHANGE",

5-"5 KICKED",

6-"6 CONNECTION REQUEST",

7-"7 TRANSFER COMPLETE",

8-"8 DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE",

9-"M Reboot"

It means to change tr069 listen port number. on: turn on certificate-based authentication. off: turn off certificate-based authentication.

E x a m p l l e

> sys tr069 get Int. nextlevel

Total number of parameter is 24

Total content length of parameter is 915

InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries

InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries

InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo.

InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer.

InternetGatewayDevice.Time.

InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding.

InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice.

InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.

InternetGatewayDevice.Services.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Firewall.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Bandwidth.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Applications.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VPN.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VoIP.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_WirelessLAN.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_System.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Status.

InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Diagnostics.



---

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s s i i p _ a l l g

This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal.

S y n t t a x

sys sip_alg [1]

sys sip_alg [0]



1 It means to turn on SIP ALG.

0 It means to turn off SIP ALG.

E x a m p l e

> sys sip_alg ? usage: sys sip_alg [value]

0 - disable SIP ALG

1 - enable SIP ALG

current SIP ALG is disabled

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s l i i c e n s e

This command can process the system license.

S y n t t a x

sys license licmsg

sys license licauth

sys license regser

sys license licera

sys license licifno

sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]

sys license dev_chg

sys license dev_key


Parameter Description licmsg It means to display license message. licauth regser

It means the license authentication time setting.

It means the license register server setting. licera licifno lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]

It means to erase license setting.

It means license and signature download interface setting.

It means the license wizard setting. qry: query service support status


642 dev_chg dev_key set [idx] [trial] [service type] [sp_id] [start_date] [License Key] reg: register service in portal

It means to change the device key.

It means to show device key.

E x a m p l e

> sys license licifno

License and Signature download interface setting: licifno [AUTO/WAN#]

Ex: licifno wan1

Download interface is "auto-selected" now.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : s y s d i i a g _ l l o g

This command is used for RD debug.

S y n t t a x

sys diag_log [status| enable| disable| flush| lineno [w] | level [x] | feature [on|off] [y]|

log]


Parameter Description status enable

It means to show the status of diagnostic log.

It means to enable the function of diag_log. disable flush lineno [w] level[x] feature [on/off][y]

It means to disenable the function of diag_log.

It means the flush log buffer.

It means the total lines for displaying message. w - Available value ranges from 100 to 50000.

It determines the level of data displayed. x – Available value ranges from 0 to 12. The larger the number is, the detailed the data is displayed.

It is used to specify the function of the log. Supported features include SYS and DSL (Case-Insensitive). Default setting is “on” for

“DSL”. voip_feature

[on/off][vf_name] log

It means VoIP feature. Type on to enable the feature or type off to disable the feature. vf_name: available settings include DRVTAPI, DRVVMMC, DRVMPS,

DRVFXO, DRVHAL, PSMPHONE, PSMSUPP, PSM, FXO, PSMISDN,

DTMFPSER, CALLERID (Case-Insensitive).

It means the dump log buffer.

E x a m p l l e

> sys diag_log status

Status:

diag_log is Enabled.

lineno : 10000.


level : 3.

Enabled feature: SYS DSL

> sys diag_log log

0:00:02 [DSL] Current modem firmware: AnnexA_548006_544401

0:00:02 [DSL] Modem firmware feature: 5, ADSL_A, VDSL2

0:00:02 [DSL] xtseCfg=04 00 04 00 0c 01 00 07

0:00:02 [DSL] don't have last showtime mode!! set next mode to VDSL!!

0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: Stopped(0) -> FwWait(3)

0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: FwWait(3) -> Starting(1)

0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: Starting(1) -> Running(2)

0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5)

0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Restart(10)

0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: Restart(10) to

FirmwareRequest(1)

0:00:02 [DSL] Line state has changed: 00000000 -> 000000FF

0:00:02 [DSL] Entering VDSL2 mode

0:00:03 [DSL] modem code: [05-04-08-00-00-06]

0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: FirmwareRequest(1) to firmwareReady(3)

0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5)

0:00:05 [DSL] >> nXtseA=0d, nXtseB=00, nXtseV=07, nFwFeatures=5

0:00:05 [DSL] >> nHsToneGroupMode=0, nHsToneGroup=106, nToneSet=43, nCamState

=2

0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 000000FF -> 00000100

0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 00000100 -> 00000200

0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Train(6)

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : t e s t t m a i i l l

This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail.

E x a m p l e

> testmail

Send out test mail

Mail Alert:[Disable]

SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.0]

Mail to:[]

Return-Path:[]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p o f f f f

This command can close UPnP function.

E x a m p l l e

>upnp off

UPNP say bye-bye

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p o n

This command can enable UPnP function.

E x a m p l l e


644

>upnp on

UPNP start.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p n a t

This command can display IGD NAT status.

E x a m p l e

> upnp nat ?

****************** IGD NAT Status ****************

((0))

InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<

InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<<

PortMapProtocol >>TCP<<

The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<

PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<

Ftp Example [MICROSOFT]

((1))

InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<

InternalPort >>0<<, ExternalPort >>0<<

PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<



PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<



0<<

--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p s e r v i i c e

This command can display the information of the UPnP service. UPnP service must be enabled first.

E x a m p l e

> upnp on

UPNP start.

> upnp service

>>>>> SERVICE TABLE1 <<<<<

serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1

serviceId urn:microsoft-com:serviceId:OSInfo1

SCPDURL /upnp/OSInfo.xml

controlURL /OSInfo1

eventURL /OSInfoEvent1

UDN uuid:774e9bbe-7386-4128-b627-001daa843464

>>>>> SERVICE TABLE2 <<<<<

serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1

serviceId urn:upnp-org:serviceId:WANCommonIFC1


SCPDURL /upnp/WComIFCX.xml

controlURL /upnp?control=WANCommonIFC1

eventURL /upnp?event=WANCommonIFC1

UDN uuid:2608d902-03e2-46a5-9968-4a54ca499148

.

.

.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p s u b s c r i i b e

This command can show all UPnP services subscribed.

E x a m p l l e

> upnp on

UPNP start.

> upnp subscribe

Vigor> upnp subscribe

>>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1

----- Subscribtion1 -------

sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb

eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1

expireTime =6926

active =1

DeliveryURLs

=<http://192.168.1.113:2869/upnp/eventing/twtnpnsiun>

>>>> (2) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1

----- Subscribtion1 -------

sid = d9cd47a5-d9c9-4d3d-8043-d03a82f27983

eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1

.

.

.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p t t m p v s

This command can display current status of temp Virtual Server of your router.

E x a m p l l e

Vigor> upnp tmpvs

****************** Temp virtual server status ****************

((0))


646 real_addr >>192.168.1.10<<, pseudo_addr >>172.16.3.229<< real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<< hit_portmap_index >>0<<

The protocol >>TCP<< time >>0<<

((1)) real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<< real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<< hit_portmap_index >>0<<

The protocol >>0<< time >>0<<


---

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u p n p w a n

This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.

S y n t t a x

upnp wan [n]


Parameter Description n It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP. n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface. n=1, WAN1 n=2, WAN2 ……….

E x a m p l l e

> upnp wan 1 use wan1 now.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u s b l l i s t t

This command is use to display the information about the brand name and model name of the

USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.

E x a m p l l e

> usb list ?

Brand Module Standard

------------------------ --------

Aiko Aiko 83D 3.5G Y

BandRich Bandluxe C170 3.5G Y






Huawei Huawei E169u 3.5G Y

Huawei Huawei E220 3.5G Y


Huawei Huawei E303D 3.5G Y



Sony Erics Sony Ericsson MD30 3.5G Y

TP-LINK TP-LINK MA180 3.5G Y

TP-LINK TP-LINK MA260 3.5G Y

Vodafone Vodafone K3765-Z 3.5G Y

Vodafone Vodafone K4605 3.5G Y

ZTE ZTE MF626 3.5G Y

ZTE ZTE MF627 plus 3.5G Y



SpinCom SpinCom GPRS Modem 3.5G Y

- MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] -

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g o n

This command can make the router to be regarded as a modem but not a router.

E x a m p l l e

> vigbrg on

%Enable Vigor Bridge Function!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g o f f f

This command can disable vigor bridge function.

E x a m p l l e

> vigbrg off

%Disable Vigor Bridge Function!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g s t t a t t u s

This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.

E x a m p l l e

> vigbrg status

%Vigor Bridge Function is enable!

%Wan1 management is disable!


648

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g c f g i i p

This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the router through the IP address configured here.

S y n t t a x

vigbrg cfgip [IP Address]



IP Address It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router.

E x a m p l l e

> vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15

> vigbrg cfgip ?

% Vigor Bridge Config IP,

% Now: 192.168.1.15

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g w a n 1 o n

This command is used to enable the bridge WAN1 management.

E x a m p l l e

> vigbrg wan1on

%Enable Vigor Bridge Wan1 management!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v i i g b r g w a n 1 o f f f f

This command is used to disable the bridge WAN1 management.

E x a m p l e

> vigbrg wan1off

%Disable Vigor Bridge Wan1 management!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n l l 2 l l s e t t

This command allows users to set advanced parameters for LAN to LAN function.

S y n t t a x

vpn l2lset [list index] peerid [peerid]

vpn l2lset [list index] localid [localid]

vpn l2lset [list index]main [auto/proposal index]

vpn l2lset [list index] aggressive [g1/g2]

vpn l2lset [list index]pfs [on/off]

vpn l2lset [list index] phase1[lifetime]

vpn l2lset [list index] phase2[lifetime]




list index peerid localid main auto index proposal index aggressive pfs on/off phase1 lifetime phase2

It means the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.

It means the peer identity for aggressive mode.

It means the local identity for aggressive mode.

It means to choose proposal for main mode.

It means to choose default proposals.

It means to choose specified proposal.

It means the chosen DH group for aggressive mode

It means “perfect forward secrete”.

It means to turn on or off the PFS function.

It means phase 1 of IKE.

It means the lifetime value (in second) for phase 1 and phase 2.

It means phase 2 of IKE.

E x a m p l l e

> VPN l2lset 1 peerid 10226

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n l l 2 l l D r o p

This command allows users to terminate current LAN to LAN VPN connection.

E x a m p l l e

> vpn l2lDrop

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n d i i n s e t

This command allows users to configure setting for remote dial-in VPN profile.

S y n t t a x

vpn dinset <list index>

vpn dinset <list index> <on/off>

vpn dinset <list index> motp <on/off>

vpn dinset <list index> pin_secret <pin> <secret>



<list index> It means the index number of the profile.

<on/off> motp <on/off>

It means to enable or disable the profile. on – Enable. off – Disable.

It means to enable or disable the authentication with mOTP function. on – Enable. off – Disable. pin_secret<pin> <secret> It means to set PIN code with secret.

<pin> - Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

<secret> - Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the


650 mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6)

E x a m p l l e

> vpn dinset 1

Dial-in profile index 1

Profile Name: ???

Status: Deactive

Mobile OTP: Disabled

Password:

Idle Timeout: 300 sec

> vpn dinset 1 on

% set profile active

> vpn dinset 1 motp on

% Enable Mobile OTP mode!>

> vpn dinset 1 pin_secret

1234 e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6

> vpn dinset 1

Dial-in profile index 1

Profile Name: ???

Status: Active

Mobile OTP: Enabled

PIN: 1234

Secret: e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6

Idle Timeout: 300 sec

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n s u b n e t t

This command allows users to specify a subnet selection for the specified remote dial-in VPN profile.

S y n t t a x

vpn subnet [index] [1/2/3/4/5/6]



<index>

<1/2/3/4/5/6>

It means the index number of the VPN profile.

1 – it means LAN1

2 – it means LAN2.


3 – it means LAN3


5 – it means LAN51


E x a m p l l e

> vpn subnet 1 2

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n s e t u p

This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.

S y n t t a x

Command of PPTP Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> pptp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>

Command of IPSec Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> ipsec_out <ip> <key> <nip> <nmask>

Command of L2Tp Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> l2tp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>

Command of Dial-In

vpn setup <index> <name> dialin <ip> <usr> <pwd> <key> <nip> <nmask>



For PPTP Dial-Out

<index>

<name>

It means the index number of the profile.

It means the name of the profile.

<ip>

<usr> <pwd>

<nip> <nmask>

It means the IP address to dial to.

It means the user and the password required for the PPTP connection.

It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g., vpn setup 1 name1 pptp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0

255.255.255.0

For IPsec Dial-Out

<index>

<name>

<ip>

<key>

<nip> <nmask>




It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.

It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g., vpn setup 1 name1 ipsec_out 1.2.3.4 1234 192.168.1.0

255.255.255.0

For L2TP Dial-Out

<index> It means the index number of the profile.


652

<name>

<ip>

<usr> <pwd>

<nip> <nmask>



It means the user and the password required for the L2TP connection.

It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g.,, vpn setup 1 name1 l2tp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0

255.255.255.0

For Dial-In

<index>

<name>

<ip>

<usr> <pwd>

<key>

<nip> <nmask>



It means the IP address allowed to dial in.

It means the user and the password required for the PPTP/L2TP connection.

It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.

It means the remote network IP and the mask. e.g., vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0

255.255.255.0

E x a m p l l e

> vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0

255.255.255.0

% Profile Change Log ...

% Profile Index : 1

% Profile Name : name1

% Username : vigor

% Password : 1234

% Pre-share Key : abc

% Call Direction : Dial-In

% Type of Server : ISDN PPTP IPSec L2TP

% Dial from : 1.2.3.4

% Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0

% Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n o p t t i i o n

This command allows users to configure settings for LAN to LAN profile.

S y n t t a x

vpn option <index> <cmd1>=<param1> [<cmd2>=<para2> | ... ]



<index> It means the index number of the profile.

Available index numbers:


For Common Settings

<index> pname ena thr nnpkt dir idle=[value] palive

For Dial-Out Settings ctype dialto ltype oname opwd pauth


1 ~ 32



It means to enable or disable the profile. on – Enable off - Disable

It means the way that VPN connection passes through. Available settings are wlf, wlo, w2f, and w2o. w1f – WAN1 First. w1o – WAN1 Only. w2f – WAN2 First. w2o – WAN2 Only.

It means the NetBios Naming Packet. on – Enable the function to pass the packet. off – Disable the function to block the packet.

It means the call direction. Available settings are b, o and i. b – Both o – Dial-Out i – Dial-In.

It means Always on and Idle Time out.


-1 – it means always on for dial-out.

0 – it means always on for dial-in.

Other numbers (e.g., idle=200, idle=300, idle=500) mean the router will be idle after the interval (seconds) configured here.

It means to enable PING to keep alive.

-1 – disable the function.

1,2,3,4 – Enable the function and PING IP 1.2.3.4 to keep alive.

It means “Type of Server I am calling”.

“ctype=t” means PPTP.

“ctype=s” means IPSec.

“ctype= l” means L2TP(IPSec Policy None).

“ctype= l1” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Nice to Have).

“ctype= l2” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Must).

It means Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as draytek.com or

123.45.67.89).

It means Link Type.

“ltype=0” means “Disable”.

“ltype=1” means “64kbps”.

“ltype=2” means “128kbps”.

“ltype=3” means “BOD”.

It means Dial-Out Username.

“oname=admin” means to set Username = admin.

It means Dial-Out Password

“opwd=1234” means to set Password = 1234.

It means PPP Authentication.

“pauth=pc” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP&CHAP.

653

654 peer peerid iname ipwd ivj ikey imeth ovj okey ometh sch rcallb ikeid

For Dial-In Settings itype

For TCP/IP Settings mywip

“pauth=p” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP Only

It means VJ Compression.

“ovj=on/off” means to enable/disable VJ Compression.

It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.

“okey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.

It means IPSec Security Method.

“ometh=ah/” means AH.

“ometh=espd/espda/” means ESP DES without/with

Authentication.

“ometh=esp3/esp3a/” means ESP 3DES without/with

Authentication.

“ometh=espa/espaa” means ESP AES without/with Authentication.

It means Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup. sch=1,3,5,7 Set schedule 1->3->5->7

It means Require Remote to Callback.

“rcallb=on/off” means to enable/disable Set Require Remote to

Callback.

It means IKE Local ID.

“ikeid=vigor” means Set Local ID = vigor.

It means Allowed Dial-In Type. Available settings include:

“itype=t” means PPTP.

“itype=s” means IPSec.

“itype=L1”means L2TP (None).

“itype=L1” means L2TP(Nice to Have).

“itype=l2” means L2TP(Must).

It means specify Peer VPN Server IP for Remote VPN Gateway.

Type “203.12.23.48” means to allow VPN dial-in with IP address of

203.12.23.48.

Type “off” means any remote IP is allowed to dial in.

It means the peer ID for Remote VPN Gateway.

Type “draytek” means the word is used as local ID.

It means Dial-in Username.

“iname=admin” means to set username as “admin”.

It means Dial-in Password.

“ipwd=1234” means to set password as “1234”.

It means VJ Compression.

“ivj=on/off” means to enable /disable VJ Compression.

It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.

“ikey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.

It means IPSec Security Method

“imeth=h” means “Allow AH”.

“imeth=d” means “Allow DES”.

“imeth=3” means “Allow 3DES”.

“imeth=a” means “Allow AES.

It means My WAN IP.

“mywip=1.2.3.4” means to set My WAN IP as “1.2.3.4”.


rgip rnip rnmask rip mode droute

E x a m p l e

> vpn option 1 idle=250

% Change Log..

% Idle Timeout = 250

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n m r o u t t e

This command allows users to list, add or delete static routes for a certain LAN to LAN VPN profile.

S y n t t a x

vpn mroute <index> list

vpn mroute <index> add <network ip>/<mask>

vpn mroute <index> del <network ip>/<mask>


Parameter Description list It means to display all of the route settings. add del

<index>

It means to add a new route.

It means to delete specified route.

<network ip>/<mask>



1 ~ 32

Type the IP address with the network mask address.

E x a m p l e

It means Remote Gateway IP.

“rgip=1.2.3.4” means to set Remote Gateway IP as “1.2.3.4”.

It means Remote Network IP.

“rnip=1.2.3.0” means to set Remote Network IP as “1.2.3.0”.

It means Remote Network Mask.

“rnmask=255.255.255.0” means to set Remote Network Mask as

“255.255.255.0”.

It means RIP Direction.

“rip=d” means to set RIP Direction as “Disable”.

“rip=t” means to set RIP Direction as “TX”.

“rip=r” means to set RIP Direction as “RX”.

“rip=b” means to set RIP Direction as “Both”.

It means the option of “From first subnet to remote network, you have to do”.

“mode=r” means to set Route mode.

“mode=n” means to set NAT mode.

It means to Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single

WAN supports this). droute=on/off means to enable/disable the function.


656

> vpn mroute 1 add 192.168.5.0/24

% 192.168.5.0/24

% Add new route 192.168.5.0/24 to profile 1

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n l l i i s t t

This command allows users to view LAN to LAN VPN profiles.

S y n t t a x

vpn list <index> all

vpn list <index>com

vpn list<index>out

vpn list <index> in

vpn list<index>net


Parameter Description all It means to list configuration of the specified profile. com out

It means to list common settings of the specified profile.

It means to list dial-out settings of the specified profile. in net

<index>

It means to list dial-in settings of the specified profile.

It means to list Network Settings of the specified profile.



1 ~ 32

E x a m p l l e

> vpn list 32 all

% Common Settings

% Profile Name : ???

% Profile Status : Disable

% Netbios Naming Packet : Pass

% Call Direction : Both

% Idle Timeout : 300

% PING to keep alive : off

% Dial-out Settings

% Type of Server : PPTP

% Link Type: : 64k bps

% Password :

% PPP Authentication : PAP/CHAP

% VJ Compression : on

% Pre-Shared Key :

% IPSec Security Method : AH

% Remote Callback : off

% Provide ISDN Number : off


% IKE phase 1 mode : Main mode

% IKE Local ID :

% Dial-In Settings

--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

> vpn list 1 com

% Common Settings

% Profile Name : ???

% Profile Status : Disable

% Netbios Naming Packet : Pass

% Call Direction : Both

% Idle Timeout : 300

% PING to keep alive : off

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n r e m o t t e

This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service.

S y n t t a x

vpn remote [PPTP/IPSec/L2TP] [on/off]



PPTP/IPSec/L2TP There are four types to be selected. on/off on – enable VPN remote setting. off – disable VPN remote setting.

E x a m p l e

> vpn remote PPTP on

Set PPTP VPN Service : On

Please restart the router!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n 2 n d s u b n e t t

This command allows users to enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP.

S y n t t a x

vpn 2ndsubnet on

vpn 2ndsubnet off


Parameter Description on/off It means to enable or disable second subnet.


658

E x a m p l e

> vpn 2ndsubnet on

%Enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n N e t t B i i o s

This command allows users to enable or disable NetBios for Remote Access User Accounts or

LAN-to-LAN Profile.

S y n t t a x

vpn NetBios set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>



<H2l/L2l> H2l means Remote Access User Accounts.

L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.

Specify which one will be applied by NetBios.

<index>

<Block/Pass>

The index number of the profile.

Pass – Have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, set it block data transmission of

Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.

E x a m p l e

> vpn NetBios set H2l 1 Pass

% Remote Dial In Profile Index [1] :

% NetBios Block/Pass: [PASS]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n m s s

This command allows users to configure the maximum segment size (MSS) for different TCP types.

S y n t t a x vpn mss show vpn mss default

vpn mss set <connection type> <TCP maximum segment size range>


Parameter Description show It means to display current setting status. default TCP maximum segment size for all the VPN connection will be set as

1360 bytes. set

<connection type>

Use it to specify the connection type and value of MSS.

1~4 represent various type.


<TCP maximum segment size range>

1 – PPTP

2 – L2TP

3 – IPSec

4 – L2TP over IPSec

Each type has different segment size range.

PPTP – 1 ~ 1412

L2TP – 1 ~ 1408

IPSec – 1 ~ 1381

L2TP over IPSec – 1 ~ 1361

E x a m p l e

>vpn mss set 1 1400

% VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) :

PPTP = 1400

L2TP = 1360

IPSec = 1360

L2TP over IPSec = 1360

>vpn mss show

VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) :

PPTP = 1400

L2TP = 1360

IPSec = 1360

L2TP over IPSec = 1360

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n i i k e

This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list.

S y n t t a x vpn ike -q

E x a m p l l e

> vpn ike -q

IKE Memory Status and Leakage List

# of free L-Buffer=95, minimum=94, leak=1

# of free M-Buffer=529, minimum=529 leak=3

# of free S-Buffer=1199, minimum=1198, leak=1

# of free Msgid-Buffer=1024, minimum=1024

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n M u l t t i i c a s t t

This command allows users to pass or block the multi-cast packet via VPN.

S y n t t a x

vpn Multicast set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>




660

<H2l/L2l>

<index>

<Block/Pass>

H2l means Host to LAN (Remote Access User Accounts).

L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.

The index number of the profile.

Set Block/Pass the Multicast Packets.

The default is Block.

E x a m p l l e

> vpn Multicast set L2l 1 Pass

% Lan to Lan Profile Index [1] :

% Status Block/Pass: [PASS]

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n p a s s 2 n d

This command allows users to determine if the packets coming from the second subnet passing through current used VPN tunnel.

S y n t t a x

vpn pass2nd[on]

vpn pass2nd [off]


Parameter Description on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT. off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.

E x a m p l e

> vpn pass2nd on

% 2nd subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : v p n p a s s 2 n a t t

This command allows users to determine if the packets passing through by NAT or not when the VPN tunnel disconnects.

S y n t t a x

vpn pass2nat [on]

vpn pass2nat [off]


Parameter Description on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT. off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.

E x a m p l l e

> vpn pass2nat on

% Packets would go through by NAT when VPN disconnect!!


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n p p p _ m r u

This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific network.

S y n t t a x

wan ppp_mru <WAN interface number> <MRU size >



<WAN interface number> Type a number to represent the physical interface. For Vigor130, the number is 1 (which means WAN1).

<MRU size > It means the number of PPP LCP MRU. The available range is from

1400 to 1600.

E x a m p l e

> wan ppp_mru 1 ?

% Now: 1492

> wan ppp_mru 1 1490

>

> wan ppp_mru 1 ?

% Now: 1490

> wan ppp_mru 1 1492

> wan ppp_mru 1 ?

% Now: 1492

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n m t u / / m t u 2

This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU for WAN1/WAN2.

S y n t t a x

wan mtu [value]

wan mtu2 [value]


Parameter Description value It means the number of MTU for PPP. The available range is from

1000 to 1500.

For Static IP/DHCP, the maximum number will be 1500.

For PPPoE, the maximum number will be 1492.

For PPTP/L2TP, the maximum number will be 1460.

E x a m p l l e

> wan mtu 1100

> wan mtu ?

Static IP/DHCP (Max MSS: 1500)

PPPoE(Max MSS: 1492)

PPTP/L2TP(Max MSS: 1460)

% wan ppp_mss <MSS size: 1000 ~ 1500>


662

% Now: 1100

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n D F _ c h e c k

This command allows you to enable or disable the function of DF (Don’t fragment)

S y n t t a x

wan DF_check [on]

wan DF_check [off]


Parameter Description on/off It means to enable or disable DF.

E x a m p l e

> wan DF_check on

%DF bit check enable!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n d i s a b l l e

This command allows you to disable WAN connection.

E x a m p l e

> wan disable WAN

%WAN disabled.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n e n a b l e

This command allows you to disable wan connection.

E x a m p l l e

> wan enable WAN

%WAN1 enabled.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n f f o r w a r d

This command allows you to enable or disable the function of WAN forwarding. The packets are allowed to be transmitted between different WANs.

S y n t t a x

wan forward [on]

wan forward [off]


Parameter Description on/off It means to enable or disable WAN forward.

E x a m p l l e

> wan forward ?

%WAN forwarding is Disable!


> wan forward on

%WAN forwarding is enable!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n s t t a t t u s

This command allows you to display the status of WAN connection, including connection mode,

TX/RX packets, DNS settings and IP address.

E x a m p l l e

> wan status

WAN1: Offline, stall=N

Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00

IP=---, GW IP=---

TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0

Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0

PVC_WAN3: Offline, stall=N

Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00

IP=---, GW IP=---



Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00

IP=---, GW IP=---



Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00

IP=---, GW IP=---


T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n m o d e m

This command, wan modem, allows you to configure 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) of WAN5.

S y n t t a x

wan modem [init/init2/dial/pin][string]

wan modem paponly [on/off]

wan modem backup_wait [value]

wan modem pipe [Int][Din][Dout]

wan modem wakeup [on/off/value]

wan modem vid [id]

wan modem pid [id]

wan modem status


Parameter Description init Set initial modem AT command (default value is

“AT&FE0V1X1&D2&C1S0=0”).


664

Init2 dial pin paponly backup_wait pipe wakeup [on/off] vid pid status

Set the second initial modem AT command.

Set dial modem AT command (default value is “ATDT*99#”).

Set PIN code for SIM card.

“0”:disable

It means PAP Only. Set the PPP authentication of the USB WAN. on: None. off: PAP or CHAP.

Set waiting time after boot if USB WAN is in backup mode. This waiting time is reserved for the dial of main WANs so that the backup USB WAN will not go up first.

Available setting is from 1 to 255. Unit is second.

It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice.

It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice.

Set VID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router specifies WAN interface by USB port.

Set PID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router specifies WAN interface by USB port.

Display current status of USB modem.

E x a m p l e

> wan modem pin 0000

> wan modem status

Modem Link Speed=0

Current Signal Strength=0

Last Fail Message:

Current Connect Stage:

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n d e t t e c t t

This command allows you to Ping a specified IP to detect the WAN connection (static IP or

PPPoE mode).

S y n t t a x

wan detect [wan1][on/off/always_on]

wan detect [wan1]target [ip addr]

wan detect [wan1]ttl [1-255] wan detect status


Parameter Description on It means to enable ping detection. The IP address of the target shall be set. off always_on

It means to enable ARP detection (default). disable link detect, always connected(only support static IP) target ip addr

It means to set the ping target.

It means the IP address used for detection. Type an IP address in this field.


ttl status

It means to set the ping TTL value (work as trace route)

If you do not set any value for ttl here or just type 0 here, the system will use default setting (255) as the ttl value.

It means to show the current status.

E x a m p l e

> wan detect status

WAN1: always on

WAN2: off

WAN3: off

WAN4: off

WAN5: off

> wan detect wan1 target 192.168.1.78

Set OK

> wan detect wan1 on

Set OK

> wan detect status

WAN1: on, Target=192.168.1.78, TTL=255

WAN2: off

WAN3: off

WAN4: off

WAN5: off

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n l l b

This command allows you to Enable/Disable for each WAN to join auto load balance member.

S y n t t a x wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] on wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] off


Parameter Description wan1/wan2 It means to specify which WAN will be applied with load balance. on off

It means to make WAN interface as the member of load balance.

It means to cancel WAN interface as the member of load balance.

E x a m p l e

> wan lb status

WAN1: on

WAN2: on

WAN3: on

WAN4: on

WAN5: on

WAN6: on

WAN7: on


666

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n m v l l a n

This command allows you to configure multi-VLAN for WAN and LAN. It supports pure bridge mode (modem mode) between Ethernet WAN and LAN port 2~4.

S y n t t a x wan mvlan [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service type/vlan priority] [px ... ][ Keep Tag]



pvc_no It means index number of PVC. There are 10 PVC, 0(Channel-1) to

9(Channel-9) allowed to be configured.

However, only 2 to 9 are available for configuration. status save

It means to display the whole Bridge status.

It means to save the configuration into flash of Vigor router. enable/disable on/off clear tag tag_no

It means to enable/disable the Multi-VLAN function.

It means to turn on/off bridge mode for the specific channel.

It means to turn off/clear the port.

It means to tag a number for the VLAN.

-1: No need to add tag number.

1-4095: Available setting numbers used as tagged number. service type vlan priority px

Keep Tag

It means to specify the service type for VLAN.

0: Normal.

1: IGMP.

It means to specify the priority for the VALN setting.

Range is from 0 to 7.

It means LAN port. Available setting number is from 2 to 4. Port number 1 is locked for NAT usage.

It means Multi-VLAN packets will keep their VLAN headers to LAN.

E x a m p l l e

PVC 7 will map to LAN port 2/3/4 in bridge mode; service type is Normal. No tag added.

> > wan mvlan 7 on p2 p3 p4

PVC Bridge p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 Service Type Tag Priority Keep Tag

------------------------------------------------------------------

7 ON 0 0 1 1 0 0 Normal 0(OFF) 0 OFF

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n m u l t t i i f n o

This command allows you to specify a channel (in Multi-PVC/VLAN) to make bridge connection to a specified WAN interface.

S y n t t a x wan multifno [channel #] [WAN interface #]

wan multifno status




channel # There are 4 (?) channels including VLAN and PVC.

Available settings are:

1=Channel 1

3=Channel 3

4=Channel 4

5=Channel 5

WAN interface # status

Type a number to indicate the WAN interface.

1=WAN1

It means to display current bridge status.

E x a m p l l e

> wan multifno 5 1

% Configured channel 5 uplink to WAN1

> wan multifno status

% Channel 3 uplink ifno: 3





>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : w a n v l l a n

This command allows you to tag packets on WAN VLAN with specified number.

S y n t t a x

wan vlan wan [#] tag [value]

wan vlan wan [#] [enable|disable] wan vlan stat



# It means the number of WAN interface.

1: means WAN1

2: means WAN2. value It means the number to be tagged on packets.

The range of the value is between 32 ~ 4095. enable|disable stat

It means to enable or disable the WAN interface for VLAN.

It means to display the table of WAN VLAN status.

E x a m p l l e

> wan vlan stat

%Interface Pri Tag Enabled

%======================================

% WAN1 (ADSL) 0 0

% WAN1 (VDSL) 0 0


668

%WAN2 0 0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n b u d g e t t

This command allows you determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP.

S y n t t a x

wan budget wan [#] rdate [day] [hour]

wan budget wan [#] [enable|disable]

wan budget wan [#] thres [budget limit (MB)]

wan budget wan [#] gthres [budget limit (GB)] wan budget wan [#] mode [monthly|periodic|none]

wan budget wan [#] psday [th day in periodic]

wan budget wan [#] action [action bitmap] wan budget status


Parameter Description wan[#] Specify the WAN interface. rdate enable/disable thres [budget limit (MB)] gthres [budget limit (GB)] mode

[monthly|periodic|none] psday [th day in periodic]

action [action bitmap] status

Specify the WAN budget refresh time. day – Available settings are from 1 to 30. hour – Available settings are from 1 to 23.

E.g., wan budget wan 1 rdate 5 10

If monthy mode is selected: WAN budget will be refreshed on 5th day at 10:00 in each month

If periodic mode is selected: WAN budget will be refreshed every 5 days and 10 hours enable - Enable the function of wan budget. disable - Disable the function of wan budget.

Specify the maximum value for WAN budget limit. (Unit: MB) budget limit – Type a number.

Specify the maximum value of wan budget limit. (Unit: GB) budget limit – Type a number.

Specify the calculation mode (monthly, periodically, or none) for

WAN budget.

It is used only when mode is set with “periodic”. Specify the order of “today” in the cycle.

E.g., wan budget wan 5 psday

 It means “today” is the 5 th in the billing cycle.

day

Determine the action to be performed when it reaches the WAN budget limit.

action bitmap – Type a total number of actions to be executed.

Different numbers represent different actions.

1: shotdown wan

2: send mail alert

4: send sms alert

For example, if you type “5” (5=1+4), the system will send SMS alert when WAN shotdown is detected.

Display current configuration status of WAN budget.

E x a m p l l e

> wan budget wan 1 action 5

% WAN 1 budget action set to 5


> wan budget wan 1 gthres 10

% WAN 1 budget limit set to 10 GB

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n d e t t e c t t _ m t t u

This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv4 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.

S y n t t a x

wan detect_mtu -w [number] -i [Host/IP address] -s [base_size] -d [decrease_size] (-c

[count])



-w [number]

-I [Host/IP address]

-s [base_size]

-d [decrease size]

-c [count]

Specify the WAN interface.

Value: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and etc.

Specify the IPv4 target to detect. If can be an IPv4 address or domain name.

Host/IP address: Type the IP address/domain name of the target.

Set the MTU size base for Discovery. base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.

Set the MTU size to decrease between detections. decrease size: Available setting is 1 ~ 100.

Set the maximum times of ping failure during a Discovery. count: Available settings are 1 ~ 10. Default value is 3.

E x a m p l l e

> wan detect_mtu -w 2 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10

detecting mtu size:1500!!!

mtu size:1470!!!

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w a n d e t t e c t t _ m t t u 6

This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.

S y n t t a x

wan detect_mtu6 –w [number] –i [IPv6 address] –s [base_size]



-w [number]

-I [IPv6 address]

-s [base_size]

Specify the WAN interface number: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and etc.

Specify the IPv6 target to detect. It must be an IPv6 IP address.

IPv6 address: Type the IPv6 address of the target.

Specify the size of MTU. base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.

E x a m p l l e

> wan detect_mtu6 -w 2 -i 2404:6800:4008:c06::5e -s 1500

>


670

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l a c l l

This command allows the user to configure wireless access control settings.

S y n t t a x

wl acl enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

wl acl disable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

wl acl add [MAC] [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [isolate] wl acl del [MAC]

wl acl mode [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [white/black]

wl acl show wl acl showmode wl acl clean


Parameter Description enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

It means to enable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 and SSID4.

It means to disable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 and SSID4. disable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] add [MAC] [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [isolate]

It means to associate a MAC address to certain SSID interfaces' access control settings. The isolate setting will limit the wireless client's network capabilities to accessing the wireless LAN only.

[MAC] format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

or xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

or xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx del [MAC] It means to delete a MAC address entry defined in the access control list.

It means to set white/black list for each SSID. mode [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [white/black] wl acl show wl acl showmode wl acl clean

It means to show access control status.

It means to show the mode for each SSID.

It means to clean all access control setting.

E x a m p l l e

> > wl acl showmode

ssid1: none

ssid2: none

ssid3: none

ssid4: none

> wl acl add 00-50-70-ff-12-70

Set Done !!

> wl acl add 00-50-70-ff-12-70 ssid1 ssid2 isolate

Set Done !!

> wl acl show

----------Enable Mac Address Filter---------

ssid1: dis ssid2: dis ssid3: dis ssid4: dis

----------MAC Address Filter----------


Index Attribute MAC Address Associated SSIDs

0 00:50:70:ff:12:70 ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4

1 s 00:50:70:ff:12:70 ssid1 ssid2

s: Isolate the station from LAN

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l c o n f f i i g

This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless connection.

S y n t t a x

wl config mode [value]

wl config mode show

wl config channel [number]

wl config preamble [enable]

wl config txburst [enable] wl config ssid [ssid_num enable ssid_name [hidden_ssid]]

wl config security [SSID_NUMBER] [mode]

wl config ratectl [ssid_num enable upload download ]

wl config isolate [ssid_num lan member]


Parameter Description mode[value] It means to select connection mode for wireless connection.

Available settings are: "11bgn", "11gn", "11n", "11bg", "11g", or "11b". mode show channel [number] preamble [enable]

It means to display what the current wireless mode is.

It means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN.

The available settings are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 and 13. number=0, means Auto number=1, means Channel 1

…. number=13, means Channel 13.

It means to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet.

Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble.

0: disable to use long preamble.

1: enable to use long preamble. txburst [enable] ssid[ssid_num enable ssid_name [hidden_ssid]]

It means to enhance the performance in data transmission about

40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time.

0: disable the function.

1: enable the funciton.

It means to set the name of the SSID, hide the SSID if required.

ssid_num: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.

ssid_name: Give a name for the specified SSID.


672

Security [SSID_NUMBER]

[mode][key][index] ratectl [ssid_num enable upload download] isolate [ssid_num lan member]

hidden_ssid: Type 0 to hide the SSID or 1 to display the SSID

It means to configure security settings for the wirelesss connection.

SSID_NUMBER: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or

SSID4.

mode: Available settings are: disable: No security. wpa21x: wpamix1x:

WPA2/802.1x Only

Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) wpapsk: wpa2psk: wpamixpsk:

WPA/PSK

WPA2/PSK

Mixed (WPA+WPA2)/PSK

key, index: Moreover, you have to add keys for wpapsk, wpa2psk,

wpamixpsk and wep, and specify index number of schedule profiles to be followed by the wireless connection.

WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII text string or 10/26 Hexadecimal digit format; WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII text string or 64

Hexadecimal digit format.

It means to set the rate control for the specified SSID.

ssid_num: Choose 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.

enable: It means to enable the function of the rate control for the specified SSID. 0: disable and 1:enable.

upload: It means to configure the rate control for data upload. The unit is kbps.

download: It means to configure the rate control for data download. The unit is kbps.

It means to isolate the wireless connection for LAN and/or Member.

lan – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with remote-dial and LAN to LAN users not accessing for each other.

member – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with the same

SSID not accessing for each other.

E x a m p l e

> wl config mode 11bgn

Current mode is 11bgn

% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel

> wl config channel 13

Current channel is 13

% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel.

> wl config preamble 1

Long preamble is enabled

% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters.

> wl config ssid 1 enable dray

SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name

1 1 0 dray

% <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters.

> wl config security 1 wpa1x

%% Configured Wlan Security Setting:

% SSID1

%% Mode: wpa1x

%% Wireless card must be reset for configurations to take effect


%% (Telnet Command: wl restart)

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l s e t t

This command allows users to configure basic wireless settings.

S y n t t a x

wl set [SSID] [CHAN[En]]

wl set txburst [enable]



SSID It means to type the SSID for the router. The maximum character that you can use is 32.

CHAN[En] txburst [enable]

It means to specify required channel for the router.

CHAN: The range for the number is between 1 ~ 13.

En: type on to enable the function; type off to disable the function.

It means to enhance the performance in data transmission about

40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time.

0: disable the function.

1: enable the function.

E x a m p l e

> wl set MKT 2 on

% New Wlan Setting is:

% SSID=MKT

% Chan=2

% Wl is Enable

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l a c t t

This command allows users to activate wireless settings.

S y n t t a x

wl act [En]



En It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation.

0: diable

1: enable

E x a m p l e

> wl act on

% Set Wlan to Enable.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l s c a n

This command allows users to perform AP scanning.


674

S y n t t a x wl scan [start] wl scan set [wlist/blist/stime][MAC] wl scan del [wlist/blist] [MAC] wl scan filter [ssid/channel/mac] wl scan show [0/1/2/3]


Parameter Description start It means to start AP scanning. set [wlist/blist/stime]

[MAC]

Set white list/block list/scan time.

wlist – It means to set white list for passing. MAC address must be added in the end. e.g., wl scan set wlist 001122aabbcc

blist – It means to set black list for blocking. MAC address must be added in the end. stime – It means to set scanning time. Time value (2~5 second) must be added in the end. e.g., wl scan set time 5 del filter show [0/1/2/3]

Remove white list/block list. e.g., wl scan del wlist 001122aabbcc

Set which filter you want.

ssid – scanning the AP based on SSID setting.

channel - scanning the AP based on channel setting.

mac - scanning the AP based on MAC address setting..

It is used to show AP list.

0 - display white list

1 - display block list,

2 - display gray/unknown list,

3 - display all list

E x a m p l e

> wl scan set wlist 001122aabbcc

> wl scan start

> wl scan show 3

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l s t a m g t

This command is used to configure connection time and reconnection time for each SSID that wireless client used for accessing into Internet.

S y n t t a x

wl stamgt [enable/disable] [ssid_num].

wl stamgt [show] [ssid_num].

wl stamgt set [ssid_num] [c] [r]

wl stamgt reset [ssid_num].



Parameter Description enable/disable It means to enable/disable the station management control. ssid_num It means channel selection.

Available channel for 2.4G: 0/1/2/3

Available channel for 5G: 4/5/6/7. show c r

It means to display status or configuration of the selected channel.

It means connection time. The unit is minute.

It means reconnection time. The unit is minute.

E x a m p l e

> wl stamgt enable 1

% Station Management Status: enabled

> wl stamgt set 1 60 60

> wl stamgt show 1

NO. SSID BSSID Connect time Reconnect time

1. Draytek 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc 0d:0:58:26 0d:0:0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l i i s o _ v p n

This command allows users to activate the function of VPN isolation.

S y n t t a x

wl iso_vpn [ssid] [En]


Parameter Description ssid It means the number of SSID.

1: SSID1

2: SSID2

3: SSID3

4: SSID4

En It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation.

0: disable

1: enable

E x a m p l l e

> wl iso_vpn 1 on

% ssid: 1 isolate vpn on :1

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l w p a

This command allows you to configure WPA wireless settings.

S y n t t a x

wl wpa 1/2/3



676

Parameter Description wl wpa Type 1/2/3 to represent different WPA modes.

1 – means WPA+WPA2

2 – means WPA2 Only

3 – means WPA Only

E x a m p l l e

> wl wpa 1

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l w m m

This command allows users to set WMM for wireless connection. It defines the priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d (prioritization tabs).

S y n t t a x

wl wmm ap QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM

wl wmm bss QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM

wl wmm ack Que0_Ack Que1_Ack Que2_Ack Que3_Ack

wl wmm enable SSID0 SSID1 SSID2 SSID3

wl wmm apsd value wl wmm show


Parameter Description ap It means to set WMM for access point. bss ack enable

Apsd [value]

It means to set WMM for wireless clients.

It means to map to the Ack policy settings of AP WMM.

It means to enable the WMM for each SSID.

0: disable

1: enable

It means to enable / disable the ASPD(automatic power-save delivery) function.

0: disable

1: enable show

QueIdx

Aifsn

Cwmin/ Cwmax

It displays current status of WMM.

It means the number of the queue which the WMM settings will be applied to. There are four queues, best effort, background, voice, and video.

It controls how long the client waits for each data transmission.

CWMin means contention Window-Min and CWMax means contention Window-Max. Specify the value ranging from 1 to 15.

Txop

ACM

It means transmission opportunity. Specify the value ranging from 0 to 65535.

It can restrict stations from using specific category class if it is enabled.

0: disable

1: enable


E x a m p l e

> wl wmm ap 0 3 4 6 0 0

QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0

> wl wmm enable 1 0 1 0

WMM_SSID0 =1, WMM_SSID1 =0,WMM_SSID2 =1,WMM_SSID3 =0

> wl wmm show

Enable WMM: SSID0 =1, SSID1 =0,SSID2 =1,SSID3 =0

APSD=0





QueIdx=0: BSSAifsn=3,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSSTxop=0,BSSACM=0




AckPolicy[0]=0: AckPolicy[1]=0,AckPolicy[2]=0,AckPolicy[3]=0

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l h t

This command allows you to configure wireless settings.

S y n t t a x

wl ht bw value

wl ht gi value

wl ht badecline value

wl ht autoba value

wl ht rdg value

wl ht msdu value

wl ht txpower value

wl ht antenna value

wl ht greenfield value


Parameter Description wl ht bw value The value you can type is 0 (for BW_20) and 1 (for BW_40). wl ht gi value wl ht badecline value

The value you can type is 0 (for GI_800) and 1 (for GI_4001)

The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling). wl ht autoba value wl ht rdg value wl ht msdu value wl ht txpower value wl ht antenna value

The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).



The value you can type ranges from 1 – 6 (level).

The value you can type ranges from 0-3.

0: 2T3R

1: 2T2R

2: 1T2R


678 wl ht greenfield value

3: 1T1R

The value you can type is 0 (for mixed mode) and 1 (for green field).

E x a m p l l e

> wl ht bw value 1

BW=0

<Note> Please restart wireless after you set new parameters.

> wl restart

Wireless restart................

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l r e s t t a r t t

This command allows you to restart wireless setting.

E x a m p l l e

> wl restart

Wireless restart................

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l b t t n c t t l l

This command allows you to enable or disable wireless button control. wl btnctl [value]


Parameter Description value 0: disable

1: enable

E x a m p l e

> wl btnctl 1

Enable wireless botton control

Current wireless botton control is on

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l i i w p r i i v & w l l w l l a n c o n f f i i g

These two commands are reserved for RD debug. Do not use them.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w l l e f f u s e

This command is used to configure parameters related to wireless RF hardware. At present, it is not allowed for end user to operate.

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : w o l l

This command allows Administrator to set the white list of WAN IP addresses/Subnets, that the magic packet from these IP addresses/Subnets will be eligible to pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client. You also need to set NAT rule for LAN client.

S y n t t a x

wol up [MAC Address]/[IP Address]

wol fromWan [on/off/any]

wol fromWan_Setting [idx][ip address][mask]




MAC Address It means the MAC address of the host.

IP address on/off/any

It means the LAN IP address of the host. If you want to wake up LAN host by using IP address, be sure that that IP address has been bound with the MAC address (IP BindMAC).

It means to enable or disable the function of WOL from WAN. on: enable off: disable any: It means any source IP address can pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client.

This command will allow the user to choose whether WoL packets can be passed from the Internet to the LAN network from a specific

WAN interface.

[idx][ip address] [mask] It means the index number (from 1 to 4).

These commands will allow the user to configure the LAN clients that the user may wake up from the Internet through the use of the

WoL packet.

ip address - It means the WAN IP address.

mask - It means the mask of the IP address.

E x a m p l l e

> wol fromWan on

> wol fromWan_Setting 1 192.168.1.45 255.255.255.0

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : u s e r

The command is used to create new user account profiles.

S y n t t a x

user set [-e|-d|-c|-l|-o|-a|-r|-b]

user edit [PROFILE_IDX] [-e|-d|-n|-p|-t|-u|-i|-q|-r|-w|-s|-m|-x|-v]

user account [USER_NAME] [-t|-d|-q|-r|-w]


Parameter Description set It means to configure general setup for the user management. edit account

It means to modify the selected user profile.

It means to

User Set

-e

-d

-a[Profile idx][User name][IP_Address]

-l all

-l userl

Enable User management function.

Disable User management function.

It means to pass an IP Address.

Profile idx- type the index number of the selected profile.

User name- type the user name that you want it to pass.

IP_Address- type the IP address that you want it to pass.

Show online user.

all – all of the users will be displayed on the screen.


680

-u

-i

-q

-r

-w

-s

-p

-t

User edit

PROFILE_IDX

-e

-d

-n

-l ip

-o

-c[user name]

-c all

-buser [user name]

-b ip [ ip address]

-u user [user name]

-u ip [ ip address]

-r [user name | all]

-q

-s

user name – type the user name that you want to view on the screen.

ip – type the IP address that you want to view on the screen.

It means to show user account information. e.g.,-o

Clear the user record.

user name – type the user name that you want to get clear corresponding record.

all – all of the records will be removed.

Block specifies user or IP address.

user name – type the user name that you want to block.

ip address –– type the IP address that you want to block.

Unblock specifies user or IP address.

user name – type the user name that you want to unblock.

ip address –– type the IP address that you want to unblock.

Remove the user record.

user name – type the name of the user profile.

all – all of the user profile settings will be removed.

It means to trigger the alert tool to do authentication.

It means to set login service.

0:HTTPS

1:HTTP e.g.,-s 1

Type the index number of the profile that you want to edit.

Enable User profile function.

Disable User profile function.

It means to set a user name for a profile. e.g.,-n fortest

It means to configure user password. e.g., -p 60fortest

It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user profile

0:Disable

1:Enable

It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user profile

0:Disable

1:Enable

It means to set idle time. e.g., -i 60 set time quota

It means to set time quota of the user profile. e.g., -q 200

It means to set data quota. e.g., -r 1000

It means to specify the data quota unit (MB/GB). e.g., -w MB

It means to set schedule index. Available settings are” sch_idx1,sch_idx2,sch_idx3, and sch_idx4.


-m

-x

It means to set the maximum login user number. e.g., -m 200

It means to set external server authentication

0: None

1: LDAP

2: Radius

3: TACAS e.g., -x 2

It means to view user profile(s). -v

User account

USER_NAME

-t

-d

-q

-r

-w

It means to type a name of the user account.

It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user account.

0:Disable

1:Enable

It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user account.

0:Disable

1:Enable

It means to set account time quota. e.g., -q 200

It means to set account data quota. e.g., -r 1000

It means to set data quota unit (MB/GB).

E x a m p l l e

> user account admin -d 1

Enable the [admin] data quota limited

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : n a n d b a d / n a n d u s a g e

“NAND usage” is used to display NAND Flash usage; “nand bad” is used to display NAND Flash bad blocks.

S y n t t a x nand bad nand usage

E x a m p l l e

>nand usage

Show NAND Flash Usage:

Partition Total Used Available Use% cfg 4194304 7920 4186384 0% bin_web 33554432 11869493 21684939 35% cfg-bak 4194304 7920 4186384 0% bin_web-bak 33554432 11869493 21684939 35%

> nand bad

Show NAND Flash Bad Blocks:

Block Address Partition

1020 0x07f80000 unused


682

1021 0x07fa0000 unused

1022 0x07fc0000 unused

1023 0x07fe0000 unused

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : a p m s h o w / / c l l e a r / / d i i s c o v e r / / q u e r y

The apm command(s) is use to display, remove, discover or query the information of VigorAP registered to Vigor3220.

S y n t t a x apm show apm clear apm discover

apm query


Parameter Description show It displays current information of APM profile. clear discover query

It is used to remove all of the APM profile.

It is used to search VigorAP on LAN.

It is used to query any VigorAP which has been registered to APM

(Central AP Management) in Vigor3220. Information related to the registered AP will be send back to Vigor3220 for updating the web page of Central AP Management.

E x a m p l l e

> apm clear ?

Clear all clients ... done

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : a p m p r o f f i i l l e

This command allows to configure wireless profiles to be used in Central AP Management.

S y n t t a x

apm profile clone [from index][to index][[new name]

apm profile del [index]

apm profile reset

apm profile summary

apm profile [show [profile index]]

apm profile apply [profile index] [client index1 [index2 .. index5]]


Parameter Description clone It is used to copy the same parameters settings from one profile to another APM profile. del reset

It is used to delete a specified APM profile. The default (index #1) should not be deleted.

It is used to reset to factory settings for WLAN profile.


summary show apply from index to index new name profile index client index1/2/3/4/5

It is used to list all of the APM profiles with required information.

It is used to display specified APM profile.

It is used to apply the selected APM profile onto specified VigorAP.

Type an index number in this field. It is the original APM profile to be cloned to other APM profile.

Type an index number in this file. It is the target profile which will clone the parameters settings from an existed APM profile.

Type a name for a new APM profile.

Type the index number of existed profile.

It is useful for applying the selected APM profile to the specified

VigorAP.

E x a m p l e

> apm profile clone 1 2 forcarrie

(Done)

> apm profile summary

# Name SSID Security ACL RateCtrl(U/D)

- ---------------- ---------------- ------------ ------- ------

0 Default DrayTek-LAN-A WPA+WPA2/PSK x - / -

DrayTek-LAN-B WPA+WPA2/PSK x - / -

1 - - - - -

2 forcarrie DrayTek Disable x - / -

3 - - - - -

4 - - - - -

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : a p m c a c h e

This command is used to display or remove the information of registered VigorAP, including

MAC address, name, and authentication. Up to 30 entries of registered information can be stored and displayed.

S y n t t a x

apm cache [show]

apm cache clear


Parameter Description show It means to display the information related to VigorAP registered

Vigor3220. clear It means to remove the information related to VigorAP registered

Vigor3220.

E x a m p l l e

> apm cache show

MAC Name Auth


684

------------ -------------------- --------------------

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : a p m l l b c f g

This command allows to set parameters related to AP management control.

S y n t t a x

apm lbcfg [set] [value]

apm lbcfg[show]


Parameter Description set It means to set the load balance configuration file for APM.

Show

[value]

It shows the configuration value.

You need to type 10 numbers in this field. Each number represents different setting value.

[1] – The first number means the load balance function. Type

1 – enable load balance,

0 – disable load balance.

[2] – The second number means the station limit function. Type

1 –enable station limit,

0 – disable station limit.

[3] – The third number means the traffic limit function. Type

1 – enable traffic limit,

0 – disable traffic limit.

[4] – The forth number means the limit num of station.

Available range is 3~64.

[5] – The fifth number means the upload limit function. Type

1 – enable upload limit,

0 – disable upload limit.

[6] – The sixth number means the download limit function.

Type

1 – enable download limit,

0 – disable download limit.

[7] – The seventh number means disassociation by idle time.

Type

1 – enable disassociation,

0 – disable disassociation.

[8] – The eighth number means to enable or disable disassociation by signal strength. Type

1 – enable disassociation,

0 – disable disassociation.

[9] – The ninth number means to determine the unit of traffic limit (for upload)

1 – Mbps

0 – kbps

[10] – The tenth number means to determine the unit of traffic limit (for download)

1 – Mbps

0 – kbps


E x a m p l e

> apm lbcfg show apm LoadBalance Config :

1. Enable LoadBalance : 0

2. Enable station limit : 0

3. Enable traffic limit : 0

4. limit Number : 64

5. Upload limit : 0

6. Download limit : 0

7. Enable disassociation by idle time : 0

8. Enable disassociation by Signal strength : 0

9. Traffic limit unit (upload) : 0

10.Traffic limit unit (download) : 0 flag : 0

> apm lbcfg set 1 1 0 15 0 0 0 0 1 1

> apm lbcfg show apm LoadBalance Config :

1. Enable LoadBalance : 1

2. Enable station limit : 1

3. Enable traffic limit : 0

4. limit Number : 15

5. Upload limit : 0

6. Download limit : 0

7. Enable disassociation by idle time : 0

8. Enable disassociation by Signal strength : 0

9. Traffic limit unit (upload) : 1

10.Traffic limit unit (download) : 1 flag : 49

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : a p m n a p d e t e c t t

This command is used to enable/disable AP detection function.

S y n t t a x

apm napdetect [get]

apm napdetect [set] [enable/disable AP Detection 1/0][Refresh Time].


Parameter Description get set enable/disable AP Detection

1/0

Refresh Time

It is used to get AP detection data from VigorAP (e.g., AP900).

It allows to set detect configuration to VigorAP.

It is used to enable or disable the AP detection function.

0 – disable the function.

1 – enable the function.

Available values are 1, 3 or 5 (minutes).

E x a m p l l e

Note: To check the scanning result of AP detection, use the command of “ wl scan show

”.

> apm napdetect set 1 1


686

> wl scan show 3

Sta Ch SSID BSSID BssType Security Siganl(%) Beacon

Period First Detected Last Detected

11 DrayTek-LAN-B 02:1d:aa:4c:bd:a8 AP Mixed 26 100

11 DrayTek-LAN-A 00:1d:aa:4f:bd:a8 AP Mixed 42 100

Dec 09,10:35:44 Dec 09,10:35:44

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : h a s e t t

This command can be used to configure HA settings for Vigor routers.

S y n t t a x

ha set [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]



[<command>

<parameter>|…]

-e <1/0>

-l <1/0>

-M <1/0>

-v <1-255>

-R

-p <1-30>

-k <key>

-u <1/0>

-m <interface>

-s

-y

-c <1/0>

-I -[M|H|D] <interval>

-h <Subnet> [<Virtual IP>]


[…] means that you can type in several parameters in one line.

1: Enable the function of High Availability (HA).

0: Disable the function of High Availability (HA).

1: Enable the function of recording the operation record of HA in

Syslog.

0: Disable the function of recording the operation record of HA in

Syslog.

Specify the Redundancy Method for HA.

1: Active-Standby

0: Hot-Standby

Specify the group ID (VHID)

1- 255: Setting range.

Set HA settings to Factory Default.

Specify the Priority ID.

1-30: Setting range.

Specify the Authentication Key.

Key: Max. 31 Characters.

Enable or disable the function of Update DDNS.

1: Enable. When a router changes HA status to primary, it will update DDNS automatically.

0: Disable.

Specify the management interface.

Interface: LAN1 ~ LAN8, DMZ.

It means to renew the status for HA.

It means to perform config sync for HA.

Enable or disable the function of Config Sync.

1: Enable.

0: Disable.

Set the Config Sync Interval for HA. Minimum interval is 15 minutes.

-M: Minute. Setting range is 0/15/30/45. (e.g., ha set -I -M 30)

-H: Hour. Setting range is from 0 to 23. (e.g., ha set -I -H 12)

-D: Day. Setting range is from 0 to 30. (e.g., ha set -I -D 15)

Enable and set virtual IP to the subnet.

Subnet: LAN1 to LAN8, DMZ.

Virtual IP: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,

192.168.1.0)

For example, to enable a virtual IP to the sunet, simply type:


-d <Subnet> ha set –h LAN1 192.168.1.5

Disable a virtual IP to the subnet.

Subnet: LAN1 to LAN8, DMZ.

For example, to disable a virtual IP to the subnet, just type: ha set –h LAN1

E x a m p l e

> ha set -h LAN1 192.168.1.5

% Enable Virtual IP on LAN1

% Set Virtual IP 192.168.1.5 OK!!

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : h a s h o w

This command can be used to show the settings information about config sync and general setup.

S y n t t a x ha show –c ha show –g



-c

-g

Show the settings of config sync.

Show the settings of general setup.

E x a m p l e

> ha show -g

% High Availability : Disable

% Redundancy Method : Active-Standby

% Group ID : 1

% Priority ID : 10

% Preempt Mode : Enable

% Update DDNS : Disable

% Management Interface : LAN1

% Authentication Key : draytek

% Syslog : OFF

%

% [ Index | Enable | Virtual IP ]

% LAN1 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN2 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN3 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN4 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN5 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN6 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN7 - 0.0.0.0

% LAN8 - 0.0.0.0

% DMZ - 0.0.0.0

>

T e l l n e t t C o m m a n d : : h a s t a t u s

This command is used to display HA status information.


688

S y n t t a x

ha status –a [Detail Level]

ha status –m [Detail Level]



-a

-m

Detail Level

Show the status for all of the routers in HA group.

Show the status of local router only.

0: Basic information.

1: Basic information with more data (e.g., firmware version, model,

HTTPs port. MAC address and etc).

2: Basic information with some HA settings.

E x a m p l l e

> ha status -m 2

% [Local Router] DrayTek

% Status

% High Availability

: !

: ! Disable

% Group ID

% Priority ID

: 1

: 10

% Update DDNS : Disable

% Management Interface : LAN1

% Authentication Key : draytek

% Virtual IP: (Max. 7 Virtual IPs)

% ! OFF

% Config Sync : Disable

% Config Sync Interval : 0 Day 0 Hour 15 Minute

% Cached Time : 0 (s)

> ha status -m 0

% [Local Router] DrayTek

% IPv4 : 192.168.1.1

% Status

% State

% Stable

: !

: Down

: ! No

% WAN : ! All WANs Down - Eth

% Config Sync Status : Not Ready

: 0 (s) % Cached Time

%

>


Draytek VIGOR3220 SERIES User Manual

Vigor3220 Series

Multi-WAN Security Firewall

User’s Guide

There are three types of bind type supported.

The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP

Can't work with Firewall Software

Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly. This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.

Security Considerations

Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.

Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.

Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding port mappings.

The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be removed.

.

II. Via URL Content Filter

,

it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and

This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific network.

This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU for WAN1/WAN2.

Related manuals

Draytek

Vigor3220

Draytek

Vigor2135

Draytek

Vigor2135

Draytek

Vigor2763

Draytek

Vigor2763

Draytek

VIGOR3220 SERIES

Huawei

华为路由 H6